910 3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91 3383 Chameleon 32 Users Manual Volume 1 Ver 5.2 Oct91
910-3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91 manual pdf -FilePursuit
910-3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91 910-3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91
User Manual: 910-3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 358
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
CHAMELEON 32 . USER'S MANUAL Version 5.2 This manual, Version 5.2, corresponds to Standard Software Release 4.3.2. TEKELEC 26580 Agoura Road Calabasas, California 91302 Assembly Part Number Text Part Number Information in this documentation is subject to change without notice. Any software which is furnished in conjunction with or embedded within the product(s) described in this documentation is furnished under a license agreement andlor a nondisclosure agreement. and may be used only as expressly permitted by the terms. of such agreements(s). Unauthorized use or copying of the software or this documentation can result in chtil or criminal penalties. No part of this documentation may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means. electronic or mechanical, including photocopying or recording, for any purpose without the express written permission of an authorized representative of Tekelec. Copyright Tekelec 1991. All rights reserved. Chameleon 32 is a registered trademarks of Tekelec. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only, and may be trademarks of their respective companies. The hardware. software and documentation comprising the product(s) are provided under a Teke/ec limited 12 month wamanty. Other than the Dmited warranties that are expressly stated therein. and without limiting the generality thereof, Tekelec makes no warranty, express or implied. to you or to any other person or entity, concerning the hardware, the softWare and this documentation. Tekelec will not be liable for incidental. consequential. lost profits. or other similar damages. or for damages resulting from loss of use. data, revenues or time. In no event wi II Tekelec's liability, regardless of the form of claim. for any damages ever exceed the pricellicense fee paid for the specific product. You may have other rights which vary from state to state. READ THIS FIRST STATIC ELECTRICITY DISCHARGE Sensitive electronic equipment can be damaged or caused to malfunction by the discharge of static electricity. Carpets, synthetic fibers, and a dry atmosphere usually increase the risks of static electricity buildup and equipment damage. Follow the guidelines given below to minimize damage due to the discharge of static electricity. 1. Always make sure the equipment chassis is grounded to the AC ground. 2. When approaching a unit, discharge any static buildup to a discharge panel (often used with office computers) or to the equipment chassis by touching any exposed metal area of the chassis. 3. Use the following precautions to reduce the static levels in your work area: • • • Treat carpets with anti-static coatings Use anti-static carpet covers and mats Humidify the air. WARNING! The Chameleon 32 and 20 have real-time clocks that are backed up by a lithium battery. If this battery is replaced incorrectly, there is a danger of its exploding. Replace this battery only iri strictest accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and with the same or equivalent type of battery as recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to manufacturer's instructions. DISK-DRIVE INSERT Save the yellow, plastic disk-drive insert included with your Chameleon disk drive. This insert MUST be used every time you ship your equipment. Failure to use this insert will result in a damaged drive and a possible additional cost to repair the damaged drive. PLEASE CALL TEKELEC CUSTOMER SUPPORT IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS: 1-800--441_9990 In Alaska and California, call collect: 1-800-880-5656 T ekelec Warranty Agreement I. Term and Price A. The term of this Agreement shall be for one year from the date of shipment to Customer of the equipmer)t ("Equipment") and software ("Software") identified on the reverse side of this Agreement. The Equipment and Software are collectively referred to as the "Products". Upon an advance payment by Customer, not less than 30 days prior to expiration of this warranty agreement or any renewal term hereof, of Tekelec's then current annual maintenance fees with respect to any Product, Customer may renew this Agreement for a period of one year with respect to such Product. Notwithstanding the foreg01ng, Tekelec shall not, be obligated to maintain any Product after the initial term of this Agreement. B. In the event Customer requests Tekelec to perform on-site maintenance service, and Tekelec so agrees, Customer shall reimburse Tekelec for any outof-pocket expenses incurred by Tekelec in performing such service and for the time of Tekelec personnel who performed such service at Tekelec's then standard rates. All such amounts shall be paid by Customer within thirty (30) days of the date of invoice. C. In addition to any other amounts due hereunder, Customer shall pay to or reimburse Tekelec the amount of any sales, use, value added or other tax, duty, tariff or other assessment (other than any tax based solely on Tekelec's net income) and related interest and penalties which Tekelec is at any time obligated to payor collect in connection with or arising out of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement. ' 11_ Procedure A. If the Equipment is defective in materials or workmanShip, Customer will call Tekelec Customer Support at (818) 880-5656 for a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The following information is required: Customer Name, Address and Telephone Number Model Number ' Serial Number of Equipment Detailed Description of Problem All repairs will require return of the entire Equipment to Tekelec. No individual modules or subassemblies will be accepted for repair under this Agreement unless prior authorization is granted by Tekelec. All Customer returned units or subassemblies must be shipped to Tekelec freight prepaid in the original carton or equivalent with an RMA number. The diskette inserts originally shipped in the disk drives must be place back in the drives before shipping. Failure to do so will result in damaged drives and a corresponding charge. Tekelec is not responsible for damage in transit. Tekelec will use commercially reasonable efforts to repair or replace and return the Customer's units within five business days of receipt and subassemblies within three business days of receipt. Tekelec will return them freight prepaid. In the event that Tekelec is unable to repair or replace such Equipment within a reasonable period of time, Tekelec will, as Customer'S sole remedy, refund the price paid by the Customer for such Equ.ipment. B.By requesting the privilege of performing subassembly maintenance, Customer hereby represents and warrants that: 1. Customer is knowledgeable in the safety procedures required for subassembly maintenance of computers and test equipment in general and the Equipment in particular. 2. Customer is specifically knowledgeable regarding the dangers of high voltage CRT tubes, RF and X-Ray radiation, power supplies, and all other dangers which may be encountered in the maintenance of computers and test equipment. 3. Customer knowingly assumes for itself and its 'employees and agents any risk associated with the subassembly maintenance. 4. Customer will follow all safety precautions stated in all applicable Tekelec documentation, as well as all other reasonable safety precautions as may be required in the repair and maintenance of the Equipment, and agrees to indemnify and hold Tekelec, its directors, employees, agents. assignees and successors harmless from and against any and all claims, expenses, losses and damages which arise from Customer's maintenance of the Equipment, including Customer's failure to follow all such safety precautions. III. Warranty A. All Equipment repaired or replaced by Tekelec shall be covered by this Agreement for the remaining term hereof or for 30 days from the date of shipment to Customer, whichever is longer. B. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SECTION III, TEKELEC DOES NOT MAKE BY VIRTUE OF THIS AGREEMENT, AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS, ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE SERVICES, EQUIPMENT OR SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. C. T EKE L E C S HAL L NOT, UNO ERA N Y CIRCUMSTANCES, BE LIABLE TO CUSTOMER FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS OR OTHER CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE SERVICES, EQUIPMENT OR SOFTWARE PROVIDED OR TO BE PROVIDED HEREUNDER, EVEN IF TEKELEC IS APPRISED OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES OCCURRING, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL TEKELEC'S LIABILITY TO CUSTOMER HEREUNDER (WHETHER BASED ON AN ACTION OR CLAIM IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO ANY SERVICES, EQUIPMENT OR SOFTWARE PROVIDED OR TO BE PROVIDED HEREUNDER EXCEED CUSTOMER'S ANNUAL MAINTENANCE FEE HEREUNDER. IV. Limitations A. Tekelec shall have no obligation under this Agreement if the Products are misused, neglected, modified, improperly installed or tested or if they are damaged by accident, inadequate packaging or repairs performed by Customer or any third party or by causes external to the Products such as, but not limited to, failure of or faulty electric power or air conditioning, operator error, failure or malfunction of the data communications system or any equipment which was not ,provided to Customer by Tekelec of from any cause other than ordinary use. The services provided hereunder do not include installation, relocation or removal of the Products or any accessories, apparatus, attachments or other devices or the furnishing of accessories or supplies. 8. In the event any Equipment returned by Customer to Tekelec is determined by Tekelec not to be defective in materials or workmanship, Customer shall reimburse Tekelec for all related shipping costs incurred by Tekelec under Section IIA hereof, and shall pay Tekelec an amount equal to Tekelec's standard service charge applicable to erroneous warranty claims. V. Software Tekelec agrees to provide, without charge, all upgrades or modifications to the Software published by Tekelec during the term hereof. All such upgrades and modifications become part of the Software licensed to Customer pursuant to the terms of Tekelec's standard Software License Agreement. Customer's license for such upgrades and modifications shall automatically terminate upon termination of Customer's license to use such Software. VI. Customer Support Tekelec, through its customer support staff, will provide telephone consultation to Customer in the use and operation of the Equipment and the most recent and immediately preceding versions of the Software. VII. Miscellaneous A. Customer may assign or transfer this Agreement to any entity which acquires all or substantially all of Customer's operating assets or into which Customer is merged or reorganized pursuant to any plan of merger or reorganization. Except as set forth in the immediately preceding sentence, Customer may not assign or transfer this Agreement or any interest herein (including rights and duties of performance) without the prior written consent of Tekelec, which This consent shall not be. unreasonably withheld. Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and shall be binding upon the parties hereto and their permitted successors and assigns. This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California which are applicable to the construction and enforcement of contract between parties resident in California which are entered into and fully performed in California. In the event that any provision is found invalid or unenforceable pursuant to judicial decree or decision, the remainder of this Agreement shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. No waiver of any provision of this Agreement shall be effective unless made in writing. No waiver of any breach of any provision hereof shall constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or of any other provision of this Agreement. This Agreement and any Software License Agreements between Tekelec and Customer are the complete and exclusive statement of the agreement between Tekelec and Customer which supersedes any proposal, prior or contemporaneous agreement, oral or written, and any other communications between Tekelec and Customer relating to the subject matter of this Agreement. PREFACE Introduction The Chameleon 32 User's Guide is intended as a comprehensive overview of the Chameleon 32 for engineers and network managers who use the unit to design, test, install, maintain, and repair telecommunications and computer equipment. It also p~vides a comprehensive overview for both the new and experienced user who may need to review the basic concepts and operations of the Chameleon 32. The Chameleon 32 is a powerful multi-protocol and ISDN test system. With the standard configuration, each phYSical port provides independent monitoring or simulation with a BOP acquisition rate of up to 64 kbps with dense traffic (one flag between frames). A 256k-acquisition option is available, which enables the Chameleon to monitor traffic up to 256 kbps on one port. The Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume II, contains all protocol-specific information', including details on the ISDN ANSI Primary Rate, ISDN CEPT Primary Rate, ISDN Basic Rate and 2B10 Interfaces. Monitoring The Chameleon 32 Monitoring applications interpret and display data communication traffic. The Chameleon 32 provides up to one megabyte of acquisition with a display in easy-to-read mnemonic text. Using the Chameleon 32's Monitoring applications, you can: Tekelec • Analyze 2810, X.25, SNA, X.75, 0.921,0.931, BSC, Async, OLLC, PSH, DPNSS, V.120, DMI MODE 2, DASS 2, DDCMP, and SS#7 protocols • Simultaneously view a Real-Time and History display of interpreted traffic • Display and print statistics for 2B10, X.2S, SNA, BSC, ISDN, . SS#7 and the Primary Rate Interface (Layer 1 error counters) • Capture up to 30 Mbytes of data to disk for later analysis • Filter HOLC, X.2S, 0.921, Q.931, DASS 2 and SS#7 traffic using the Triggering application • Display Dual Line traffic. p-1 09/27/91 Preface Chameleon 32 User's Guide Simulation The Chameleon 32 Simulation packages save you valuable development time. Simulation allows you to emulate either side of the line in a 2B1 0, X.25, SNA, Async, BSC, ISDN 0.921/0.931, or SS#7 environment. Simulation traffic (except SS#7 and Async) can be simultaneously analyzed using any of the monitoring applications described above. Using the Chameleon protocoi-specific programming languages, . you can: • Create a controlled, live environment to test both hardware and software • Test both common and less common error conditions • Simulate network or individual devices such as: • • • • • Mainframes or Front End Processors Modems Terminals or Terminal Controllers ISDN Network Terminator (NT) or Terminal Equipment (TE) Devices Other intelligent communications devices You can also use Simulation languages for the following applications: Teke/ec • To write certification packages to test equipment or software functionality, by writing protocoi-specific scenarios. • After identifying a specific problem usrng Chameleon 32 Analysis (for example, SABM collision), to develop simulation programs to duplicate the problem. • If .having problems running certification packages (for example, DON tests), to copy just the portion of the test package you need, modify it, and run it. p-2 09/27191 Preface Chameleon 32 User's Guide Chameleon 32 BASIC Simulation Language The Chameleon BASIC language is an interpreted test language based on standard BASIC. Since BASIC is a widely-used language, many Chameleon users are already familiar with its general format and usage, and can adapt quickly to Chameleon BASIC language. Chameleon BASIC is structured so that you can develop programs quickly. It also has the added benefit of providing an interactive interface to the user. You can enter many commands directly at the BASIC prompt. The ability to write your programs and run them without compiling means that you can reduce the amount of time required to debug programs. BASIC provides a user-friendly interface for configuring various parameters through the use of set-up menus. It is possible to use Chameleon BASIC to determine your fundamental test design, and then develop the complete test system using C. C Development System The optional C Development System allows you to write C applications programs tailored to your individual testing needs. With the Chameleon 32 C Development System, you have: • Automatic support of layers 1 and 2, with Simulation and Analysis libraries for upper layer programming • UNIX-like libraries for input and output • Full-feature C compiler, per standard Kernighan & Ritchie, producing 68010 object code • vi Editor, linker, and loader via the C Menu Shell • Libraries for screen displays for user-created windows The Chameleon 32 C Development System includes the following special libraries with protocol-specific functions: • • • • • • ~ • Teke/ee Bit Oriented Protocols (BOP) HOLC SOLC LAPO Asynchronous BSC ISDN Basic Rate Interface ISON Primary Rate Interf~ce p-3 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide • • Preface Analysis 2B1 a U-Interface . . TheC Development system, combined with the Chameleon 32 multi-tasking operating system, M8-DOS file compatibility, and Kermit file transfer, provides you with a truly flexible application development capability. ISDN Primary Rate Interface ISDN Basic Rate Interface 2B1 aU-Interface The Chameleon 32 can be configured for ISDN ANSI Primary Rate, CEPT Primary Rate, ISDN Basic Rate Interface, or ISDN Basic Rate U-Interface testing, inc::luding powerful Simulation capabilities and comprehensive Analysis interpretation. The ISDN Primarx Rate Interface lets you connect directly to either a 1.544-Mbps (23B+0) or 2048-kbps CEPT (30B+D) ISDN interface. There is also a Primary Rate Interface Statistics application which displays error statistics. The ISDN Basic Rate Interface lets you connect directly to an ISDN 192-kbps (2B+0) interface. a The 2B1 U-Interface lets you connect directly to a Layer 1 64-kbps (2B+D) network. Dual Port System The Chameleon 32 Dual Port system allows you to: • Simulate different communications channels on two physical ports simultaneously • Test any two, different protocols simultaneously The Dual Port system gives you access to a variety of testing applications. Each port can perform independently, providing multiple interface configurations, including the following combinations: Take/ec • Two V-series interfaces (V.24, V.3S, V.36) • One V-series and one ISDN Basic R~te Interface • One V-seri$s and one Primary Rate Interface • One Basic ~ate and one ISDN Primary Rate Interface 09/27191 Preface Chameleon 32 User's Guide • • Two ISDN Basic Rate Interfaces Two ISDN Primary Rate Interfaces Each physi9al port provides independent monitoring or simulation with a BOP acquisition rate of up to 64 'kbps with dense traffic (one flag beween frames). Like the Single Port system, Dual Port,offers: •. ISDN Basic. Rate access at 192 kbps, • ISDN ANSI Primary Rate access at 1.544 Mbps • ISDN CEPT Primary Rate access at 2.048 Mbps • 281Q U-Interface access at 64 kbps (8 channels) and 16 kbps (0 channel) • Hardware containing 8 microprocessors • Optional C Development system With the unique page format of the Chameleon 32, you can view the activity of both ports on separate display pages and relate events. The LED display can be switched between the ports for physical interface monitoring. . All existing Chameleon 32 hardware and software options are compatible with the Dual Port system. Relatea Documents In addition to this manual, the following documentation is available for the Chameleon 32, depending on the software options you purchased with your machine. • • • • • Taka/ae Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume II (Part No. 91 0-4002) Chameleon 32 Simulation Manual, Volume III (Part No. 910-3372) Chameleon 32 C Manual, Volume IV (Part No. 910-3384) Chameleon 32 Quick Reference Guide (Part No. 910-3353) . Chameleon 32 Tutorials (Part No. 910-3374) p-5 09/27/91 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE CHAPTER List of illustrations Preface One Express Instructions Introduction .................................................................... 1-1 Power Up ...................................................................... 1-1 Booting the System .............................................................. 1-3 Port Configuration ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Application Selections . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 . Page Manipulation Keys ......................................................... 1-11 TWo Hardware and Installation Setting Up the Chameleon 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Front Panel .................................................................... 2-3 LED Overlays .................................................................. 2-4 Chameleon 32 ................................................................. 2-4 Chameleon 32 Rear ............................................................. 2-5 . Chameleon 32 Internal Components '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Display ..................•.................................................. 2-7 Card Cage ..............•..•...................................•. ~ . ... . . . . . . . 2-8 Disk Drives .............•.................................................... 2-8 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 250 Volt Operation ........• ~ . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Temperature Requirements . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Case DeSign ..............•.................................................... 2-9 Hardware Self-Tests ................................ :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 0 Coupler Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 RAM Test .................................................................. 2-14 Software Installation ............................................................ 2-15 Three Using the Chameleon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Simulation and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Configuration Menus .. . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 , Setup Mode Parameter ....•..•..............•................................. 3-5 Mode of Operation Parameter ..•................... '.......•..................... 3-7 Physical Interface Parameter • • . . . • • . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Protocol Parameter ..•..•..••.....•.••................•.•.•................... 3-9 MonitOring Data Source ....•.......•..•...............•........ ... " . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Capture Mode . . . 4 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3-12 Function Keys .....••...•..••..•....•............•............................. 3-13 F6 Setup .........••.....••••......•.•................•••................... 3-13 F7 Physicl ........• ; .....••...•.............•.•••.....•.•................... 3-13 F8 Version ..............•••.......•.........••..................•.......... 3-13 TOC-1. 09/27/91 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE CHAPTER F9 Save .................................................................... 3-14 F10SetT.O .•......•.•.......•••...•..............•••...•.................. 3-15 Creating an Autobooting DEFAULT file ......•......•..•.....•....•..•••... , ......... 3-16 Applications Selection Menu .................... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Monitoring Applications ...•.................... ,.............................. 3-18 Simulation Applications ..............................•.......•................ 3-18 Function Keys ................................ : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 F1 Load/Stop A . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 F6 Reset . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 F7 Menu •.•...........................................•................. 3-21 F8 Save ....•.........................................•.................. 3-22 F9 Set T.O. . .•............••.•......•.•.................•............... 3-23 F10 Exit . . . . . . • . . . . • . . • . . . • • . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Acquisition : .•..•.........................•........••........••............. 3-24 Stopping Applications ..........................................•..........•..... 3-24 Time Stamping ...••......•.........................•.......................... 3-24 Dual Port on the Chameleon 32 ........................................... ;....... 3-25 Configuration Menu .......................................................... 3-27 Port B Configuration ...................................•................... 3-27 LED Display ..•...........•........................ ; ..................... 3-27 Protocol Selection . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Applications Selection Menu ......•...............•••...•••...••....•...•...... 3-28 F1 Load A •...•••.•........•...........•.....•.......•................... 3-28 F2 Load B ..........•............•................•.•.................... 3-28 F3 Load AB .•........•...............•...........•.•..................... 3-28 Time Stamping ........•..•.......... '.' ..•••.......•.................•....... 3-30 Chameleon 32 Pages ............•....................•....................... 3-31 Multiple Pages. . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 The Active Page .....•.•......•...................•.••........... . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Chameleon 32 Keyboard .•...........•..............•........' ................. 3-33 Dedicated Key Fundions .................•................................. 3-33 Left-Hand Keys .....••............................•......•................ 3-34 Right-Hand Keys ..........•.............................................. 3-35 Arrow Keys ...........•.............•...•................................ 3-36 ASCII Keys ...........•..........................................•....... 3-36 Page Manipulation .....•.............................•.......•....•. ; ........ 3-37 On-Line Help ......•...•.•.............•..........•.•.•..••.••......•....... 3-38 Soft Function Keys ...•.......•...•.•. '. . . • . . . • . . . . . . • . . . • • . . • • • • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 3-39 ! Four Analysis Starting Analysis •••••••••.•••.. ,.................................................. AnalySis Applications .•.••.••••••.•••.•..••.•.........•••.•••..•.••••..•••..•..... Saving Data .••••.••....•••.•••.••.•.•.......•..••...••.•....••.•••..••..•...... General Features of the Analysis Page •..••..•.•...••..•...•••••.••••.•••.•.•..••..•. DCEIOTE Display •.••.•.•••.••..••.•••..•.•.•...••••.•...••••..••....•..••.•.• TOC-2. 09/27/91 4-1 4-1 4--1 4-2 4--2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER PAGE tMM!!f!i!i!/!¥h!;WiiBWtMi¥!!i!j!j!fii#!ii!!iiiWiitiiHtfHii!if.Mit§fNtfj![!,#?i!!fii!!it!i!im&iii!!.~1ti!MitifhlMiii!!iili!!i!iliitMW!ffi!Hii!!KWii¥WiM!iiii¥!¥@i!filMifW4!iiltWWtii$i!¥tJMH Colors ...................................................................... 4-3 Interlace Lead Transitions ...................................................... 4-3 Baud Rate Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Incomplete Event Display ....................................................... 4-4 TIme Stamping ................................................................ 4-4 History Trigger Feature ........................................................... 4-5 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 F1 ...................................................................... 4-6 F2 ...................................................................... 4-7 F3 ...................................................................... ~ F4-F9 .....................................................•............ ~ FlO ................................................................... , . ~ Function Key Files .......................................... :................. 4-9 Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 0 Aora .................................................................. 4-10 Borb ............................................................... ·... 4-10 Ctrl B . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 0 Ctrl C ................................................................... 4-11 Ctrl E ................................................................... 4-11 Ctrl N ................................................................... 4-11 Ctrl P ....•.............................................................. 4-11 History Printing: Method 1: .......•..................................... . . 4-12 History Printing: Method 2: ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Ctrl Z ................................................................... 4-14 Acquisition Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Event Overwritten Message ................................................. 4-16 History Page Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 History Lock . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 History Freeze Mode ......................................................... 4-17 History Display Commands .................................................... 4-17 Five Dual Line Introduction .................................................................... 5-1 Dual Une vs. Analysis ............................................... ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Dual Une Modes ................................................................ 5-3 Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Display ...•............•.......................•.•.................•.....'. 5-4 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . • . • . • . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 5-4 Function Keys .... . . . . . . . . • . . • . . • • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • • . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 5-5 Freeze Mode ...•........ : ............................•.........•...•........ 5-7 Display ......•.................•.....•..........•.••..•.•................ 5-7 Cursor Keys ....................•.. .. ' . • . . • . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Function Keys .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Marking Bytes .............•..........................•..•......•..•....•....•.. 5-9 Clearing Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . 5-1 0 TOC-3. 09/27/91 • TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE CHAPTER Six Dlrect-To-Disk Introduction ......•••.•.. .-...................................................... General Notes ... '.' . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . Recording Traffic with Direct-To-Oisk .........................•...............•...... Replaying Direct-To-Oisk Traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Dir~To-Disk Data to a File ..................•................•............ Loading a Direct-To-Oisk File ............... '....................................... Seven Statistics Introduction .•.•..••.......•...•................•............................... Statistics Display •.•••..•......•................. : ............................... Statistics Function Keys ......................................................... Address Function Keys ..••.•.......•..........•........... ~ . • . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . Protocol Layer Function Key .•................•.........•..........••........... Print Function Key ....................................•.•..................... Reset Function Key ..........•................•................•..•... '.' ....... lime/Date Function Key ................................•......•....•........... Bytes Function Key .................•..... , ...................••.............. Utilization Statistics ••.•.•......•.....•.•..•.•••..........••.........•.....••..... Performance Page •••••.•••••.••••...•••••.......•....•.••.•...•...•.•....•••.... Function Keys ••••••.••••...••.••.••••...••.•....•...•••...•......• '.' . . . • • . . . . Interpretation •••••••••.•••••...••.•••••..•.•...•.•.•••••...•.•.•..•....•..... Calculation of Statistics Performance .................................••........... Eight 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-6 6-7 7-1 7-2 7-2 7-4 7-5 7-5 7-6 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-9 Triggering Introduction .........•...•.•..•................................................. 8-1 Condition!Action ...•................•.....................................•..... 8-1 Default .•..............•..•.........•...•...••.... : . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Starting Triggering .•.•.....•.••......••.••.....•.••..........................•... 8-4 The Triggering Page ....•....•........•..........•............................... 8-5 F1 Start a New Session ..•........•....•.......••.......••..................... 8-5 F2 Load a Triggering File from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Triggering Editor •......•.••.......•...................•....................... 8-7 Name Parameter ..•.............•.......................................... 8-7 F1 Addtrig ••...•.•...•......•.........•.•.................•......••.... 8-7 F2 NewName ...•..••••..•.....••...•••.•.•....••••......•..•.......•... 8-7 F3 Deltrlg ••..••••.••.•.•••..•.• ; .....•.•••..••••..••....•. ; • . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 F8 Restart •••.••••••.•...••••.•••••••••••.•.•.•••••...•••.••.....•.••.. 8-8 F9Load ............ ~ .......... 8-8 F10 Save ........................................ 8-8 Status Parameter •..•••••••..•.••••••••••••.••••...•••..••.•••••.••...••... 8-9 F1 1stlime ••••..••.•••.•..•.••.••••••..•••.•••••••.•••....••••..•.•••.. 8-9 F2 Disable ••••.•.•••••••.••••••.•..••••••••.• , •••••.•••••.•....•.•• ; •.. 8-9 F3 Whenever .••.••••.••.•.•.••••..•.•••••••••.••.•••••.•.••.......••... 8-9 Conditions Parameter ••••••..•••••••••.••••.•••.••••••....••.•••••••..•..•. 8-10 o.o.o • • • • • • • • • • • • • • o •• a II TOC-h 09/27/91 ••••••••••••••••• •••••••••••••• It ••• e' • • TABLE OF'CONTENTS PAGE CHAPTER Logical NOT ............................................................ 8-10 Conditions Menu Structure •.............................................. 8-11 DTElDCE . . . . . • • . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Error .........•........•................•............................. 8-12 Counter .............................................................. 8-12 limer .........•...................................................... 8-13 RLlime ............................................................... 8-13 Frame ............................................................... 8-13 FramLen ............................................................. 8-15 Protocol ......... ; ..............•..•...................~ .............. 8-15 HDLC ...................................•.......•................. 8-16 a.921 .....•............. '..............•.•.....•....•........•..... 8-17 X.25 ..........................•........•.................•......... 8-18 a.931 ..............•............................•................. 8-19 DASS2 .................................••.......•..•.............. 8-20 SS#7 Triggering ........................ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 #7 L2 (SS#7 Level 2) ................................................. 8-23 #7 L3L4 (SS#7 Level 3 and Level 4) ..................................... 8-25 CT TUP (S5#7 TUP) ................................................. 8-33 CT ISUP (SS#7 ISUP) ................................................ 8-35 TR71SUP .•.•..................... : ........................•....... 8-39 Variable ..••.••••.•...•..................•.•..............•....•...... 8-42 Leads .......•...........................•.•.•......•.......•...•..... 8-43 Port .......................................•.........•............... 8-43 Actions .•..•......•..................................................... 8-44 Arm .........•........................................................ 8-44 Stats ...•............•................................................. 8-44 Display .........•.•....•.............................................. 8-44 ->Disk .•..............•................•............................. 8-45 Mesg .......•........................................................ 8-45 StopAc ............................................................... 8-45 IncCnt .•............................................................. 8-45 ResCnt ............................................................... 8-46 limer ..........•........•............................................ 8-46 SetVars .............................................................. 8-46 V Arith .•.......•.....•.••............................................ 8-46 TrigOut . • . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 8-46. Run lime Triggering Page ... '.' . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • . . . • . . • • . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . 8-47 Messages •••..•••.••.•..•.••..........•.•..•.....••........•....••.•.....•• 8-48 Programming Examples .•..•....•........•.••.........••....••••..•.•..•....•.... 8-49 Nine Utilities Introduction ...•.••...•.•••..•.•••..•....... ~ . . . . . . • . . . . • . . • . • . . • . • . • • . . . . . . . . . • Menu Access ••••....•..••.....•••.....•..•... _...••......••••.•......••.....•... F1 Remote 1/0 Port Setup •••...••..•.•......•....• '...•.••.•.•.•.•••....••••••..... Serialized Remote Mode •.•....••....••.•••....•..•.•........•..•.•.....•...... TOC-S. 09/27/91 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-3 TA'BLE OF CONTENTS PAGE CHAPTER Remote I/O Menu . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s-4 Compatible Terminal Type ...................................................... s-s Baud Rate' ...............•.....•........•........•.......................... s-s Number of Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Number of Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Parity ...................................................................... ~ Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ Remote Terminal Keyboard ..................................................... 9-7 Keyboard Hex Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 F2 Printer Setup ............................................................ ;... 9-9 Printer Type ................................................................ 9-1 0 Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 0 Print Commands and Keys (Table) ............................................. , . 9-11 F3 Set Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 F4 Traffic Load/Save ................................................. '.' ......... 9-13 Operation .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 3 File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . 9-14 Data Source ............. '.... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Percent~ge . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Data Size .•......... ,.,. '.' ................................................. 9-15 F5 6051745 Analysis Conversion . • .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 F6 Check Free Disk Space ........•.....•••....•..........•............... '.' . . . . . 9-20 F7 Kermit/Connect Mode Setup .....•....•......•.•......•.•......••.............. 9-21 Modes .................................................................... 9-21 Data Transfer ................." .............................................. 9-21 Connect Mode ..............................................' ................ 9-21 Default Setup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Baud Rate ................................................................. 9-22 Number of Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Number of Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Parity ..................................................................... 9-23 File Type .............................. " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Number of Retransmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Transmission Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Fa Backup/Restore Menu ...................................•.................... 9-26 Operation ...•..........................•............•...................... 9-27 Source ................................;................................... ~27, F9 FMS File Conversion ...................•.•...•...•...•.............•......... So-29 Ten File Management introduction ........................................... '..•............... ~. . . . .. File and Diredory Structure .•.•.•...... , •...........•................, • . . . . . . . . • . . . . Files •.•.. , .......... , ..•.......•.... , ..•...................••..........•.. Hard Disk Directories .........•.. : . ,', .•..•. , , .••........••.••.. , .. ~ . • . . . . . • . . . . F!oppy Disk Diredories ....•.•....•••...•...............•....••.••............ TOC-6. 09/27/91 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-2 10-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE CHAPTER Hard Disk Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . • • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . .. 10-3 File Extensions (Table) .....................• ".•.....•••.........•.•......•..... 1Q-4 C Applications ..................................................•..•...•..•.... 10-0 Menu Access ...................................................•.............. 10-0 Ust Selector ................................................................ 10-7 View Files .................................................................. 10-7 etr! D R&-Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 View Files ..........•.................................................... 10-9 F1 Chdir (Change Directory) .............................•..................... 10-8 F2 Copy (Copy Files) .........................•.........•.................... 10-10 F3 Delete (Delete File) .............•...•.••....•........................•.... 10-12 F4 Rename (Rename File) ...........•..•...••...•.......•........•.•......... 10-1~ F5 Format (Format Aoppy Disk) .......•..•..•..••............................. 10-14 F6 Dsk Copy (Disk Copy) ..................................................... 10-15 F7 TX File (Transmit File) .•...................•......•....................... 10-16 F8 RX File (Receive File) ..................................................... 10-19 F9 Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Eleven BERT (Bit Error Rate Testing) " Introduction ••......••.............•..•.....•..••....••..•.•............•...... 11-1 Using the BERT Application ••.•......•••••....••.•..•......•...•..••..•...." ...... 11-3 Setup Menu .•••••...•.•...........•.....••....•..•...•.•.•..•.•.......•.... 11-5 Setup Parameter Descriptions .........................•.•...••..•........... 11-9 BERT Pattern Editor .....••................•.............•..••........•...... 11-13 BERT Run-time Pages ...•.......•.•......•.................•............... 11-15 Common Displays . . . • • . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-15 Function Keys .......................................••...•.............. 11-16 Errored Bits/Errored Block Statistics ............................•..•.......... 11-18 Errored Seconds Statistics .........•................... ~ .•.•...•........... 11-20 Synchronization Statistics ..................................•.•.... ". . . . . . . .. 11-22 Une Synchronization ............•..............................•............... 11-23 TOC-7. 09/27/91 TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX Appendix A: PAGE Preliminary Troubleshooting Tekelec Customer Support ........................................................ A-1 Board Configuration ................................................. ; ........... A-3 Appendix B: Electrical Characteristics of the V.24 and V.3S Interfaces V.24lnterface .................................................................. B-1 V.3S Interface .................................................................. 8-5 Appendix C: Pinouts Parallel Printer Connedor Pinout .................................................. C-1 Serial Printer Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. C-2 Remote Terminal Connector Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. C-3 Aux1 and Aux 2 Connector Pinouts ...........•......' .................................... , C--4 Video Connector Pinout .................' .... ; ....... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. C-5 Appendix 0: SCSI Signal Interface Appendix E: '. Chameleon 32 LED Overlays Standard LED Overlay ......•..•.......•.......................................... E-1 ANSI Primary Rate Interface Overlay ................................................ E-3 CEPT Primary Rate Interface Overlay ......................................... ; ...... E-5 Basic Rate Interface Overlay ....................................................... E-7 X.21 Interface Overlay ............................................................ E-9 2B1 Q lJ-Interface Overlay ....................................................... E-11 Appendix F: Decimal-Hexadecimal Conversion Chart Appendix G: ASCII-EBCDIC-HEX Table Appendix H: Electrical Characteristics of the V-Type Interfaces Appendix I: DSCS Interface Module Introduction ............••.............................•........................ The Interface Module ......•.........••....•..................................... Simulate • . . . . • . . . . . • • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . Specifications ..•.•.•.......•..•....................•........................... iii Appendix J: , • " • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• 1-1 1-1 1-2 1--2 1-3 G.703 Co-Directional Interface Module Introduction ..................:........................ •. '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . J-1 TOC-S. 09/27/91 TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX PAGE nmi~~j!@i!fiiiw!J#Mt!iiJMMM!!M1!Wil!~ii¥it!i!imWN@!#MM!!i!J!!!fiif¥iti!!i!i!WWJM!N§!!i!i!iW!t¥i!iii!i!t!!!iti#Wiiiifi!!!M!!U!iitifi!i!tf!!Ji!UtUttt!NfN¥t!!tr@!!W!Niifffii@!iWil!lNf The Interface Module ............................................................ Simulate .................-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications .................................................................. Appendix K: J-1 J-2 J-2 J-3 256k Data Capture Option Introduction .................................................................... K-1 Umitations ..................................................................... K-2 Appendix L: TTL Interface Module Introduction .................................................................... Interface Module ..........•........................................... . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTL Interface Connectors ....................................................... DIP Switch Configuration ....................................................... Appendix M: Remote Control Via Modem Glossary Index • TOC-9. 09/27/91 L-1 L-2 L-3 L-4 L--6 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS FIGURE CAPTION PAGE t::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::(::::::;:::::::::::::::::::'::;:::::::::::::::::::::;::::::::;::::iii:::::':::::::::::::)::::;:;::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::;:::::'::!/::::::!:::¥:::::::::iii::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::!:::::')::::iii::!:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::;::::::!::::::::::;::::::;:::::::::::::::::;::::::::::;::;::::::;::::::::::::::::::1 Chapter 1: Express Instructions 1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6. 1. 7. 1.8. Chameleon 32 Rear View .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Chameleon 32 Front View (Closed) .......................................... 1-2 Chameleon 32 Front View (Open) ............................................ 1-3 Power Up Screen ........................................................ 1-4 Menu Setup Mode (Dual Port) .............................................. 1-5 Protocol Setup Menu ...................................................... 1-7 Applications Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Page Manipulation Keys .................................................. 1-11 Chapter 2: Hardware and Installation 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Chameleon 32 Front Panel (Detail) ........................................... 2-3 Chameleon Rear Panel (Detail) ............................................. 2-5 Chameleon 32 Mechanical Layout .......... '" .............................. 2-7 Self Test Menu ......................................................... 2-10 Coupler Test Menu ...................................................... 2-11 Coupler Test (Port A or Port B) ........................................... .. 2-11 Error Messages Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Bum In Test ........................................................... 2-13 Ram Test .............................................................. 2-14 'Chapter 3: Using the Chameleon 32 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 Monitoring Transmissions ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Simulating Host Transmission ............................................... 3-2 Menu Setup Mode (Host Port) .............................................. 3-4 Chameleon 32 Files Display ................................................ 3-5 Monitor Setup Menu ...................................................... 3-9 Cyclic Traffic Storage in the Acquisition Buffer ....... ',' ........................ 3-12 Applications Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Chameleon 32 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Sample Dual Port Configuration Menu ..................•.................... 3-26 Chameleon 32 Applications Selection Menu .............................•.. ',' . 3-29 Sample Screen Display ................................................... 3-32 The Chameleon 32 Keyboard ................•.......•.•................... 3-33 LOI-1 09127/91 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS FIGURE PAGE CAPTION 3.13 3.14 Arrow Keys .........................•.................................. 3-36 Chameleon 32 Help Facility ............................................... 3-38 3.15 Chameleon 32 Softkeys ................................................. 3-39 Chapter 4: Hardware and Installation 4.1 Sample X.25 History Page ................................................ 4-10 4.2 Analysis Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4.3 History Buffer Keys ....................................................... 4-12 4.4 Single Port Buffer Capacities .........•.................................... 4-15 4.5 Dual-Port Buffer Capacities ..........•.......... , ......................... 4-15 4.6 Event Overwritten Processes .........•................•................... 4-16 4.7 History Display Command Keys ....•.....' ....................... '........... 4-18 Chapter 5: Event: 5.1 Chameleon 32 VO Buffers with Sample Events ................................. 5-1 5.2 Event Page for Bit-Oriented Protocols .................... ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... 5-2 5.3 Event Page for Async ................ . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.4 Event Page for BSC ................•..................................... 5-4 Chapter 6: Statistics No Listings - Chapter 7: Statistics 7.1 Available Statistics Pages .................................................. 7-1 7.2 Sample Statistics Page (X.25 Une Statistics) ................................... 7-3 7.3 Sample Statistics Report (X.25Une) .......................................... 7-7 7.4 The X.25 Performance Page ................................................ 7-8 Chapter 8: Triggering 8.1 Trigger Components .... ~ ..•........•.••..•......•.......•................ 8-1 8.2 Logical Operations of Triggering ......••...•........••.•..•......•........... 8-2 8.3 The Chameleon 32 Application Selection Menu (X.25 Monitoring) ...•............... 8-4 8.4 The Triggering Page .............•...•..............•.•................... 8-5 8.5 The Triggering Editor .............•.••.•....••...•.....•.•................. 8-6 LOI-2 09127191 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS FIGURE PAGE CAPTION 8.6 Triggering Conditions Menu Structure ......................................... 8-11 8. 7 SS~7 8.8 SS#7 Level 3 and Level 4 Triggering Options ...•..................... , . . . . . . . . 8-26 8.9 Heading Code Mnemonic Selection for Telephone User Part (TUP) ................ 8-28 8.10 TUP Initial Address Message (lAM) Form ............................ '.' ....... 8-29 8.11 SS#7 CCITI TUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options ................................ 8-33 8.12 SS#7 CCITI ISUP Level 3 and Level 4 Option ................................ 8-35 8.13 . The ISUP Mnemonic Table ................................................ 8-36 8'.14 SS#71TR7ISUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options ................................. 8-39 8.15 The 1TR7 ISUP Mnemonic Table ......................................... . . 8-40 8.16 DCE Interface Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 8.17 DTE Interface Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 8.18 Run-lime Triggering Page .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47 8.19 Programming Example 1 - .Display Frames with Same Call Reference .............. 8-49 8.20 Programming Example 2 - Alert Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51 8.21 CCITI TUP Sample Trigger ....................................... , ....... 8-52 8.22 A Basic TrigOut (Trigger External Device) Setup ............................... 8-53 8.23 R5-232 Pinouts for Triggering to External Device .............................. 8-54 8.24 TrigOut Pulse Pattern .................................................... 8-54 Level 2 Triggering Options ........................................... 8-23 Chapter 9: Utilities 9.1 Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9.2 Terminal Setup Menu ..................................................... 9-5 9.3 Chameleon 32 Keyboard Emulation .......... , ............................... 9-7 9.4 Keyboard Hex Values ..................................................... 9-8 9.5 Print Commands and Keys .............................................. . . 9-11 9.6 Set Date and lime Menu ................................................. 9-12 9.7 Traffic Operations Menu ................................................... 9-13 9.8 File Conversion Menu .................................................... 9-16 9.9 6451705 Data Conversion Menu ............................................ 9-17 9.10 Check Free Disk Menu ........•.......................................... 9-20 9.11 Kermit Connect Mode Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 9.12 Backup Menu .......................................................... 9-26 LOI- 3 09127/91 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS· FIGURE PAGE CAPTION Chapter 10: File Management 10.1 Chameleon 32 Hard Disk Directory Structure ................................. 10-3 10.2 Chameleon File Name Extensions .......................................... 10-4 10.3 File Management Menu .................................................. 1Q-6 1004 File Transfer Utility (Transmit) Screen ........ , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-17 10.5 File Transfer Utility (Receive) .............................................. 0-20 < Chapter 11: BERT 11 .1 Hardware Configurations ............................•.................... 11-2 11.2 Network Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-2 11.3 BERT SYNC Setup Menu ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11 ~ 11.4 The BERT ASYNC Setup Menu ....................... , .................... 11.5 The BERT Setup Menu for ISDN PRI ........................................ 11-7 11.6 The BERT Setup Menu for ISDN 1B 10 and BRI ............................... 11-7 1107 The BERT Setup Parameters for Available Interfaces ........................... U-8 11.8 BERT Data Pattern Algorithms ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-1 0 11.9 Signal Path in Remote (Transmit) Mode ...................................... 11-9 11.10 Signal Path in Local (Transmit) Mode ............................ '" . . . . . . . . .. 11-9 11.11 Signal Path in (Local) Receive ............................................. 11-9 11 .12 BERT Pattern Editor ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 11 .13 The First BERT Run-Time Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-18 11.14 Second BERT Run-Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ~20 11.15 The BERT Synchronization Statistics Page .................................. 11-22 11~ Appendix H: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays E.l The Standard LED Display Overlay ............................... ~ .......... E-2 E.2 The ANSI Primary Rate Interface LED Display .................................. E....3 E.3 CEPT Primary Rate Interface LED Display ..................................... E-5. E.4 Basic Rate InterfaceLED ...........•....................................... E-7 E.5 X.21 Interface LED Overlay ................................................ E-9 E.S The Chameleon 322810 U-Interface LED Display ......... ~ ................... E-11 LOI- 4 09127/91 CHAPTER ONE: EXPRESS INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This section gives you brief step-by-step instructions for powering up the Chameleon 32, and configuring one or both ports (where applicable) for monitoring or simulation. It assumes that this is the first time the Chameleon 32 has been used. If your screens differ from those described in this section, it indicates that your Chameleon 32 has been previously configured. If you want more information on any of the topics covered in this section, refer to Chapter Three: Using the Chameleon 32. If you are using a Dual Port Chameleon 32, perform the steps in this section, and then refer to the section in Chapter Three entitled Dual Port on the Chameleon 32 for additional information on configuring and using a Dual Port machine. If you want to configure the Chameleon 32 to use the C Development System, refer to the Chameleon 32 C Manual, Volume IV. Power Up To power up the Chameleon 32, do the following: 1. Place the Chameleon 32 on a secure surface with the Tekelec logo facing you, and easy access to the ports in the rear. To angle the front of the Chameleon upward for easy viewing, rotate the two feet on the bottom front of the unit forward until they lock into place. Be sure that the feet are securely locked into place before you rest the Chameleon on the feet. TEKELEC 2. Verify that the Chameleon 32 is set to the correct AC voltage setting for your country. This has been preset at the factory, but should be checked before th"e Chameleon 32 is powered on. The AC Voltage Selection is on the rear of the Chameleon 32, as indicated in Figure 1.1 on the following page. 3. Remove the power cord from the storage compartment in the back of your Chameleon 32. 1-1 8/17'89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Express Instructions 4. Plug the power cord into the power inlet of the Chameleon 32, as shown in Figure 1.1. 5. Plug the other end of the power cord into a grounded outlet. . 0000000 AC VOLTAGE SELECTION 'i:Do : Do: ~WR I I D FUSE HOLDEROne of the following will be displayed: • OFF If OFF t the timer is not set. When the Chameleon 32 is powered on, the DEFAULT file will be loaded, but not executed. • (time) If a value is displayed in the form MM:SS, it indicates that the timer is set. The displayed time indicates when the DEFAULT file will be executed after the Chameleon 32 system software is booted. For example, if the timer value is set to 00:30, the DEFAULT file will be loaded and executed 30 seconds after the system software is booted. The valid range of the Autoboot timer is 00:05 to 59:59. When you press FlO Set T.O, the Fl key becomes a toggle to turn the Autoboot timer ON or OFF. If you turn the timer ON, you are prompted for a timer value. To change the value, use the Delete key to erase the current time, enter the new time, and then press Return. If the Autoboot timer is set, the following message is displayed when the system software is booted: In xx min xx seconds the default configuration will start When the timer expires, the DEFAULT ·file is automatically loaded and executed. Press any key to abort the timer and stop the execution of DEFAULT. . The following page outlines the steps necessary to create an Autobooting DEFAULT configuration file. TEKELEC 3-15 7:589 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Creating an Autobooting DEFAULT File To create a configuration file which automatically executes on power up, perform the following steps: 1. On the first Configuration Menu, enter the desired configuration parameters. 2. Press F10 Set T.O from either the Configuration Menu or the Applications Selection Menu. 3. If the Timer is OFF, press F1 ON. 4. Press Delete to erase the current value. 5. Enter any value and press Return. The valid timer range is 5 seconds to 59 minutes, 59 seconds using the format MM:SS. You must enter two digits for both the .minutes and the seconds. For example, to set the Autoboot timer to 1 minute. 30 seconds, enter: 01 :30 < Return > 6. Press F9 Save. 7. Press F1 Default to save the configuration and· timer value as the DEFAULT file. The Autoboot timer value must be saved as part of the DEFAULT configuration file. . 8. To test the Autobooting feature, reset the Chameleon. When the system software is booted, the following message is displayed in the center of the Main Configuration menu: In xx min xx seconds the default configuration will start When the timer expires, the automatically loaded and executed. DEFAULT file is To abort the timer and stop the execution of DEFAULT, press any key. TEKELEC 3·16 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Applications Selection Menu When you complete the first configuration menu, press Go. This displays the Applications Selection Menu, as shown in Figure 3.7. The applications available will depend on which protocol(s) and mode of operation (Monitoring or Simulation) you selected in the previous menu. The Applications Selection Menu allows you -to select one or more applications, and the ports you want to run the applications on. It only displays the applications that are currently available for the selected protocol(s). Figure 3.8 lists the Monitoring and Simulation applications that are available for each protocol. User C applications (simulation or analysis) may also appear in this menu. See the next page for more information. Note Acquisition Mode MonitOring . Ports ANALYSIS A B TRIGGER X25STAT A EVENT BASIC MonitOring Ports -+ OIRTOSK Simulation Simulation Ports -+ FR_HOLC SM_HOLC T_SITREX See page 3-20 Ports SITREX See page 3-21 See page 3-23 See page 3-21 See page 3-23 See page 3-22 Figure 3.7: Chameleon 32 Applications Selection Menu (Simulation Mode) TEKELEC 3-17 05/01191 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide In Simulate mode, you can run Monitoring and Simulation at the same timeon a single port. Figure 3.7, on the previous page, shows an Applications Selection menu configured for X.25 Simulation. The general features of the Applications Selection Menu are described below. Arrow Cursor The red arrow cursor indicates the active window. You can select and load applications in the active window. The white arrow cursor indicates the inactive page. Press Shift, or ShiftJ.. to change the active window. . Up/Down Arrow If more applications exist than can be displayed in a window, a small red arrow appears in the left border of the window. This indicates which arrow key to press to display additional applications in that window. For example, if an up arrow appears, press the up arrow key to display additional applications. Monitoring Window The upper window displays the MonitOring applications that are available for the selected protocol and configuration. Refer to the next page for a list of applications by protocol. Simulation Window The lower window (in Simulation mode) . displays the Simulators available for the selected protocol. Simulators are displayed in the format Language.J)rotocoL F.or example, SM_HDLe is SIMP/L HOLC. Refer to the Chameleon 32 Simulation Manual for a description of the Simulators. C Applications C applications compiled on the Chameleon 32 can be started from the Applications Selection .menu, if the executable C file conforms to the following: • The file has the extension .exe. • The file is copied to one of the directories below (xxxx is a protocol sub-directory of analysis or simu~: a:\tekelec\analysis\xxxx a:tekelec\Simu l\XXxx The directory determines when the application will be displayed in the Applications Selection menu. For example, if the application resides in a:ltekeleclanalysislappl, it is displayed in the Monitoring Only applications copied to window for aU protocols. a:lteke/eclanalysislappl can be started on Ports A+B on Dual Port machines. C applications in all other directories must be stored on If the application resides in each port independently. a:\tekeleclanalysis\x25, it is displayed in the Monitoring window only when X.25 is the selected protocol. If the application resides . in a:tekelec\Simul, the application appears in the Simulation window for all protocols. Note: TEKELEC Direct-to-Disk and Direct-trom-Oisk are available for all protocols. Triggering is available for all protocols except Async, which provides interface lead triggering only. If Triggering is listed in the 3-18 05101191 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide table below, it indicates that there are protocol-specific triggering capabilities for that protocol. Several packages listed below are optional. APPLICATIONS AVAILABLE PROTOCOL MONITORING CPACKAGE BASIC SIMULATOR Async Analysis, Dual Line Chameleon Async Basic Rate Interface BASIC Runtime display BRI Library esc Analysis, Statistics, Dual Chameleon BSC Line esc & Analysis Library DASS2 Analysis, Dual Line, Triggering BOP & Analysis Library DDCMP Analysis, Dual Line BOP & Analysis Library DMI Analysis, Dual Line DPNSS Analysis, Dual Line ISDN Analysis, Dual Line, FRAMEM LAPD, SIMP/l LAPD & Analysis Library (0.921/0.931 ) Statistics, Triggering LAPD, Multi-Unk LAPD Primary Rate Interface PRIMARY Runtime display, Error Statistics PRI Library PSH Analysis, Dual Line BOP & Analysis Library OLLC Analysis, Dual Line BOP & Analysis Library SNAlSDLC Analysis, Statistics, Dual FRAMEM SDLC, SIMP/L SDLC & Analysis Library Line, Triggering SDLC SS7 Analysis, Dual Line, Statistics, Triggering V.120 Analysis, Dual Line X.2S/HDLC Analysis, Statistics, Dual FRAMEM HOLe, SIMP/L HDLC & Analysis Library Line, Triggering HDLC, SITREX, T. SITREX X.7S Analysis, Dual Line BOP & Analysis Library 2B10 Analysis, Statistics, 2B 1( Runtime .. U-Interface Library FRAMEMDMI Async & Analysis Library BOP & Analysis Library BOP & Analysis Library , SS#7 Simulator V.120 SIMP/L BOP & Analysis Library Figure 3.8: Chameleon 32 Applications TEKELEC 3-19 09/27/91 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Applications Selection Menu Function Keys The function key options for the Applications Selection Menu are described in this section. F1 Load/Stop A This option enables you to load an application that you want to run on Port A. To load an application, do the following: 1; Move the red cursor arrow next to the application name. 2. Press F1 Load A to load the application. 3. A blinking A appears in the Ports column as the application loads. When the letter stops blinking, the application is loaded.' (Note that the F1 key reads Stop A when an application is loaded. See step 7 for more information about Stop A.) 4. Load additional applications by repeating steps 1-3. 5. When you have loaded all the applications, press Go. B. This starts the applications, as indicated by the appearance of page banners at the bottom of the screen. Note: 7. Direct-To-Oisk does not have a page or banner. When an application is loaded, the F1 key becomes the Stop A key. This key has two functions: • If an application is loaded (but not running), and you press F1 Stop A, that application will not run when you press Go. When you press F1 Stop A, the letter A disappears from the Ports column, as though the application were never loaded. • If an application is running, and you press F1 Stop A, it stops the application. To restart the application, you must first load it, and then press Go. F1 Stop A stops an individual application. Refer to F10 Exit and FB Reset for additional options. If you have a Dual Port machine, you may aJso have function keys for loading applications on Port B and Ports AB (Ports A and B shown on a single page display). Refer to page 3-28 for a description of those keys., TEKELEC 3-20 09/27/91 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide F6 Reset This option affects all applications that are currently running. If you are using a Dual Port machine, it affects both ports. If you press F6 Reset it restarts the applications that are running, by doing the following: • • • • In Analysis, it clears the History buffer and clears the History and Real Time page displays. In Statistics, it resets all Statistics page values to zero. In Triggering, it resets all triggers. In Direct-From-Disk it replays the data in the direct-todisk area of the hard disk fr.om the beginning. F7 Menu When you press F7 Menu, you return to the first configuration menu shown on page 3-5. This enables you to view your current setup, but does not allow you to change the setup of a port that has applications running. If a setup cannot be changed, the port will display the message busy next to the Mode of Operation. For example, on a Dual Port machine, if you have applications running on Port A, but Port B is off, you cannot change the Port A parameters. but" you can set up Port B and start applications. To change parameters on a port with applications running, you must stop all applications before changing the configuration (see F10 Exit on the page 3-24). TEKELEC 3-21 13090 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Fa Save This option saves the current configuration to a file. When you press F8 Save it saves the loaded applications and the parameter values on the first configuration page. When you press F8 Save, you are prompted for the name of the configuration file. You have the following options: F1 DEFAULT If you press F1 DEFAULT, the file is automatically named DEFAULT, and you are returned to the Applications Selection menu. You can have one configuration file named DEFAULT at a time. The DEFAULT configuration file can be accessed as follows: Note • It can be automatically executed on power up using the Set T.O. (Timeout) option described on the next page. • It can be loaded using the Files or Autexec Setup Mode (see page 3-6 for more information). F2· F8 Names of previously loaded/saved configuration files are displayed in the function key strip so that you can quickly replace an existing file. Enter a name If you want to assign a new filename, you can type up to eight alphanumeric characters. After you enter the file name, press Return. There is also a Save option in the first configuration menu Menu. Refer to page 3-15 for a description of this function. The Save key appears as F9 on the Configuration menu and as F8 on the Applications Selection menu. The difference between these two Save keys, is as follows: TEKELEC • F9 Save saves only the values displayed on the current screen. • F8 Save saves the selected applications and the parameters on the first configuration page. 3-22 11/1/89 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide F9 Set T.O The Set Time Out function is the same as the F10 Set T.O function described on page 3-16. It determines whether the DEFAULT configuration file is automatically executed when the machine is powered on. F10 Exit This option stops all applications that are currently running. To stop an individual application, use F1 Stop A. For Dual Port machines, you can also use F2 Stop B, or F3 Stop AB function keys to stop an application on the selected port( s). To restart an application once it is stopped, first load the application, and then press Go. You can also use F6 Reset to restart all applications without first stopping them. TEKELEC 3-23 7'5'89 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Acquisition Acquisition from the line ( in cyclic Capture Mode), or from disk, starts when the Applications Selection Menu is displayed. This is indicated by the message: Running To stop acquisition, press Run/Stop. This is indicated by the message: Acquisition Stopped Acquisition from the line (using one buffer Capture Mode) displays the message sequence: Buffer Full Acquisition Stopped Acquisition is automatically stopped so that you can load applications before capturing data. To start acquisition, press Run/Stop. Stopping Applications To stop a single application, perform the following steps: 1. Select the Configuration banner. 2. Move the red arrow cursor to the desired application. 3. Press the function key that stops the application on the desired port. For example, on a Single Port machine, press F1 Stop A to stop the selected application. 4. Stop additional applications, if desired. 5. The banners of the stopped applications disappear from the screen. To stop all applications, perform the following steps: 1. Select the Configuration banner. 2. Press F10 Exit. This stops all applications. You can then change configuration parameters for the port, or select other applications. Time Stamping The Chameleon real-time clock provides time stamping of data events for Monitoring applications. The time stamp clock's resolution is ± 20 microseconds and represents the time at the end of the event. TEKELEC 3-24 7/5/89 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Dual Port on the Chameleon 32 The Chameleon 32 Dual Port system allows you to use two ports to run multiple Monitoring and/or Simulation applications simultaneously. Each physical port provides independent Monitoring or Simulation, with a line rate of up to 64Kbps. In addition, on Dual Port machines you have the option of selecting Fast Monitoring mode which enables you to monitor traffic up to 256k bps on one port. The Dual Port system gives you access to a variety of testing applications. Each port can perform independently, providing multiple interface configurations, using a combination of any two interface options that are currently available for the Chameleon. For example, Port A could be fitted with a V.35 interface and Port B with a Basic Rate Interface. With the Chameleon 32's unique page format, you can view the activity 9f both ports on separate display pages and interrelate events. If both ports are running the same application, you can display the results of both ports on the same page. The LED display can be switched between the ports for physical interface monitoring. Configuring and using a Dual Port machine is similar to using a Single Port machine. However, the Dual Port system does provide multiple interface configurations, making it somewhat more complex than the Single Port machine. The additional information you need to know is contained in this section. Configuration Menu The Dual Port Configuration Menu (Figure 3.9) has additional parameters and display features which enable you to: • • • Configure the second port (Port B) Select 256k data capture mode (Fast Monitoring) Control the front panel LED display Port B Configuration The Chameleon 32 recognizes the number of ports available on your system. On Dual Port machines, this causes the Configuration Menu to display parameters that enable you to configure Port B. With a Dual Port machine, you can configure the Chameleon 32 ports for the following applications: • • • TEKELEC Simultaneous monitoring on both ports Simultaneous simulation on both ports . Monitoring on one port, simulation on the other port 3-25 11/1/89 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide -G~--------------------Tekelec CHAMELEON 32 . Version x.x. Copyright (c) 1988 I Press F6 to change the PROTOCOL setup Setup Mode Port A Mode of Operation Physical Interface Protocol '"-----' Port B Parameter ---+--~ Port B Press F6 to change Mode of Operation Physical Interface Protocol Press F6 to change PORT A + B Data Source Port Monitoring Indication C Development System Appears only If C Package Is Installed Figure 3.9: Sample Dual Port Configuration Menu Selected Front '4-tr--- Panel LED Display Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide On a Dual Port machine, when a port is configured for Simulation, you can simultaneously run Monitoring applications on the same port to analyze the data being transmitted between the Chameleon 32 and the device under test. 256k Data Capture Mode (Fast Monitoring) When Monitoring is th~ selected Mode of Operation, the Chameleon can monitor up to 64k bps with dense traffic (one flag between frames). On Dual Port machines, you have the option of selecting F4 Fast Mo (Fast Monitoring) as the Mode of Operation for Port A. When selected, traffic up to 256k bps can be acquired for Monitoring applications. When you select Fast Monitoring, you cannot use Port 8; therefore, the message Busy appears next to the Port 8 parameters. Refer to Appendix K for additional information about using the 256k data capture option. LED Display Although there are two physical ports, the Chameleon 32s LED panel can display the state of only one port at a time. The LED display message at the top, right-hand corner of the Configuration Menu indicates which port's leads are currently For example, if the being displayed on the LED panel. message is LEOS: PORTS A, the front LED panel is displaying the state of the leads on Port A. To change the LED display, press the letter A or B to display the leads of the desired port. For example, to display the leads for Port 8, press the letter B. The LED display message on the Configuration page changes to: LEOS: PORT B, and the LED front panel displays the Port 8 leads. Dual Port Protocol Selection When both ports are configured for use, a configuration page is available for each port. This enables you to select the Monitoring protocol or Simulator for each port independently. For example, if both ports are configured for Monitoring, when you press F6 Setup, two protocol pages are displayed so that you can select a protocol for each port. TEKELEC 3-27 11/1/89 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Applications Selection Menu The Applications Selection menu provides the same functions as the Single Port machine, except that you have the following options for loading applications: F1 Load A Loads the selected application for Port A. When the application is started, information for Port A is shown in its own page. F2 Load B If Port B is configured for Monitoring or Simulation, F2 loads applications for that port. It functions the same as the F1 Load A key described on page 3-20. Once an application is loaded F2 changes to Stop B so that you can stop the application. F3 Load AB F3 Load AB loads an application for both ports, using a single page to display the information for both Ports. The Load AB option is available only for non-protocolspecific Monitoring. applications. See , additional limitations below. To run the same application on both ports with a separate page display for each port, load the application for each port separately, using F1 Load A and F2 Load B. Once an application is loaded F3 changes to Stop AS so that you can stop the application. When you move the arrow cursor from application to application, the F1 Load A, F2 Load B, and F3 Load AB functions keys are enabled only for the applications available for that protocol. For example, if Port A is configured for X.2S Monitoring and Port· B is configured for BSC Monitoring, when the arrow cursor is positioned on an X.2S application (such as X.2S Statistics), only F1 Load A is enabled. In other words, you do not have the option of loading an X.2S application for a port configured for BSC Monitoring. Limitations Only two copies of an application can be running simultaneously. For example, you can run Analysis on Ports A and B independently, but not on Ports A, B, and AB. Only. one copy of Triggering and Direct-to-Disk can be run at a time. TEKELEC 3-28 11/1/89 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's GUide When you have loaded your applications, press Go to start them. This starts the applications, as indicated by the appearance at page banners at the bottom of the page. Figure 3.10 shows· an example display with both ports configured tor ISDN monitoring. The page banners indicate the ports for which an application is running, using the letters A, B or AS in the banner name. In the example below, the following applications are running: • • • Dual Line on Port B 0.921 Statistics on Port A and Port B on separate pages Analysis (Real Time and History) on Port A and B, together on a single page Note that the LEOs for Port A are currently displayed in the LED panel, as indicated by the message in the upper right corner of the page. I J------------------~r·COnflguratton • I LEOS: PORT A I Applications Selection Menu 1' ISelect Application and Port I Acquisition Mode Applications DIRTDSK TRIGGER --. Q921STAT Running Ports Applications I Ports ANALYSIS A DUALlINE B -0 -0 A+8 B I . . DuafUne a I 10000UneStat BI ICHistoryAB >1 1'0921 LtneStatA: -0 -0 -0 ,•. Re~I.11rne.AB)1 Figure 3.10: Chameleon 32 Applications Selection Menu TEKELEC 3·29 9590 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Time Stamping Using the Chameleon J With a Dual Port Chameleon 32, the port's time stamp clocks will only be synchronized if Monitoring is initiated on both ports at the same time. If Monitoring is started on one port after the other port has been started, the Analysis time stamp may differ by up to 10 milliseconds. To synchronize the time stamps of both ports, press the Run/Stop key. This will allow comparative measurements between the ports to within the time stamp clock's minimum resolution (plus or minus 20 micro-seconds). Acquisition starts 1.5 seconds after you press Run. TEKELEC 3-30 9'5,90 USing the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's GUide Chameleon 32 Pages Each Chameleon 32 application has unique pages, or windows, that display information and menus. When you run more than one application simultaneously, you have access to the pages of each of the running applications. The paging concept is analogous to having a stack of papers on your desk. The stack of papers may contain memos, reports, and messages, but you can have access to all the information in the stack by moving the item you want to the top of the stack. By shuffling papers, you can easily put them in a different order, or scan for information. Each of the following Chameleon 32 tasks has a dedicated page: • Monitoring applications ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ • • • • History Real Time Dual Line Triggering Statistics Simulation applications Utilities Menu File Management Menu Configuration Menus Each page is composed of a standard screen, keyboard, and set of softkeys. Multiple Pages Each application that is running has its own page. The top line of each page displays that page's name. You can position individual pages on the Chameleon 32 screen so that you can see several pages at once. The pages are displayed in various colors to help you differentiate them on the screen. There is no limit to the number of overlapping pages that you can display simultaneously. Figure 3.11 on the following page illustrates how the Chameleon 32 screen appears with four pages displayed. The name of the page is displayed in the upper right corner (banner) of the page. TEKELEC 3·31 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Using the Chameleon .---i-+----------------------+.. . 03 RR 01 01 RR 01 ReaJTimeA 00 00 1 03 RR 00 01 01 I 0000 5 X25: Data 00 00 LCN = 20 LCGN =0 FB07 ___ ()________________________~~__X_.2_5__ L_jn_e_A__~ X.Z5 LINE STATISTICS START TIME: 00:00:00:000000 AM LAST TIME: 00:00:00:000 000 AM LCN: STATE; CALL CALL CONFIRM DATA TRANSFER CLEAR CLEAR CONFIRM -8----------------------+ -8- History A ~=====9 Utilities Figure 3.11: Sample Screen Display The Active Page Although you can view multiple pages simultaneously, you can access the menu and function keys of only one page at a time. The active page is displayed with a highlighted banner, and its available function keys at the bottom of the screen. In Figure 3.11, the Real Time page is active. To select a page, press the Select key. Each time you press the key, the page banner for the next page in the sequence is highlighted, indicating that the page has become active. When a page is active, you can use the function keys displayed at the bottom of the screen .. Refer to page 3-37 for a complete description of the Chameleon 32 page manipulation keys. TEKELEC 3·32 9/5;90 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Chameleon 32 Keyboard The Chameleon 32 comes with a custom designed keyboard, which includes dedicated key functions and programmable or soft function keys (Figure 3.12). Note To remove the keyboard from the Chameleon, disconnect the The cable keyboard cable at the Chameleon front panel. connection on the keyboard itself is considered factory installed, and should not be disconnected. Figure 3.12: The Chameleon 32 Keyboard Dedicated Kev Functions The Chameleon 32 keyboard provides dedicated keys. These keys function the same regardless of the application you are running. There are five dedicated keys on the left side of the keyboard. Each of these keys is labeled with two functions. The lower function is executed when you press the key by itself. The upper function is executed when you hold down Shift and press the dedicated key. These keys are described on the following page. TEKELEC 3-33 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Using the Chameleon Left-Hand Keys Run/Stop Starts/stops acquisition of traffic in Monitoring Mode. (The Shift key has no effect.) When you stop acquisition, the Chameleon 32 beeps, and the message Acquisition Stopped is displayed on the Application Selection menu. Shift Print Page Prints the currently active page. Print Scrn Prints the current screen if there is a page banner on-screen. If there is no page banner on-screen, there will be no printout. Shift Utilities Flies Invokes the Utilities page. Invokes the File Management page. Shift Hide Page Causes the active page to be hidden from view. The application is still running, but you cannot see its page. \, . , , Show Page Causes a' hidden page to be shown on top of the active page. Ifthe active page is only one line, you need to enlarge the page size before the Show Page function will work. Shift Replace Replaces the active page with a hidden one. (See' Shift Hide Page above.) You can toggle between all currently displayed pages. Select Selects which page on the screen is the active page. 'f ~ TEKELEC 09/27191 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Right-Hand Keys There are ten 'dedicated keys on the right side of the keyboard. Cancel Clears error messages, and is used by certain applications to .cancel user input. Go Accepts user input. Mover Slides the active page up over the other displayed pages. Shift Move r fills the entire screen with the active page. Pressing Shift Move r again restores the pages you were displaying. Slides the active page down over the other displayed pages. Movel Scroll r Scrolls the text within the active page up. Shift Scroll r scrolls the text within the active page up the same number of lines as the current page size. Scroll l Scrolls the text within the active page down. Shift Scroll l scrolls the text within the active page down the same number of lines as· the current page size. TEKELEC 3·35 7.589 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide There are four arrow keys located on the right side of the Chameleon 32 keyboard. Arrow Keys DIDO DODD DODD DOl I DOl I lOt 00 I I II 10 .. ~. [!]@ HJI CHAMELEON :12 Figure 3.13: Arrows Keys The arrows keys are application specific. example, when at the Protocol Setup Menu: Ase~1 For • Pressing the ~ key moves the red cursor arrow directly to the top option field. • Pressing the -+ key. moves the red cursor arrow to the currently displayed bottom option field. • Pressing the ~ key moves the red arrow cursor to the next available option field. • Pressing the i key, moves the red arrow cursor to the previously available option field. Keys On the front edge of each letter key is a blue function. This label is the mnemonic of the ASCII Control function accessed by that key. The ASCII functions are used only when the Chameleon 32. is being used for terminal emulation. The functions are accessed by pressing etrl plus the desired key. For more information about using the Chameleon 32 for terminal emulation, refer to Chapter 9: Utilities. TEKELEC 3·36 7589 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Page Manipulation Although you can display multiple pages simultaneously, you can access the menu and function keys of only one page at a time. The following dedicated keys enable you to manipulate the pages for the currently running applications. • • • • • • Select Replace Movej Move~ Hide·Page Show Page Select enables you to 'select the active page. Each time you press Select, the next page banner is highlighted. When a page is active, you can then use the associated function keys, which are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Shift Hide Page hides the active page without stopping the application. The banner disappears from the screen, but the application continues to run. Show Page displays hidden pages. If more than one page is hidden, you must press Show Page once for each hidden page. If the active page is only one line, you need to enlarge the page size before the Show Page functio~ will work. Shift Replace replaces the active page with a hidden one. When you press Shift Replace, the active page is hidden, and the next hidden page is displayed and becomes the active page. ' When you are running multiple applications, it is usually more convenient to view one complete page at a time without other pages or banners on the screen. One way to do this is to use Shift Hide Page to hide all pages but one. You can then toggle through each hidden page, displaying one at a time. using Shift Replace. When you have several pages/banners displayed. you can change the size of the active page using the Move keys. Move j displays more of the active page each time you press the key. Move ~ displays less of the active page each time you press the key. Each time you press one of these keys, the active page moves up or down one line. Shift Move j displays the active page in a special full-screen mode (BLOW MODE). 'When in BLOW MODE, the letter B is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the page banner. You cannot access any other pages while a page is displayed in BLOW MODE. Pressing Shift Move j again returns the screen to its former condition, disabling BLOW MODE. TEKELEC 3·37 7'589 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Using the Chameleon On-Line Help To receive On-Line Help for any menu, press the Help key. The screen below shows Help information for File Management. Pressing the space bar returns you to the current application. Commands: Exit = Space Bar, Next Page = Up Arrow, Previous Page = Down Arrow , . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - HELP - - - - - - - - - - - - - , FilE MANAGEMENT The File Management page enables you to copy, rename, and delete files from the floppy and hard disk drives. The hard disk is A: and the floppy disk is B:. You can also use the File Management page to format a floppy diskette for storing data and to convert Chameleon II floppy disk files into Chameleon 32 format. Select a file by using the arrow keys to move the cursor to the appropriate name. and then press the SPACE BAR to highlight it. . . You can select more than one file at a time. selected your file(s) are: F 1 - Change Directory . F2 - Copy F3 F4 F5 F6 - Delete Rename Format Disk Copy F7 - Transmit File F8 - Receive File F9 - ·Connect The available options once you've Change the current (default) directory. Copy one or more selected files from the current directory to a· specified target location. Delete one or more files or sub-directories. Renames the selected files. Formats floppy diskette. Copies the entire contents of a floppy disk to another floppy disk Transmits files to a host computer. Receives files from a host computer. Establish a communications connection between the Chameleon 32 and a host computer for file transfer or host terminal emulation. Figure 3.14: Chameleon 32 Help Facility TEKELEC 3-38 7·589 Using the Chameleon Chameleon 32 User's Guide Soft Function Keys Each application has a specific set of softkeys corresponding to the ten function keys along the top of the keyboard. The light in the upper right-hand corner of each function key indicates which keys are enabled for the active page. The keys' functions are displayed in a strip along the bottom of the screen. This strip changes as the active page changes. (See Figure 3.15 below.) The function keys are fully programmable in Chameleon BASIC and C. The Chameleon 32 Simulation Manual, Volume 11/ contains a complete description of Chameleon BASIC and of programming of the function keys. Information about the C Development System can be found in the Chameleon 32 C Manual, Volume IV. Port A 1619 01 X25: Runl Stop I , "' F1 0 1 I I 0 flO F3 @ # ESC 1 2 S 3 0 F4 1 Fil. . 02 01 35 5 4 6 FA4B LCN =02 ..... "' F6tF7 & * 7 8 Q W E R T y U DCl HI ENQ DO OC4 EM N,AIC LeGN = 0 ..... 0 Fsol % Utiliti.. TAB 05 "' "' Print Pag_ Print Sun Data 04 1 O FS I I O Fg .... + 9 HT 0 \ :I 0 P SI OLE { [ } DELETE Hide Page Show Page CTRL Replace Select A 5 D F G H SOH OC3 EaT "CIC BEL BS SHIFT CAPS LF Z X C V B N M SUB CAN ETX SYN STX SO CR 0 K L VT FF < RETURN > ? Mo"e Scroll Move . • •• Scroll + + .- + - / HELP Figure 3.15: The Chameleon 32 Softkeys 3-39 Go SHIFT LOCK TEKELEC °l~_ F10 , CHAPTER FOUR: ANALYSIS Starting Analysis To start the Analysis application, select ANALYSIS from the Applications Selection menu. The only exception to this is SS#7 Analysis. To start SS#7 Analysis, select SS7ANAL from the Applications Selection menu. Analysis Applications The Analysis application has two page displays: Real Time and History. The display format is the same for both pages; however, the pages are used for different purposes. The Real Time page displays traffic from both sides of the line as it is acquired. There is a continuous display of traffic on the screen as the data is acquired. The History page displays traffic that has been acquired and put in a history buffer. You can move back and forth through the data in the buffer to display specific parts of it, independent of line activity. This chapter describes the general features of the two Analysis pages. To interpret protocol-specific information, refer to the appropriate protocol in the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume II. Saving Data There are three methods for saving Analysis data to disk: " TEKELEC • You can save data as it is acquired using the" Direct-toDisk application, described in Chapter 6. This type of file can be replayed and analyzed by the Monitoring applications. • You can save the contents of the acquisition buffer using the Traffic Load/Save option in the Utilities menu. This type of file can be replayed and analyzed by the Monitoring applications. Refer to page 9-13 for more information. • You can output a specified range of events to a- printer or an ASCII file using the History Print- feature (Ctrl P), described on page 4-11. This type of file cannot be replayed and analyzed by the Monitoring applications. 4-1 10122190 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide However, this option saves the data in a format that can be accessed using the Chameleon 32 C Development System (optional package) or using a PC. General Features of the Analysis Page Figure 4.1 shows a sample Analysis (Real Time or History) page with sample X.25 traffic. The general f~atures of the Analysis pages are described on the following pages. 01 01 UA 03 I 00 00 9 X25: Call Called oTE address Calling oTE address Facilities SABM lCN-02 lCGN-O 5432104 None None 01 I 00 01 5 X25: Call Connected· lCN=02 lCGN=O Called oTE address None Calling oTE address None None Facilities 03 I 01 01 35 X25: Data 00 00 lCN-02 lCGN=O CRlF30123456789;;(-)71ABCoEFGHIJKl 03 I 01 01 35 X25: Data 00 01 lCN-02 lCGN-O CRLF30123456789;;(a)?tABCoEFGHIJKl FIgure 4.1: Sample X.25 History Page DeE/orE Display Frames transmitted by the DCE are displayed on the left half of the screen. Frames transmitted by the DTE are displayed on the right half of the screen. Notes In the Real Time page, only the last 22 lines of each event are displayed. When simulating an ISDN line and monitoring the simulation traffic, the Chameleon always displays data on the DTE (right) side of the Real Time and History pages. .TEKELEC 4-2 10/22190 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide Colors Colors distinguish the protocol elements of the display. The colors are protocol-specific and are described in the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume II. For example, in the X.2S page shown in Figure 4.1, the following colors would be used: Green =- HOLC .Yellow =- X.2S White =- User Data Red =- Errors Interface Lead Transitions An interface lead transition is displayed as the lead name along with an up arrow (i) [MARK at the physical level] or a down arrow (J..) [SPACE at the physical level] to indicate the direction of the transition. Low-to-high transitions elicit a J..; high-to-low transitions elicit an i. All transitions for a given event are show.n on one line. The leads are: DeE DTE CTS OSR OCO SOCO RI RTS OTR There may be more than one transition. transitions are displayed on the page. Note: Lead change indicators in Analysis and Triggerirtg differ in meaning. In Analysis, the arrows indicate physical level, as described above. In Triggering, 1 and J. indicate logical levels, and are the opposite of the Analysis indicators for the same event. However, when using an ISDN interface: . (1) lead changes are NOT displayed; and, (2) .Tekelec F3 controls whether lead abort frames are not detected, but are concatenated with the following frame . 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Analysis Baud Rate Changes Baud rate· changes are shown as New Baud Rate Analysis, baud rate is calculated at two times: 9600. In • When the Analysis application is started • After Run/Stop is pressed. If the line is idle when Analysis is started, you must press Run/Stop when acquisition begins. Otherwise, the baud rate will be zero. When the baud rate is zero, line utilization is not calculated in the Statistics application. . Incomplete Event Display The Incomplete event Length x message indicates that the received frame ended unexpectedly. x indicates the length of the portion of the frame received. For example, if an X.2S l-frame of only two bytes is received, the message Incomplete event Length 2 appears.' . An Incomplete event Length 0 indicates that only a portion of one byte was received before the frame was aborted. The Incomplete event Length message can be enabled/disabled using Cfrl E, as described on page 4-6. When this message is disabled, Unknown is displayed when an incomplete event is detected. Time Stamping The Chameleon includes a real-time .clock that provides time stamping in Analysis. The time stamp clock's resolution is 20 microseconds and represents the time at the end of the event. The display of the time stamp is controll~d by the F2 key, as described on page 4-5. Tekelec 09/27/91 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide History Trigger Feature The Triggering application· enables you to filter captured data according to user-defined criteria. One of the triggering options is DISPLAY which causes the History display to differentiate between data which meets the criteria and data which does not. Beginning with system software 4.2, you have two DISPLAY modes to choose from: • In normal mode, data which meets the triggering criteria is shown in low intensity color. All other data is shown in high intensity color. • In trigger mode, only data which meets the triggering criteria is displayed in the History page. All other data is suppressed from the display. The triggering DISPLAY mode is controlled from the History page using two commands: • :normal Selects normal triggering display mode. This is the default mode. .• :trigger Selects trigger mode. Note that when using these command, you must include the colon (:) as part of the command to invoke the command line. Refer to Chapter 8 for a complete description of the Triggering application. TEKELEC 4-5 10/22190 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide Function Keys The traffic is displayed in an interpreted format so that you can . quickly distinguish the protocol-specific components. The function keys control how the traffic is interpreted and displayed. For example, you can suppress the display of user data, display frame level only, or show a/l traffic in an uninterpreted (raw) format. Function keys have multiple values which affect the display format of interpreted data. Each time you press a function key, you select the next value in the cycle. If you press Shift function key, the previous value is selected. The current selection is shown in the softkey strip on the screen. Several of the function keys are available for all protocols. These are described in this chapter. Other function keys are used only with specific protocols. These are mentioned in this. chapter. but are described fully in the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume II. F1 F1 determines the format of the user data display, which is the data which does not belong to a protocol specific format. When you press F1, the user data (displayed in white) changes to the code indicated in the softkey strip at the bottom of the screen. In the History page, a/l displayed user data is changed to the indicated code. In the Real Time page, only the user data acquired after F1 is pressed, is displayed in the new code. F10 controls whether or not user data is displayed at all. The options are: TEKELEC ASCII Each byte is displayed as an ASCII character. For example, 41 hex is displayed as the ASCII character A. Characters in the range 0 - 1F hex are shown as single character mnemonics. Characters above 80 hex are shown as ' . ' . EBCDIC Each byte is displayed as an EBCDIC character. For example, F1 hex is displayed as the EBCDIC character 1. Special characters are handled the same way as ASCII. HEX Each byte is displayed as a pair of hex digits. HEXS Each byte is displayed' as a pair of hexadecimal digits, with a space between each pair. 4-6 10/22190 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide F2 F2 determines the acquisition information display format, which is displayed on the first line of interpretation on the opposite side of the screen. Not all options are available for all protocols, as noted below. Number Event number in decimal Flags Number of flags preceding the frame in decimal (BOP only) Time Event timestamp as hh:mm:ss ddd ddd Time shows the time at the end of the event in hours, minutes, seconds and microseconds. ddd ddd is equivalent to .dddddd in decimal. For .999999 seconds. example: 999 999 = dTime (delta time) Elapsed time between the previous event and the current event. When monitoring two ports on a Dual Port machine, the delta time refers to the time between events regardless of which port the event occurred on. That is, the delta time may be calculated as the time between the previous event on Port A and the current event on Port B. If the Real Time clocks on Port A and Port Bare not synchronized, negative delta time might be reported. If this occurs, resynchronize the clocks by pressing Run/Stop to stop and then restart acquisition on both ports. CRC None TEKELEC CRC value in hex, OK if good CRC or BAD if bad CRG (Not available in Async) No acquisition information is displayed 4-7 10/22190 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide F3 F3 determines what types of events will be displayed. This function is not available in Async or sse. The options are: Information frames only F4 - F9 FlO IU Information and Unnumbered frames only IUS Information, Unnumbered, and Supervisory frames IUSL All frames, plus lead transitions. However, when using an ISDN interface, lead transitions are NOT displayed. Furthermore, abort frames are not detected, but are concatenated with following frames. These keys are protocol specific. Refer to the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual Volume /I, for more information. FlO determines if user data is displayed. It also displays the . traffic in an uninterpreted mode (raw). The options are: User + UserRaw . TEKELEC User data is displayed User data is not displayed All data is shown as user data, uninterpreted in the code selected with Fl 4-8 10/22190 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide Function Key Setup Files You can create files which store function key setups for History and Real Time pages. A function key file can be executed automatically when a monitoring application is started, or can be invoked on-ctemand at run-time. Function key files for History and Real Time are independent of each other. To create a function key setup file, do the following: 1. Start the monitoring application and select .either the History or Real Time page. 2. Select the desired function key settings for that page. 3. Use the :save command to save the setup to a file. Use the following syntax: :save 'filename" where filename is enclosed in quotation marks ("") and is one of the following: hist Saves a setup which executes when the application is started and automatically sets the History function keys rt Saves a setup which executes when the application is started and automatically sets the Real Time function keys Other filenames must be 1 - 8 alphanumeric characters. 4. Tekelec To load a function key file at run-time, use the :Ioad command. The syntax for :Ioad is: :/oad "filename" 09/27191 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide Control Keys The keys and key combinations shown in Figure 4.2 perform a number of useful functions for the Analysis pages. These functions are described in more detail following the table. KEY A or a FUNCTION For Dual Port machines, displays the Port A function key strip in History 8 or b For Dual Port machines, displays the Port S function key strip in History Ctrl 8 Switches on/off a line which separates events in the display Ctrl C For Dual Port machines, toggles between the Port A and Port S function key strips for the active page. (Also see Shift A and Shift S below.) Ctrl E Switches the display of the message Incomplete event on/off. When off, incomplete events are indicated by the message Unknown Ctrl N Protocol-specific to ISDN Monitoring. Toggles the display between the extended address in hex and LTI or TGI byte interpretation. Ctrl P Available for the History page only. Invokes the History print feature. Ctrl Z Protocol specific to 557. Invokes the User Parts Editor. Figure 4.2: Analysis Control K~ys A or a Pressing A (or a) is similar to Ctr! C described above. It displays the Port A function key strip when a monitoring AS page is active. S or b Pressing S (or b) is similar to Ctr! C described above. It displays the Port 8 function key strip when a monitoring AS page is active. CirlS When you press Ctr! 8, a white line appears between each event. To suppress the white line. press Ctr! 8 again. This enables you to quickly differentiate each event on the screen. Tekelec 4-10 09/27/91 . Chameleon 32 User's .Guide Analysis Ctrl C On Dual Port machines, you 'can run some Monitoring applications on both ports simultaneously, using a single page to display the traffic from both ports. This is indicated in the page banner by AB. You can control the Analysis display for each port independently, using the function keys. For example, the Port A data can be displayed in hex, while the port 8 data is displayed in ASCII. Ctrl C toggles between the Port A and Port 8 function key strip, so that you can access the function keys for each port. See also A and 8 below. Ctrl E Usually, when an incomplete event is encountered, the message Incomplete event is displayed. Ctrl E enables you to suppress the display of this message. To resume the display of the message, press Ctrl E again. CtrlN When monitoring ISDN data with extended addressing, the display will show the extended address in hex. Using Ctrl N you have the following options: • If you selected Northern Telecom as your ISDN protocol, Ctrl N displays. the LTID interpretation in place of the Extended Address. The LTID byte is interpreted and displayed in both hex and decimal in the following format: LTID:Hex = xx • Decimal=xxx For all other ISDN protocols, Ctrl N displays the TGI (Terminal Group Identifier) interpretation in place of the Extended Address. The TGI byte is interpreted and displayed in both hex and decimal in the following format: TGI:Hex = xx Decimal=xxx CtrlP In the History page only, Ctrl P invokes a print feature which enables you to output a range of events to a printer or ASCII file. If you have a printer connected to the Chameleon, and the Chameleon is correctly configured, you can print selected events from the history buffer. Alternately, you can output the events to a. print file. Takelec 4-11 09/27191 Analysis. Chameleon 32 User's Guide Note If you use Ctrl Pto save data to a file, the data in the file cannot be replayed and analyzed by the Analysis application. In order to save data to a file and analyze it from disk, you must use the Direct-to-Oisk application described in Chapter 6. You can use the ASCII file generated by Ctrl P for the following purposes: • To access the file using the Chameleon C Development System vi Editor (optional package) • To access the file on a PC after using the Chameleon Kermit facility to transfer the file (see Chapter 10) or after copying the ASCII file to an MS-DOS 2.x or 3.x formatted floppy disk There are two methods to use the History Print feature. METHOD 1 -- ENTER A SPECIFIED RANGE OF EVENTS: 1. Select the History page. '.' 2. Press Ctrl Pto invoke the History Print feature. The following prompts appear: Print filertameri!ii!i!ftfi!!!ii~fiW!Wi;J ................................................. (blank =printer) from event to event Press GO to print, CANCEL to exit. Figure 4.3: Prlnt-Range-of-Events Prompt Screen 3. You may download events to either a printer or an ASCII file. To download events to a printer: Press Re.turn when prompted for a .file name. To download events to an ASCII file: Enter a file name and press Return. The file will be saved to the hard disk in the following direCtory: A:\TEKELEC\DATA\HIST unless a different path is specified. Teke/ec 4-12 09/27/91 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide 4. To save the file to a floppy disk, you must use the path (including the back slash [\ ] ) as follows: b:lfilename Specify a range of event numbers to print by entering the number of the first event and pressing Return. 5. Enter the number of the last event you want to print and press Return. 6. Press Go to start the printer/file output. A message is displayed that indicates which events are being sent to the printer or file. 7. To abort this function at any time, press Cancel. METHOD 2 - HIGHLIGHT A RANGE OF EVENTS: 1. Select the History page. 2. Use Scrolli or Scroll J, key to position the first event you want to output at the top of. the page. Press the left bracket key ([ ). This marks (highlights) the first event. Use the Scroll i or Scroll J, key to display the last event you want to output as the rast event on the screen. Press the right bracket key ( ]). This marks (highlights) the last event to be output. 3. Press Ctrl P to invoke the History Print menu (see previous page). 4. You may download events to either a printer or an ASCII file. To download events to a printer: Press Return when prompted for a file name. To download events to an ASCII file: Enter a file name and press Return. The file will be saved to the hard disk in the following directory: A:\TEKELEC\OATA\HIST unless a different path is specified. The selected event numbers appear in the menu. . Tekelec 5. Change event numbers by deleting the displayed number and entering the new number. 6. Press Go to start the printer/file output. A message is displayed that indicates which events are being sent to the printer or file. 7. To abort this function at any time, press Cancel. 4-13 09/27/91 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide CtrlZ Ctrl Zhas a special function for Signaling System #7 Analysis only. It invokes an editor that enables you to configure the Heading Code Mnemonic and the Routing Label Structure for User Parts. Refer to the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume 1/, for more information. Tekelec 4-14 09127191 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide Acquisition Buffer The size of the acquisition buffers depends on whether you have a Single Port or Dual Port Chameleon. Figures 4.4 and 4.5 list the capacities for these buffers. DTE 196-Kbyte DCE Other 196-Kbyte 48-Kbyte lead changes, aborts, CRC, timestamp Figure 4.4: Single Port Buffer Capacities. DTE DCE Other 196-Kbyte 48-Kbyte Port A 196-Kbyte lead changes, aborts, CRC, timestamp Port 8 196-Kbyte 196-Kbyte 48-Kbyte lead changes, aborts, CRC, time stamp Figure 4.5: Dual-Port Buffer Capacities. Tekelec 4-15 09/27/91 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide Event Overwritten Message In the History or Real Time pages there are two conditions which elicit the message: Event Overwritten These two conditions are: (1) when the Event buffer wraps around and overwrites the Event pointer to the data currently being read; or, (2) when the DC E or DTE data buffer wraps and overwrites the data currently being. read. When the History or Real Time application attempts to access either events or data which have been overwritten, Event Overwritten is displayed on the appropriate side (DCElDTE) of the page. Figure 4.6 illustrates these Event Overwritten processes. Event Buffer (FIFO) DTElDCE Buffer New Event in ---.~ 1--~_-1+ - Old Event out +4--- ...._...I.tio..---' DTElDCE Buffer New Data in Old Data out 4 ~ -\ ..... ..,' / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Old Event pointer lost; buffer continues to read 'old' Event Data; Event Overwritten is displayed. 1-----1 As Events enter the Event Buffer, their Time Stamps are matched with those of data in the Data Buffers. When these Time Stamps do not match, Event Overwritten is displayed. ... - ---- ------------------------Old data lost; buffer continues to read 'old' Data Event pointer; Event Overwritten is displayed . Event Buffer (FIFO) 1 2 3 4 5 S 7 As Data enters the Data Buffers, thEiirTime Stamps are matched with those of the Event pointers in the Event Buffer. When these lime Stamps do not match, Event Overwritten is displayed. 8 9 10 11 12 Figure 4.6: Event Overwritten processes. Tekelec 4-16 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Analysis History Pag'e Features Unlike the Real Time page, the History page displays traffic from a buffer and not from the line. This enables you to scroll back and forth through the traffic stored in the buffer so that you can analyze it independently of line activity. History Lock The Chameleon stores traffic in a FIFO (first-in, first-out) buffer. When the buffer is full, the oldest (first-in) data in the buffer is overwritten by newly-acquired data. This ensures that the buffer always contains the most recent traffic. However, this also means that traffic currently being displayed on the History page will be overwritten in the buffer if the Chameleon is capturing traffic in that buffer. To indicate that the History page is displaying overwritten traffic, the word Locked appears in the softkey strip at the bottom of the screen. When the History page is locked, the displayed data can be scrolled up and down to the limit of the stored data (several pages), but it is not possible to change the interpretation of the data as the original traffic is no longer in the buffer. To clear the locked condition and display the current acquisition buffer contents, press Cancel. To ensure that the data in the buffer will not get overwritten by new data, press Run/Stop. History Freeze Mode When Freeze Mode is enabled, the most recent 32 K of data from the acquisition buffer is copied into a History Freeze buffer. This buffer is displayed on the History Page until Freeze Mode is terminated. To enable the Freeze Mode, press f. Acquisition continues while you are in Freeze Mode. All new data is written into the Acquisition buffer but will not be displayed on the History page until you unfreeze the buffer. To disable the Freeze Mode, press u. History Display Commands Note When you first display the History page it may be blank. To display traffic frqm the History buffer, use one of the keys or commands listed in Figure 4.7 on the following page. These keys determine which events in the buffer appear in the History page. If the selected event is not valid (it is overwritten in the buffer, for example) the next valid event following the selected event is Tekelec 4-17 09/27/91 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide displayed. For example, if you press the left arrow key, the oldest valid events in the History buffer are displayed. KEY FUNCTION ~ Displays the oldest events in the buffer. +- Displays the most recent events in the buffer. i Scrolls the data upward continuously. Each time you press the UP arrow, the scrolling speed increases. If data is scrolling downward, it decreases the speed of the downward scroll. ! Scrolls the data downward continuously. Each time you press the DOWN arrow, the scrolling speed increases. If data is scrolling upward, it decreases the speed of the upward scroll. Space bar Stops scrolling. F or f (Freeze Selects most recent 32 K of data for display. on the History page. Refer to 4-12 for details U or u (Un-freeze) Scroll i Shift Scroll Scroll Scrolls data up one line each time you press the key. i ! Shift Scroll Terminates Freeze Mode. Refer to page 4-12 for details Displays the next page of data. Scrolls data down one line each time you press the key. ! Displays the previous page of data. 0-9 Move you to a certain point in the buffer. Each number represents a percentage of the buffer, from 0% (0) to 90% (9). For example, if you press 5, the middle (50%) of the buffer is displayed. :jump a Jumps to event number a. For example, ~ump 150 displays event 150 as the first event on the page. :jump 9999 displays the end of the buffer (most recent events). Figure 4.7: History Display Command Keys Tekelec 4-18 09/27/91 Analysis Chameleon 32 User's Guide KEY FUNCTION oE- The left arrow displays the oldest events in the buffer. -+ The right arrow displays the most recent events in the buffer. i The up arrow scrolls the data upward continuously. Each time you press up arrow, the scrolling speed increases. If data is scrolling downward, it decreases the speed of the downward scroll. ~ The down arrow scrolls the data downward continuously. Each time you press down arrow, the scrolling speed increases. If data is scrolling upward, it decreases the speed of the upward scroll. Space bar Stops scrolling. For f Freeze Mode - Selects most recent 32 K of data for display on the History page. Refer to 4-12 for details U oru Un-freeze - terminates. Freeze Mode, refer to 4-12 for details Scroll i The Scroll t key moves data up one line each time you press the key. Shift Scroll i Shift Scroll Scroll ~ t displays the next page of data. The Scroll ~ key moves data down one line each time you press the key. Shift Scroll ~ Shift Scroll 0-9 The number keys move you to a certain point in the buffer. Each number represents a percentage of the buffer, from 0% (0) to 90% (9). For example, if you press 5, the middle (50%) of the buffer is displayed. :jump a Jumps to event number a. For example, :jump 150 displays event 150 as the first event on the page. :jump 99999 displays the end of the buffer (most recent events). ~ displays the previous page of data. Figure 4.5: History Display Keys TEKELEC 4-19 10/22190 CHAPTER FIVE: DUAL LINE Introduction The Dual Line application displays data in a 2-line format (DCE over DTE) which represents the actual sequence of data as it was acquired by the Chameleon. This type of display enables you to determine the overlap of data being received simultaneously from both sides of the line. The Dual Line application is available for all Monitoring protocols. To start the application, select DUALLINE from the Monitoring window of the Applications Selection menu. Note DUALLINE cannot be run on both ports A and S in one page display. That is, you cannot run the application on A + S, using F3 Load AB. You can, however, start. the application independently on both ports, using F1 Load A and then F2 Load B. Dual Line vs. Analysis In Analysis (History and Real Time), an event is displayed once the entire event has been acquired. This is necessary so that the Chameleon can interpret the data according to the protocol. However, it then becomes impossible to represent the timing relationships for data which was received simultaneously from both sides. For example, Figure 5.1 shows sample data received by the Chameleon. In this data, DTE frame 1 is the second frame which is received by the Chameleon. However, the entire frame is not received until DCE frames 1, 2, and 3 are received in their entirety. DeE DTE FRAME 1 II FRAME 2 II FRAME 3 II . FRAME 1 FRAME 4 II FRAME 2 Figure 5.1: Sample Data Acquisition TEKELEC 5-1 8/02/90 Dual Line Chameleon 32 User's Guide The Real Time. History page displays DeE events on the left and DTEevents on the right side of the screen. This results in the data being displayed as shown in· Figure 5.2, which suggests that DCE frames 1, 2, and 3 were received before any data was received from the DTE. DCE DTE DCE FRAME 1 DCE FRAME 2 DCE FRAME 3 DTE FRAME 1 I DCE FRAME 4 I DTE FRAME 2 Figure 5.2: Sample Data Sequence in History Page In the Dual line display, the sequence of events in shown in a format which retains the actual acquisition sequence of the data, as shown in Figure 5.3. In the Dual line display, data is not interpreted, but is shown in a user-specified format (ASCII, EBCDIC, or hex). More information about the Dual Line display is provided on the following page. DCE DTE ABCDEFGHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ 1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXVZ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 12345678 Figure 5.3: Sample Data Sequence in Dual Line Page TEKELEC 8/02190 Dual Line Chameleon 32 User's Guic;le Dual Line Modes There are two Dual Line modes: • run mode causes the page to be updated as data is acquired from the line or from disk. It is much like a Real Time page in that you can view data as it is acquired, but you cannot scroll back and forth through the data. • freeze mode freezes the Dual Line page so that it is no longer updated as data is acquired. In Freeze mode there are additional function keys which enable you to scroll through the data. There are also additional fields of information at the top of the display. The F10 key toggles between Run mode and· Freeze mode. Run Mode Figure 5.4 shows the Dual Line display in run mode. DCE speed=56000 DTE speed"56000 HIJKL"X 1 J F 30123456189:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL" H $ 1 30123456789::<= • N 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL$ • 30123456189::<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL~h >?@ABCDEFGHIJKLbl 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLY EFGHIJKL4d B BCDEFGHIJKL"x 30123456789::(=)?@ABCDE $ 30123456789:;<=>?@A 30123456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL]C F $ 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLq+ d B 301 23456789::<=)?@ABCDEFGHIJKL h d 30123456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHI h F 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL { 30123456789 JKLPI : :<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL d Figure 5.4: Dual Une Display (Run Mode) TEKELEC 5-3 8102/90 Dual Line Chameleon 32 User's Guide Display The features of the Run mode display are as follows: • The DeE and DTE baud rates are displayed at the top of the screen. This is the speed indicated by the last acquired baud rate event. If no baud rate events are detected, the message assumed is displayed. The :set baud command enables you to inform the Chameleon of the speed when no baud rate events are detected. See below for more information. • DCE data is displayed in brown above the DTE data • DTE data is displayed· in underlined cyan below the DeE data • Each line displays up to 64 characters • Interface lead states are displayed when F3 State is selected. • Data is displayed in the format set selected with F1. • . Baud Rate . Blank spaces between frames indicate idle time. You can compress the number of idle' data bytes displayed between frames using F2 . ,The Dual Line application determines the baud rate of the data upon detection of a baud rate change. It a baud rate change is not detected, the Chameleon assumes the default data rate of 56000 bits per second. The current baud rate is displayed in the DeE speed and DTE speed fields at the top of the run time page. The Chameleon must know the correct baud rate in order to determine the time and byte offset when marking an event. See page 5-9 for a description of marking events. To change the baud rate use the :set baud command by selecting the DUALLINE page and entering: :set baud n where n is in the range 0 - 64000 and specifies the data rate in bits per second. The default value is 56000 bits per second. If a baud rate change is detected, the baud rate is changed accordingly. TEKELEC 5-4 8102190 Dual Line Chameleon 32 User's Guide Function Keys The Run mode function keys are described below. F1 F1 determines in what format the data is displayed. options are: The ASCII All data is displayed in ASCII. EBCDIC All data is displayed in EBCDIC. HEX All data is displayed in hex pairs. HEXS All data is displayed in hex pairs, with pairs alternating in high and low intensity color so that each pair can be more easily identified. Specifically, the hex pairs on each DCE alternate between high intensity brown and intensity brown. The hex pairs on each DTE alternate between high intensity cyan and intensity cyan. line low line low Note The Frame Check Sequence (FCS) is treated as data and is shown in the code selected with F1. F2 F2 determines how idle data bytes are displayed. Idle data is shown as blank spaces between frames. F2 enables you to compress the display of idle data bytes so that more data events can be displayed in a single screen. The options are: TEKELEC 1 Only one byte of idle data (blank space) is shown between each frame, regardless of the number of idle data bytes which occurred. 10 Up to 10 bytes of idle data (blank spaces) are displayed between each frame. If more than 10 occur, only the first five bytes and the last five bytes of idle data are represented in the display. 100 Up to 100 bytes of idle data are displayed between each frame. If more than 100 bytes occur, only the first 50 bytes and the last 50 bytes of idle data are represented. 1000 Up to 1000 bytes of idle data are displayed between each frame. If more than 1000 bytes occur, only the first 500 bytes and the last 500 bytes of idle data are represented. 5-5 8/02190 ,Dual Line Chameleon 32 User's Guide F3 determines what data is displayed. The options are: F3 data The DCE DTE acquired data is displayed in the format selected with the F1 key. Interface lead states are not displayed. state Interface lead states and data are displayed. When selected, one line of DCE data is displayed with the five DeE interface leads shown below the data. Below the DCE leads is one line of DTE data with the two DTE interface leads. Changes in voltage are shown as raised or lowered portions of the line. This is shown in the DTE leads in Figure 5.5. DeE Data and Leads DTE Data and Leads DeE speed .. S6000 OTE speed a S6000 HIJKL"X EFGHIJKL4d B 30123456789:;<=)?@ABCOEFGHIJKL" F 30123456789::<")?@ABCOEFGHIJKL]{ Figure 5.5: Dual Line Display (F3 FlO TEKELEC H S RI SQ DCO OSR CTS , OTR RTS =State) FlO toggles between Run mode and Freeze mode. run Dual Line is currently in Run mode. The F-key label displays 'freeze'. freeze Dual Line is currently in 'freeze' mode. The F-key label displays 'run'. See the description of the 'freeze' mode on the following page. 5-6 8102190 Dual Line Chameleon 32 User's Guide Freeze Mode When you select FlO freeze, the Dual Line page stops being updated so that you' can scroll through the data and examine it more closely. A sample 'freeze' mode display is shown in Figure 5.6. a. Binary value of b. d. Event time stamp selected byte DCE speed"9599 DTE speed"9599 binary" 01000010 nex=42 ascii='B' binary" 00111110 nex a 3E ascii='>' times 03:48:40 528 900 HIJKL"X 1 J F 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL" H S 30123456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL%h 1 30123456789::<= • N 30123456789:;<=>?§ABCOEFGHIJKLS • >?@ABCOEFGHIJKLbl 30123456789:;<->?@ABCDEFGHIJKLY 30123456789~:<·>?@ABCOE EFGHIJKL4d B BCDEFGHIJKt"x S 30123456789:;<=>?@A 30t23456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL]{ F S 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLq+ d B 301 23456789::<·>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL h d 30123456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHI h F 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL { JKLPI 30123456789 ::<=)?@ABCDEFGHIJKL d Figure 5.6: Dual Line Display (Freeze Mode) Display TEKELEC The 'freeze' mode display is the same as the run mode display, with the addition of these fields: a. Binary value of the DCE and DTE byte at the location of the cursor b. Hex value of the DCE and DTE byte at the location of the cursor c. ASCII or EBCDIC value of selected byte (depending on current F1 selection) 5-7 8/02/90 Dual Line Chameleon 32 User's Guide d. Time stamp indicating the time that the end of the event was acquired. The time stamp is in the format: hh:mm:ss ddd ddd ddd ddd is the number of microseconds in decimal. For example, 999 999 is .999999 seconds. Cursor Keys In freeze mode, a cursor appears in the data. the following keys to move through the data: You can use DESCRIPTION KEY Moves the cursor one byte to the right. -+ ~ - Moves the cursor one line down. Moves the cursor one byte to the left. t Moves the cursor one byte to the right. F7 prev Scrolls the data downward one page to the previous page. Fa next Scrolls the data upward to the next page. Figure 5.7: Freeze Mode Cursor Keys Function Keys The freeze mode function keys are the same as Run mode, with the addition of these function keys: F7 prey F7 displays the previous page of data. Fa next FB displays the next page of data. F9 mark F9 marks the byte at the cursor as the base line byte. When a byte is marked, the following changes occur to the Dual Line page (Figure 5.8): TEKELEC • The marked byte is shown in red • The following fields appear below the time stamp field: dtime Displays the elapsed time between the marked byte and the currently selected byte bytes Displays the offset of the currently selected byte to the marked byte 5-8 8102/90 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Note Dual Line The Chameleon must know the correct baud rate in order to determine the dtime and bytes values when marking an event. See page 5-5 for a description of how to set the baud rate. Delta time between marked byte and byte at current cursor position. Offset between marked byte and byte at current cursor position. DCE speed=9599 OTE speed=9599 HIJKL"X 1 J time= 03:48:40 528 900 dtime= 00:00:00 598 400 718 F 30123456789:;(=>?@ABCOEFGHIJKL· H $ 1 30123456789::<= 301Z3456789:;(=>?@ABCOEFGHIJKL$ , 30123456789::(=>?@ABCOEFGHIJKL~h 'N >?@ABCOEFGHIJKLbl 30123456789:;(=>?IABCOEFGHIJKLY 30t23456789~:(=>?@ABCOE EFGHIJKL4d B BCOEFGHIJKL"x $ 30123456789:;(=>?@A 30123456789::(=>?IABCOEFGHIJKL]{ F S 30123456789:;(=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLq+ d B 301 23456789::(=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL h d 30123456789::(=>?@ABCOEFGHI h F 301Z3456789:;(=>?@ABCOEFGHIJKL { JKLPI 30123456789 ::(=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL ~ Figure 5.8; Dual Line Display (Marked Byte) Marking Bytes To mark a byte, do the following: 1. Move the cursor to the desired byte. 2. Press F9 Mark. This marks the byte in red. The time , dtime and bytes fields apear in the upper right corner of the screen; dtime and bytes fields are set to zero for every byte mark performed. When a byte is marked, the bytes field shows the actual number of idle data bytes between frames, regardless of the F2 selection. For example, if you select F2 = 10, a maximum of 10 idle data bytes are shown in the display. (Each byte of idle data is shown as a blank space between frames.) However, when a byte is marked, as you move the cursor through the idle- data (blank spaces) between frames, you will notice that the bytes field represents the actual number of bytes of idle data that TEKELEC 5-9 8102/90 Dual Line Chameleon 32 User's Guide occurred, and not the number of idle data bytes displayed. 3. Note Clearing Marks Move the cursor to a new location. As you move the cursor, the dtime and bytes fields show the elapsed time and offset relative to the marked byte. If you press F1 to change the code (hex. ASCII, etc.) in which data is displayed, the marked event is cancelled and the dtime and bytes fields no longer appear. To remark the event, use F9 Mark to mark a new byte. To clear a marked byte: Press F9 Mark to mark a new byte; or, Press the F2 key. TEKELEC 5-10 8102/90 CHAPTER SIX: DIRECT'!'TO-DISK Introduction The Direct-to-Disk application stores traffic acquired from the line to the hard disk. Once stored to disk, traffic can be played back and analyzed off-line. A maximum of 30 Mbytes of data can be stored to disk. You can also run the other Monitoring applications while you are running Direct-to-Disk. This enables you to look at the traffic and save it at the same time. For example, you could take the Chameleon 32 to several remote locations in your network and save traffic from each location to disk. The traffic from all locations could then be analyzed at a central location to provide network managers with a comprehensive view of the network in operation. This chapter describes the four activities related to the Directto-Disk application. These are: • . • • • TEKELEC Recording traffic with Direct-to-Disk Replaying Direct-to-Disk traffic Saving Direct-to-Disk traffic to a file Loading a Direct-to-Disk file 6-1 9/20/90 Direct-To-Disk Chameleon 32 User's Guide General Notes Direct-to-Disk is one of the Monitoring applications that can be loaded and run using the Applications Selection page. If you do not know how to run a Monitoring application, refer to Chapter 3, Using the Chameleon 32. Unlike other Monitoring applications, Direct-to-Disk does not display a page when it is running. When running it saves the traffic being acquired to an area of the hard disk dedicated to Direct-to-Disk traffic. This is referred to as the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk or Direct-to-Disk buffer. You record traffic to the the hard disk as long as the Chameleon 32 is running the Direct-to-Disk application and acquisition is occurring. The Direct-to-Disk area is cyclical, so that when the buffer is filled, the oldest traffic is overwritten by the most recent traffic. In other words, you can run Direct-toDisk forever, but only the most recent 30 Mbytes of traffic will be saved on the hard disk. Since the Direct-to-Disk application saves the traffic to the hard disk, traffic remains on the hard disk if you reset or power off the machine. However, Direct-to-Disk data is erased if one of the following occurs: • If more than 30 Mbytes of traffic is recorded while Directto-Disk is running, the oldest data is overwritten by the most recent data ' • If the Direct-to-Disk application is restarted, it records traffic at the beginning of the Direct-to-Disk area, erasing data that may already be there • If you load a traffic file from disk (previously saved Directto-Disk data) it is written to the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk A dedicated area of the hard disk is used to maximize the performance of the Chameleon 32 when monitoring high speed lines. It enables the traffic to be saved as a contiguous block of data, which minimizes the time needed to access the disk when replaying traffic for analysis. You can use Triggering to define conditions which reduce the amount of traffic written to disk. For example. you could specify that only Information Frames are recorded. Refer to Chapter 8: Triggering, for more information. TEKELEC 6-2 9/20/90 Direct-To-Disk Chameleon 32 User's Guide Recording Traffic with Direct-to-Disk To run the Direct-to-Disk application, perform these steps: 1. Configure the desired port for Monitoring from the line or for Simulation. 2. Press Go to display the Application Selection page. 3. Move the red arrow cursor to the DIRTDSK application and press the function key that loads the application for the appropriate port. 4. If desired, load additional applications by moving the red arrow cursor to the application name and pressing the function key that loads the application for the appropriate port. 5. Press Go. This starts the tasks that are loaded, . including Direct-to-Disk. There is no page for the Directto-Disk application, so a page banner will not be displayed for it. The HARD DISK ACTIVE light indicates when traffic is being written to the hard disk. . 6. If you selected the Triggering application, you can write a trigger that reduces the amount of traffic saved on the hard disk, by specifying one or more conditions that the data must meet before it is processed by the Direct-toDisk application. Refer to Chapter 8 for information about creating Triggering files. 7. To complete the Direct-to-Disk task, stop the Direct-toDisk application or press F10 Exit in the Application Selection page to stop al/ applications (do not re-boot). To stop only Direct-to-Disk, do the following: a. b. c. d. e. For high speed SS#7 traffic, press Run/Stop to stop acquisition. Make the Configuration page active. Move the red arrow cursor to DIATDSK. Press the function key that stops the application for the desired port (for example, F1 Stop A). The Direct-to-Disk application stops immediately. If you restart the Direct-to-Disk application, it will overwrite the data in the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk, beginning with the oldest data. The next section describes how to replay Direct-to-Disk data without saving it to a file. TEKELEC 6-3 7/5/89 Direct-To-Disk Chameleon 32 User's Guide Replaying Direct-ta-Disk Traffic Replaying and analyzing Direct-to-Disk data is referred to as monitoring Direct-from-Disk. When monitoring Direct-from-Disk data, the traffic is analyzed as it you were monitoring from the line, because the data was initially recorded at line speed. For example, the baud rate is shown at the correct line speed, although the traffic is replayed at disk speed. When replaying traffic, the traffic in the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk is not erased or modified by the Direct-trom-Disk application. Therefore, you can replay the same traffic as many times as you like. If you restart Direct-to-Disk, the current data in the Direct-toDisk area of the hard disk will be erased. Note To analyze data Direct-tram-Disk, perform these steps: 1 1. Configure the Chameleon 32 for Monitoring selecting the protocol and port for the recorded data. 2. Move the· red arrow· cursor to the Monitoring Data Source parameter. 3. Press F2 Disk to select monitoring from disk. 4. Move the red arrow cursor to Capture Mode. This parameter is valid for replaying Direct-from-Disk data. Select the desired Capture Mode: Cycle or 1 Buffer. 5. Press Go to display the Applications Selection page. 6. Load the Monitoring applications that you want to use to analyze the tratfic on disk: To load a Monitoring application, move the red arrow cursor to the application and press the function key that loads the application for the appropriate port. ,I". The Direct-to-Disk (DIRTDSK) application is not available while you are running Direct-trom-Disk, since it would cause the Chameleon 32 to record traffic over the traffic you are trying to analyze. Note TEKELEC 7. Press Go to start the monitoring applications. 8. You can now use the application pages as though you were monitoring from the line. The Run/Stop key starts and stops acquisition from the disk. 6--4 7/5/89 Direct-To-Disk Chameleon 32 User's Guide 9. TEKELEC When the entire contents of the Direct-to-Disk area has been replayed, acquisition stops. To stop the Directfrom-Disk application, make the Configuration page active and press F10 Exit. This stops all applications that are currently running and displays the main configuration menu. 6-5 7/5/89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Direct-To-Disk Saving Direct-to-Disk Data to a File You can replay traffic directly from the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk. However, if you want to record new traffic, you lose the data that is currently stored in that area of the hard disk. Before you record new traffic, you must save the current traffic to a file on either the hard disk or a floppy disk. Later this file can be loaded into the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk and analyzed. To save Direct-to-Disk data to a file, perform these steps: 1. Stop the Direct-to-Disk or the Direct-tram-Disk application, if it is currently running. You cannot save Direct-to-Disk data if either of these tasks is running. 2. Make the Utilities page active. If the Utilities banner is not on the screen, press Shift Utilities to display it, and then make it active. (For more information about the Utilities menu, refer to Chapter 9.) 3. Press F4 Traffic Load/Save. Operations menu .. 4. Press F1 Save to select the operation. S. Enter a file name and press Return. The file is automatically saved to the hard disk unless you specify b: as part of the file name, as shown in this example: This displays the Traffic b:filename Note If you save Direct-to-Disk data to a floppy disk, the maximum traffic file size is 700 Kbytes. If you want to save more than 700 Kbytes to floppy disks. you can back up the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk using the Utilities F8 Backup/Restore option. 6. Press F1 Direct-to-Disk to select the Data Source. 7. If you want to save less than 100% of the Direct-to-Disk data, press Delete to erase the current percentage, enter the new percentage, and press Return. This percentage represents the most recently recorded traffic. For example, it you enter SO%, the most recent SO% of the traffic is saved. 8.. TEKELEC Press Go and the traffic is saved. The size of the file in Kbytes is displayed when the procedure is completed. 6-6 7/5/89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Direct-To-Disk Loading a Direct-to-Disk File To analyze DirecHo-Disk traffic that has been saved in a file, you must load the file into the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk, before you start your monitoring applications. Note This procedure erases the traffic that is currently stored in the Direct-to-Disk area. Before you begin this procedure, save or back up any Direct-to-Disk data that you want to keep-. To load a Direct-to-Disk file, perform the following steps: 1. Make the Utilities page active. If the Utilities banner is not on the screen, press Shift Utilities to display it, and then make it active. 2. Press F4 Traffic Load/Save. Operations menu. 3. Press F2 Load to select the operation. 4. Enter a name for the traffic file. If you provided a file name extension when you saved the file, you must include the file extension as part of the file name. This displays the Traffic The file is automatically loaded from the hard disk directory a:\tekelec\data\d2d unless you specify b: as part of the file name, as shown in this example: b:1l1ename.ext If you used the Utilities F8 Backup/Restore option to back up the Direct-to-Disk area to multiple floppy disks, you must use the F8 Backup/Restore to restore the data to the hard disk. Note TEKELEC 5. Press Go and the traffic is retrieved from the disk and is loaded into the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk. 6. The data can now be analyzed by replaying the Direct-toDisk data as described on page 6-4. 6-7 7/5/89 CHAPTER SEVEN: STATISTICS Introduction The Statistics application gathers and displays summary information about the traffic being monitored, including line usage. The Statistics application can be run with traffic from the line, or using the Direct-From-Disk option. If you do not know how to load and run a Statistics application, refer to Chapter 3: Using the Chameleon. Most Statistics applications provide multiple pages for displaying information for all protocol layers and addresses, or for a selected layer or address. Figure 7.1 lists the available statistics applications by protocol, the display pages provided for each, and the pertinent chapter in the Protocol Interpretation Manual. PROTOCOL APPLICATION STATISTICS PAGES Refer to Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual: esc SSCSTAT ISDN (0.921) 0921 STAT 0.921 0.921 Q.921 0.921 0.921 0.921 PRI PRISTAT PAl Error Statistics ChapterS SNA SNASTAT SNA Session Statistics SoLC Une Statistics Session PU Statistics SNA LU Statistics SoLC PU Statistics SNA LU Line Chapter 6 SS#7 SS7STAT SS#7 Une Statistics Chapter 13 X.25 X25STAT X.25 Une Statistics HOLC Une Statistics X.25 LCN Statistics Chapter 2 2S10 2610STAT 261 SSC Une Statistics esc CU Statistics Une Statistics SAPI 0 Statistics SAPI 0 Statistics SAPI16 Statistics SAPI 63 Statistics Other SAPI Statistics a Une Error Statistics Chapter 6 Chapter 10 Chapter 20 Figure 7.1: Available Statistics Pages Tekelec 7-1 09/27191 Statistics Chameleon 32 User's Guide Statistics Display The statistical information is displayed in numeric, and for some information, graph form. This section describes the general format and usage of a Statistics page and the associated Performance page. The exact format and function keys for each Statistics page are protocol specific, and are described in the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual. The X.25 Line statistics page (Figure 7.2) will be used as the example in this section. In Monitoring, the Chameleon determines the baud rate at two times: • when the Monitoring applications are started • when the Run/Stop key is pressed If the line is idle when Monitoring applications are started, and then traffic occurs, the baud rate will be calculated as zero. When this occurs, the Line Utilization will be shown as zero in a Statistics page. To prevent this, pres~ the Run/Stop key after traffic starts. If the baud rate is less than 50 bps, all utilizatio·n fields will be blank (in both the screen and the printed report). Statistics Function Keys Statistics page function keys are protocol specific. There are several functions which are common to all Statistics pages; however, they may not be assigned to the same function key for each application. For example, the PRINT function key for X.25 is F3, while the PRINT function key for ISDN is F5. This section describes the common function keys. It also describes the general procedure for activ.ating and deactivating the various Statistics pages for a protocol. Since the function key numbers vary by protocol, the options are described by function, and not by function key number. For a complete description of the function keys for a specific protocol, refer to the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual. Tekelec 7-2 09127/91 v"a."",.",uII ...... V;;)"";;) o li::tll::> III.;::> \";lUlU,,, Most recent packet received from highlighted address. Current call status is highlighted. l---+-----------Ir--------i.;~;25·~.rie.$t,~t~/ .X.25 LIN STATISTICS START T E: 00:00:00:000 000 AM LCN: f::tlij2J 008 STATE: CALL CALL CONFIRM CALLS PLACED: 0 DqE PACKETS: 0 DATA PKT: 0 OVERHEAD: 0 PACKET RETRIES: RESET: RESTART: PRNR: PREJ: PRR: DIAG: LAST TIME: 00:00:00:000000 AM Uiiri?flt_eltJ t!!ff"::;:::i:id?::;:(::::}:::;::() QQE.; DIE;. o o o o o o o o o o o o o o CLEAR CLEAR CONFIRM CALLS ACTIVE: 00 DTE PACKETS: 0 DATA PKT: 0 OVERHEAD: 0 1ft:;:?::!;:::::;::;;;;;) 4-_ _ _ _--I-~r:ia~:~tr:~~~:ntation AYSJ ACCESS: 0.000 CLEAR: 0.000 SESSION: 0.000 PACKET RESP: 0.000 DCE LEN: 00000 DTE LEN: 00000 DATA BYTES/SEC: 0 LMI ~ MIN 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 00000 00000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 00000 00000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 00000 00000 DTE UTILIZATION: 0% _ _ _ _ __ gi~ g~1~~6~ Displays addresses so that you can activate statistics pages for them. X.2S: LCNs SNA: PUs/LUs BSC: CUs ISDN: SAP Is Displays protocol layer so that you can activate statistics pages for it. . Prints a statistical report if the Chameleon is configured for, and connected to a printer. 0% Resets all values and timers to zero for all statistics pages for that protocol. Mt::::):;:::::Ak:::t:rJ Displays time or date and time Determines whether the number of PACKETS or number of BYTES is displayed for DCEI DTE Packets. Data Packets, and Overhead. X.2S: HDLC SNA: Session Figure 7.2: Sample Statistics Page (X.2S LIne Statistics) Teke/ee 7-3 09/27/91 Statistics Chameleon 32 User's Guide Address Function Keys (LCNs, PUs, CUs, SAP/s) You can activate a page which displays statistical information for a selected address on the line. The active addresses are displayed in the softkey strip at the bottom of the screen. Depending on the protocol you are using, you will have a choice of selecting one of the following: • • • • A page for each'Logical Channel Number (LCN) X.25 A page for each Physical Unit (PU) or Logical Unit SNA (LU) SSC A page for each Control Unit (CU) ISDN A page for each of these Service Access Point Identifiers (SAPls): 0, 16, 63, All Others When the addresses are displayed in the softkey strip, if the address has a + next to it. a page has been activated. If the address has a - next to it, a page for the address is not currently activated. Note If you press F1 FUNCTwhen the addresses are displayed in the softkey strip at the bottom of the screen, the Statistics softkey strip with the functions is displayed. This is true except for ISDN Statistics, which has a single softkey function strip with the SAPls included. To activate a Statistics page for a specific address, perform these steps: 1. Press Select to make a Statistics page active for the desired protocol. 2. Press F1 to display the addresses in the softkey strip. If you do not have traffic in the buffer, there will not be any addresses displayed. 3. Press the function key that corresponds to. the address you want to activate a Statistics page for, A banner for the address page appears at the bottom of the screen. It also causes a + to appear next to the address in the softkey strip. 4. Press Select to make the Statistic page active. To deactivate a Statistics page for an address, perform these steps: Tekelec 1. Press Selectto make one of the Statistic pages active for the desired protocol. 2. Press F1 3. Press the function key that corresponds to the address you want to deactivate the Statistics page for. The banner for the address page disappears from the screen. It also causes "a to appear next to the address in the softkey strip. to display the addresses in the softkey strip. 7-4 09/27/91 Statistics Chameleon 32 User's Guide Protocol Layer Function Key (HOLe, SESS) For X.2S and SNA Statistics, F2 activates or deactivates a page for a specific protocol layer, as follows: • X.2S • SNA A page for HOLC (layer 2) Statistics only A page for Session (layer 3) Statistics only In SNA, you can also select a specific PU or LU for a protocol layer. For example, you can have one page for SOLC statistics for a selected PU, and you can have another page for SNA statistics for the same PU. To activate a Statistics page for a protocol layer: 1. Press Se/eet to make a Statistics page for the desired protocol active. The layer name should appear for F2 in the softkey strip (HDLe for X.25 or SESS for SNA). If the layer name is not displayed, press F1. 2. Press F2. A banner for the protocol layer page appears at the bottom of the screen. It also causes a + to appear next to the address in the softkey strip. 3. Press Se/eetto make the Statistics page active. To deactivate a statistics page: 1. Press Select to make one of the Statistics pages for the desired protocol active. The layer name should appear for F2 in the softkey strip (HOLC for X.2S or SESS for SNA). If the layer name is not displayed, press F1. 2. Press F2. The banner for the protocol layer page disappears from the screen. It also causes a - to appear next to the layer name in the softkey strip. Print Function Key The Print function key prints a statistical report that is similar to the screen display format. If you have a printer connected to the Chameleon 32, you can print a report. A sample X.25 Une statistics report is shown in Figure 7.3. If you do not have a printer, pressing F3 has no effect. The report is not shown on the Chameleon screen. Refer to Chapter 9, Utilities, for information about configuring the Chameleon to use your printer. Teke/ec 7-5 09/27191 Statistics Chameleon 32 User's Guide Reset Function Key The Reset function key resets the statistics values to zero and resets the time displayed at the top of the statistics page. When you press the Reset key, it resets the values to zero in all Statistics pages currently active for that protocol. This function is available for all Statistics pages. Time/Date Function Key The Time/Date key affects the format of the time fields displayed at the top of each Statistics page. If Time is selected, the times are displayed in the format: hh:mm:ss:ddd ddd AM/PM For example, 08:46:25:934 160 AM. If Date is selected, the time display is in the following format: . .:. ' dd MMM yyyy hh:mm:ss For example, 01 JAN 1989 08:06:45. ." If you are analyzing data from disk the date will be the current system date, but the time at which the event was originally captured ' ~d~k Bytes Function Key Each statistics page has a function key which displays optional information about the number of bytes received. For example in X.25, if the Byte option is selected, the display includes the total number of bytes, the number of data bytes, and the number of bytes received in control frames. For most pages, the byte fields appear in lieu of other fields on the page. For example, in X.25 the F6 key offers the option of Bytes or Packets. If Bytes is selected, several fields with packet data are replaced by the byte fields. Tekelec 7-6 09/27191 Statistics Chameleon 32 User's Guide TEKELEC X25 LINE STATISTICS REPORT START TIME: LAST TIME: LCNsACTIVE : CALLS ACTIVE: CALLS PLACED: PACKET COUNT : DATA PACKETS OVERHEAD PACKETS: FRAME ABORTS: CRC ERRORS: FRAME RETRIES: PACKET RETRIES: FRAME RRs: FRAME RNRs: FRAMEREJs: FRAMEDMs FRAMESABMs FRAME DISCs FRAMEUAs FRAMEFRMRs FRAME SABMEs PACKETRRs: PACKET RNRs : PACKET REJs : PACKET CLEARs: PACKEt INTERRUPTs: PACKET RESETs: PACKET RESET CONFs PACKET RESTARTs: PACKET RESTART CONFs PACKET DIAGs : ACCESS TIME: CLEARTIME: SESSION TIME: OCE PACKET LENGTH : DTE PACKET LENGTH: OCE PACKET RESPONSE: DTE PACKET RESPONSE: 00:00:00:000000 00:00:00:000 000 000 000 000 0 oooooooo 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 AVG 0.000 0.000 0.000 00000 00000 0.000 0.000 OCE TOTAL BYTES: OCE DATA BYTES: DTE TOTAL BYTES: DTE DATA BYTES: OCE UNE UTILIZATION: OCE DATA UTILIZATION: DTE LINE UTILIZATION: DTE DATA UTILIZATION: DTE 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 OCE 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 . 00000000 LAST 0.000 0.000 0.000 00000 00000 0.000 0.000 MAX 0.000 0.000 0.000 00000 00000 0.000 0.000 MIN 0.000 0.000 0.000 00000 00000 0.000 0.000 0 0 0 0 00% 00% 00% 000/. Figure 7.3: Sample Statistics Report (X.2S Line) Utilization Statistics TekeJec Frames with errors (such as ABORTs or bad CRCs) are not included in the utilization statistics. Utilization fields will be blank if the baud rate is less than 50 bps. 7-7 09/27191 Statistics Chameleon 32 User's Guide The Performance Page The Performance page, a protocol-specific read-only display, is used when Statistics Performance falls below 100%. This occurs when the data stream rates cycling through the data and event buffers of the Chameleon are so high that the Chameleon cannot keep up with one or the other. At such times, the Chameleon is forced to skip events or data in order to keep incoming events in sychronization with incoming data. The Performance Page is available for SS7, SNA, X.25 and 0.921 protocols. It is not available for BSCSTAT (Bisynch), or U-Interface 2B10. Function Keys The Performance Page for any active Statistics page is opened or closed by pressing Ctri + P. To open or close the Performance Page: 1. Select the Statistics Page banner and, if necessary, scroll it onto the screen. (Do NOT use the blow-page mode.) 2. Press Ctri+P. The Performance page banner appears at, or disappears from the bottom of the screen. There are no function keys for this page . . Interpretation The interpretation of the Performance Page is given in Figure 7.4. The number of frames (FMs) or in the case of SS7 - signal units (SUs) not skipped by the Statistics apPlication,'\. The number of complete cyclethroughs registered by the Data buffers, ~ --Aa~-------~,\~-------fl X25 PER~ANCE I o total # of data wrapped = -<::::;0 total # of FMs processed = Statistics Performance = 100 (# of event wrapped) = o % # of data-wrapped Ski~ The level at which the SIatistics application functioned shown as a percentage of maximum performance. 0 t The number evenls s~pped because of data cyded through. I . The number of complete cycle-throughs registered by the Event buffer. See NOTE. Figure 7.4: The X.25 Performance Page TekeJec 7-8 09/27/91 Statistics Chameleon 32 User's Guide Note: Whenever one wrapped event is counted, the whole Event buffer is cycled through. Therefore.. 6143 (the size of the Event buffer) events are skipped. Calculation of Statistics Performance Statistics Performance is calculated using the following formula, where: N1 N2 N3 N4 NS Tekelec = = = = = total # of FMs (SUs) processed total # of data wrapped Statistics Performance (# of event wrapped) # of data-wrapped skipped event N3 - 7-9 (N1x100) / [N1 + (N4 x 6143) + NS] 09/27191 • CHAPTER EIGHT: TRIGGERING Introduction Chameleon Triggering is a powerful software tool which allows you to define a set of conditions under which data acquisition is started and stopped. This allows you to program the Chameleon to take specific action only for certain user-specified frames. Condition/ Action Each trigger consists of a CONDITION ~ ACTION pair. You must specify what CONDITION, or combination of CONDITIONS, you want the trigger to search received events for, and the ACTION, or ACTIONS, you want the trigger to take. For ACTIONS to take effect, all CONDITIONS for that trigger must be true. Default The default CONDITION (in which the user does not enter any of his own CONDITIONS) will match all received events. This means that every event captured will cause the ACTIONS you specified to be carried out. Figure 8.1 illustrates the components of a trigger. I NAMEI I STATUS 1-4 character name Enablesl Disables Trigger I ICONDITION(s)1 Up to 4 Trigger Conditions (logically ANDED) such as: interface lead conditions, frame types, other conditions. I ACTION(S) I Up to 4 Trigger Actions Figure 8.1: Trigger Components Tekelec 8-1 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide All the CONDITIONS within one trigger are logically ANDed. Subsequent triggers are combined in logical OR statements. You can perform any logical operation with a combination of AND and OR operations (see Figure 8.2)~ For example, if the following CONDITIONS are satisfied: : Trg1 I CONDITION 1 AND CONDITION 2 AND CONDITION 3 AND CONDITION 4 OR I Trg2 ~------------------------" CONDITION 1 AND CONDITION 2 AND . CONDITION 3 AND CONDITION 4 OR • • • ,p---------------------------------------~ : TrgN ,, CONDITION 1 AND CONDITION 2 AND CONDITION 3 AND CONDITION 4 --------------------------------------_ .. FIgure 8.2: Logical Operations of Triggering then the specified actions are performed. Any trigger you build will be invoked if it satisfies the following CONDITION: . If the trig~er is enabled, and if a/l CONDITIONS 1 throu9,h 4 are satisfied, then the Chameleon will perform the specified ACTIONS (up to 4 per trigger). '- Each trigger has a status that can be modified at run time to enable or disable the trigger. This gives you the ability to use nested triggers, iterative triggers, and provides a general control structure. The Chameleon will always check to see if the trigger CONDITIONS have been satisfied in the order you specify them. Because the CONDITIONS within a trigger are in a logical AN D statement, the Chameleon will not carry out the specified ACTIONS until a/l the conditions have been satisfied. Teke/ec 8-2 09/27191 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering The Chameleon allows you to define as many triggers as you need. A Triggering Editor is provided so that you can create and modify your triggers using a simple "menu-driven interface. The Triggering Editor is described on page 8-7. Note: Tekelec The form (A 1 AND A2 AND A3) OR (81 AND 82), and so on, allows you to represent any logical expression. 09127191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Starting Triggering To start the Triggering application: 1. 2. Configure the port( s) for the appropriate protocol. This procedure is described in Chapter 1: Express Instructions. Press Go to display the Applications Selection menu (Figure 8.3). -0~------------------------~BlilliliI[QI Acquisition stopped Acquisition Mode Monitoring Ports DIRTDSK -+TRIGGER EVENT A Monitoring Ports ANALYSIS X25STAT BASIC Figure 8.3: The Chameleon Application Selection Menu (X.25 Monitoring) Note: Tekelec In step 3, the function keys available to you will depend on your configuration. 3. Move the cursor to Trigger and press the F1, F2 or F3 to load the application on the corresponding port(s). 4. Load additional applications, .as desired. 5. Press. Go to start the loaded applications. Page banners appear ,at the bottom of the screen for each application loaded. When Triggering is started, acquisition automatically stops until you create or load a trigger to run. This procedure is described on the following page. 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide . The Triggering Page. To load or create a trigger, select and display the Triggering page. The first menu, shown in Figure 8.4, is displayed. --o1------------------~[fr:lfGGER.IN(il . . . 1 ... . F1 - Start a New Session F2 - Load a Triggering file from Disk kNew I load I I Ftgure 8.4: The Triggering Page F1 New Session This option enables you to create a new trigger from scratch. It displays the Triggering Editor screen with blank fields, as shown in Figure 8.5. F2 Load a Triggering File from Disk This option loads an existing triggering file into the TrigQering Editor. This enables you to then run the trigger as is, or to modify the trigger before you run it. Use of the Triggering Editor for creating and modifying triggers is . described on the following page. After creating or modifying your trigger with the Triggering Editor, you run it by pressing the Go key. You then have access to a Triggering Run Time page, as described on page 8-47. Teke/ec 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Figure 8.5 shows the Triggering page after selecting the New Session option. There are four fields in each trigger: NAME, STATUS, CONDITIONS, and ACTIONS. Select each field with the arrow cursor. The F-key options for each field are displayed in the softkey strip at the bottom of the screen as the field is selected. Use the ~ and +- keys to· move the cursor to any field in a particular trigger. Use the i and J, keys to move between triggers. Each of the four fields is described on the following pages. --o-----------------ff.;tftl¢G$I~G·f TRIGGERING EDITOR Press cancel to clear NAME TRG Press Go to run STATUS . Whenever CONDITIONS -+ ACTIONS do .. -----~-~----------~----------------------.-------------The arrow points to the field which you are currently editing. Use the softkeys to edit this field, or move the arrow to •. . . any field by using the arrow keys on the keyboard. Use shifted F-keys to select NOT FIgure 8.5: The Triggering Editor (New Session) Tekelec 09/27191 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering Triggering Editor This section explains the,Triggering Editor fields. These fields allow you to build or modify a trigger. NAME This field enables you to add triggers, delete triggers and assign names to triggers. When the red arrow cursor is positioned in the NAME field, you have the following options: F1 Addtrig This option adds a new trigger below the currently selected trigger. The trigger is blank except for the default name and status (Whenever) assigned to the trigger. The default name can be changed using the F2 NewName option. F2 NewName This option enables you to assign a user-specified name to a trigger. Triggers are automatically assigned default names for your convenience. However, you do not have to use the default name; you can assign whatever name you wish to the trigger. The default names used are: TRG1-TRG9 TR10-TR99 T100 - T999 These names are assigned in order. If a trigger is deleted, the default name assigned to that trigger is available to be reassig'ned. For example, suppose you you have triggers named TRG 1, TRG2, TRG3 and TRG4. If you delete TRG2, and add a trigger to follow TRG4, the default name of TRG2 is assigned to the new trigger. In other words, all previously used default names are reused before a new name is used. When you press F2 NewName the current name is erased and you are prompted for a new name. Enter a four-character name, and then press Return. You can use the +- and -+ keys to correct entry errors. F3 De/trig Tekelec This option deletes the current trigger. &-7 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide . When the red arrow cursor is positioned in the NAME field, you also have the following function keys available: FB Restart This option erases the field entries of the displayed triggers. This enables you to enter a new trigger without having to return to the first triggering menu. If you want to save the displayed trigger to a .file, you must first use the F10 Save option before your press FB Restart. When you press FB Restart, you will be prompted for confirmation before the screen is cleared. F9 Load This option loads a specified triggering file from disk. It enables you to load a file without having to return to the first triggering menu. When you press F9 Load, you are prompted for the file name. Enter the file name in the following format, and then press Return: a:filename b:filename . (hard disk drive) (floppy disk drive) A filename is 1 - 8 characters. If you do not specify a drive, the default is the hard disk, (drive A). If you enter more than an 8-character file name, without a drive specifier" anything beyond the eighth character is ignored. F10Save This option saves the displayed to a named file. trigger(s) currently When you press F10 Save, you are prompted for the file name. Enter the file name in the following format, and then press Return: .. Teke/ee a:filename (hard disk drive) b:filename (floppy disk drive) A filename is 1 - 8 characters. If you do not specify a drive, the default is the hard disk, (drive A). If you enter more than an 8-character file name, without a drive specifier, anything beyond the eighth character is ignored• 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 3'2 User's Guide STATUS The STATUS field indicates how the Chameleon will invoke a trigger. (Note that a 'trigger STATUS can be specified as a trigger ACTION.) F1 1st Time The trigger will search received frames for the specified conditions. If the conditions match, the trigger actions will be performed, and the trigger will then be disabled. F2 Disabled The trigger will not be invoked when the triggering is run. ' Even though a trigger is disabled, it can be armed at run time through another trigger's action. F3 Whenever (Default) The trigger will search received frames for the specified conditions. If the CONDITIONS match, the trigger actions will be performed, and the trigger remains enabled. When the red arrow cursor is positioned in the STATUS field, you also have the following function keys available: FB Restart F9 Load F10 Save These are identical to the FB, F9, and F10 keys described on the previous page. Teke/eo 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide CONDITIONS Triggering conditions are built using the softkeys. The CONDITIONS field allows you to specify up to four trigger conditions for each trigger. The available options are shown in Figure 8.5 in the softkey strip. Figure 8.6 shows the menu structure for the triggering conditions. To erase existing conditions for a trigger, move the arrow cursor to the CONDITIONS field and press Cancel. Cancel erases one condition at a time, starting with the bottom condition. The message Press Cancel to Clear appears in the top left-hand corner of the screen whenever the cancel option is applicable. Logical NOT You can logically negate any of the triggering conditions. This enables you to filter specified items from the data being monitored. For example, in X.2S you can define a condition which triggers on anything that is not a data packet. . The availability of NOT logic is indicated by the message Use shifted F-keys to select NOT, which appears above the function key strip. To select the NOT logic. press Shift and the desired function key. The NOT logic can be selected only from the first (highest level) CONDITION function key strip. When NOT is selected, the message You have selected NOT appears in the CONDITIONS column in highlighted text. . You then continue to define the condition by pressing subsequent function keys, as needed. (Do not use Shift with these subsequent function keys.) When the condition is complete, it is'displayed in the CONDITIONS column in highlighted text and is preceded by an exclamation point (I) which represents the logical NOT. For example, for SS#7 Triggering, if you want to filter all ISUP traffic from the data, you would press the following function key sequence to define your condition: Shift Fa Protocol Displays the message You have selected NOT F7 #7l3l4 F1 SI F61SUP F1 Any Tekelec Selects SS#7 Level 3/Level 4 menu Selects SS#7 Signalling Indicator option Selects SS#7 ISUP Signalling Indicator Selects ANY ISUP. Displays the condition !Any ISUP messages, indicating that any ISUP message will be filtered from the data. 8-10 09/27/91 DTE/DCE Error Counter Timer DTE CRC DCE FAbort Define user counter 1,2,3, or 4 Define user timer 1,2,3, or 4 Float Const $7 RLTlme FramLen > = or <= Protocol > =, < =, specified system time $8 Frame Variable Leads Port $7 Select lead: dt, rt, ct, ds, cd,sq,ri PortA =. >. $8 specified length $9 = < $9 St~~~g Port B r-- High I-- Low I-- To High "- To Low J r- AscStr EbcStr Hex Dec F11 HDLC F21 X.25 FJ 0.921 F41 0.931 F51 DASS2 F61 #7L2 Page 8-15 Page 8-16 Page 8-17 Page 8-17 Page 8-19 Page 8-21 F~ . #7 L3L4 Page 8-23 E9~ F81 TUP* ISUP* Page 8-31 Page 8-32 Binary Variable * When a protocol other than SS7 Is selected In the Setup Menu, keys FB and F9 are T.UP and ISUP, as shown. However, when SS7 is selected as the Setup protocol, these two keys reflect the SS7 standards listed below. Standard CCITT (84 or 88) NCC NTT ANSI HR7 E8 CTTUP NCCTUP NTTTUP ASNTUP TR7TUP E9 CT ISUP NCCISUP NTTISUP ANSISUP TR71SUP Figure 8.6: Triggering Conditions Menu Structure Tekelec 8-11 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide DTElDCE When you press this key, you get a choice of DTE or DCE. The Chameleon searches either the DTE or DCE side of the communications line for the trigger conditions. The default is both sides. Error If you select Error, the following function key options are available. CRC Triggers on CRC errors (displays CRC Error in the CONDITIONS field). FAbort Triggers on Frame Aborts (displays Frame Abort in the CONDITIONS field). Counter This option triggers on a counter value. You can use up to four user-defined counters. When you select the Counter option, you are prompted to select a counter number: Cnt1 (Counter 1) Cnt2 (Counter 2) Cnt3 (Counter 3) Cnt4 (Counter 4) After selecting the counter, you define the counter val ue to trigger on, by first selecting a comparison operator: >= <= -- > < Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to Equal to Greater than Less than You are then prompted to enter a decimal value (0 - 999). (You can use the and keys to correct an entered value.) If you press Return without entering a value, the value is set to O. When a counter condition is defined, the Conditions column displays a message similar to: Cnt3 > 10 (perform the defined action(s) when counter 3 is greater than 10) This feature is used in conjunction with the trigger actions which increment and reset counters. For example, you could increment· a counter each time a CRC error occurs, and then trigger on the counter value when it exceeds 10. Tekelec 8-12 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Timer This option triggers on a timer value. You can use up to four user-defined timers. When you select the Timer option, you are prompted to select a timer number (Timer1 - Timer 4) using the function keys. After selecting the timer, you define the timer value to trigger on, by first. selecting a comparison operator: = <= > Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to You are then prompted to enter a decimal value (O - 99999 milliseconds). (You can use the and keys to correct an entered value.) If you press Return without entering a value, the value is set to O. When a timer condition is defined, the Conditions column displays a message similar to: Timer2 >= 45678 ms In the above example, the trigger will fire when Timer2 is greater than or equal to 45678 ms. This feature is used in conjunction with the Timer trigger actions which start, stop, or reset timers. A timer must be started before the value can be checked. For example, you could start a timer when acquisition begins and then reset the timer each time a CRC error occurs, or. when the specified timer value is exceeded. RLTi me Trigger on Real Time Clock value. Real Time is checked only when there is continuous traffic. Therefore, you cannot set triggering to start acquisition at a specified time. When you press this softkey, select a comparison operator (>= or <=) and enter a clock value (with colons between hours, minutes, and seconds). Then, press Return. If you enter <= and the clock value 12:30:00, the CONDITIONS field will display Real-Time <= 12:30:00. Frame This option triggers on a specified data string within a frame. When you press this softkey, you are prompted for the index, as follows: Frame[lndex ?] The index specifies the scope of the search forthe data string within the frame. There are three types of indices: Note: As the floating index uses significantly more processing time than the other index options, it is suggested it be used sparingly. Float Tekelec The Chameleon will search the entire frame for the data string. 8-13 09/27191 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Const Triggering The Chameleon will look for the data string only at a specified offset from the beginning of the frame. When . you select this option, you are prompted for a starting byte (offset). as follows: [] == Enter a decimal value in the range 1 - 99. (The first byte of a frame is 1.) The Chameleon will then search for the data string to begin at that byte only. If no value is entered, it is treated as a float index. Variable $7, $8, $9 The Chameleon will search for the data string using the range specified by variable $7, $8, or $9. The variables $7, $8, and $9 can be defined using the Variable function key, described on pages 8-15. -42, and -46. For example, if you use $7 as your index and $7 is defined as >-10, the Chameleon will search for the data string from byte 10 to the end of the frame. After selecting an index, you are prompted to enter the data string. The first step is to specify the type of data string you are entering, using the following options: AseStr (ASCII String) Enter 1 - 13 ASCII characters. For example, if you enter 12345, the CONDITIONS field will display FrAse[ ] 12345. (EBCDIC String) Enter '1 - 13 EBCDIC characters. For example, if you enter 12345, the CONDITIONS field will display FrEbc[ ] = 12345. (Hexadecimal string) Enter up to 12 HEX digits (six hex pairs). For example, if you enter the 000102030405, the CONDITIONS field will display FrHex[ ] 000102030405. (Decimal string) Enter a'decimal number in the range 1 - 255, which represents a single byte value. The CONDITIONS field will display FrOee[ ] = xxx, where xxx is the decimal value. (Binary string) Enter an 8-digit binary mask. You can enter an x (for don't care) for digits you want the Chameleon to disregard. For example, if you enter x01 Ox1 Ox, the CONDITIONS field will display FrSin[ ] x010x10x. Select a string variable by pressing a softkey. $1-$3 are byte strings and $4-$6 are bit strings, and are described on pages = EbeStr Hex = Dee Sin = Variable 8-37. Tekelec 8-14 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide FramLen This option enables you to trigger on the number of bytes in a frame. You will be prompted for a logical operator, as follows: > =, <=, ==, >, and <. You must then enter a decimal number. The Chameleon will trigger on frames' which meet the specified size. Protocol This soft key provides subsequent softkeys that allow you to build trigger conditions using protocol-specific mnemonics. Teke/ec 8-15 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Protocol: HOLe The HDLC options are: Teke/ec I-Frame The Information Frame command transfers sequentially numbered frames containing user-information across the data link. RR The Receive Ready supervisory frame is used to indicate that a station is ready to receive I-Frames, and to acknowledge previously received I-Frames. RNR The Receive Not Ready supervisory frame is used to indicate that a station is not ready to receive additional incoming !-Frames. REJ The REJect superVisory frame is used to request re-transmission of an I-Frame. SABM The Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode command requests the link be set in Information Transfer mode. DISC The DISConnect command is used to perform a logical disconnect. FRMR The Frame Reject (FRMR) response signals a condition that is not recoverable by re-transmission of the errored frame. UA Unnumbered Acknowledgements (UA) are unnumbered responses to SABM, SABME, and DISC commands. OM The Disconnect Mode (OM) response is used to report a non-operational status where the station is logically disconnected from the data link. SABME The Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode Extended (SABME) command places the addressed station in asynchronous balanced mode - extended. P/F The PolVFinal Bit is used for various signaling tasks. By using the function keys, you can select P/F to be 1 (set) or 0 (unset). . . 8-16 09/27191 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering Protocol: Q.921 The protocol-specific Q.921 options are the same as the HOLC options described on page 8-16 with the additions described below. Tekelec SAPI Triggers on a Service Access Poi nt Identifier value in the range 0 -63. TEl Triggers on a Terminal Endpoint Identifier value in the range 0 -127. C/R Triggers on a Command/Response bit value of 1 or O. 8-17 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Protocol: X.2S The protocol-specific X.2S' options include the ability to trigger on the following types of packets: CallReq Call Con Clr Req Clr Con Data Intrupt Inrpt C. RRP RNRP REJP Reset Reset C Restrt RestrtC Call Request Call Confirmation Clear Request Clear Confirmation Data Interrupt Interrupt Confirmation Receiver Ready Packet Receiver Not Ready Packet Reject Packet Reset Reset Confirmation Restart Restart Confirmation In addition to triggering on the X.2S packets above, you can also trigger on these elements: . Subscrb Select this option to trigger on a user-specified calling or called address in Call Request packets. When selected, you are prompted for C.alled or Calling. ·1" You are then prompted for the address. To specify don't care digits, enter as many Xs as there are digits in the corresponding address displayed in the History page. For example, if the History page shows the Cal red . Address 1234, enter XXXX for the Called Address trigger. Once the Chameleon finds a frame with the specified address, it will store the LCGNlLCN. Each trigger can store up to five LCGNILCNs for a given address. If more than five are seen, the fifth LCGN/LCN is replaced by the one just seen. The stored LCGNlLCN is not active until a Call Confirmation packet is seen with the same LCGNlLCN. The specified actions then occur when incoming frames containing this LCGNlLCN are found. This LCGNlLCN is dropped when a clear confirmation or Restart confirmation packet is seen. A Restart confirmation packet will clear all LCGNlLCNs. Tekelec Q Bit Triggers on a Qualifier (Q) bit value of 0 or 1. o Bit Triggers on or 1. M Bit Triggers on a More (M) bit value of 0 or 1. a Delivery Confirmation (D) bit value of 0 8-18 09127191 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering Protocol: Q.931 The protocol-specific 0.931 options are described below. ProOise Triggers on a Protocol Discriminator value. Enter an 8-bit binary string composed of 1,0, or x (ignore). CR Flag Triggers on a Call Reference flag value of 1 or O. CR Valu Triggers on a Call Reference value. The value you enter must be the exact hex number string that would appear . in the traffic. For example, if you want to trigger on a frame with a Call Reference value of '5' and a Call Reference length of '2', the trigger input condition for CI-Rf Val: must be set to hex 0005. Msg Type Triggers on a specific 0.931 message type: ALERTing CALL PROceeding CONNECT CONNect ACKnowledgement SETUP SETUP ACKnowledgement RESUME RESUme ACKnowledgement RESUme REJection RESTART RESTart ACKnowledgement SUSPEND SUSPEND ACKnowledgement SUSPend REJection USeR INFOrmation DETACH DETach ACKnowledgement DISConnect RELEASE RELease COMplete CANCEL CANCel ACKnowledgement CANCel REJection, CONgestion CONtrol FACILITY FACility ACKnowledgement FACILITY REJection INFOrmation REGISTER REGister ACKnowledgement REGister REJection STATUS STATus ENOuiry PROGress Tekelee' 8-19 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Protocol: DASS 2 The DASS 2 function keys enable you to trigger on one of the following elements: F1 LAP triggers on a user-specified LAP (time slot) F2 Msg triggers on a specific type of message (see list below) F3 SupServ triggers on a type of Supplementary Service (see list below) F1 LAP If you press F1 LAP, the message DASS: LAP== appears in the ACTION column and you are prompted to enter a decimal number which indicates the Unk Access Protocol (LAP ortime slot) on which to trigger. The valid range for this entry is 0 - 31 decimal. F2Msg If you press F2 Msg, the message DASS: appears in the ACTION column and you are prompted to select a DASS 2 message type by pressing the appropriate softkey. There are 28 message types to choose from, as listed below. For more information about DASS 2 message types, refer to the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume II, Chapter 14. Tekelec $oftkey Meanlna CS IClc ICli SCli SClc CA NAM NIM CIM RRM WSR SeSR UDC ISRMc ISRM i SSRMi SSRMc Channel Seized Incoming Call Indication (Complete) Incoming Call Indication (Incomplete) Subsequent Call Indication (Incomplete) Subsequent Call Indication (Complete) Call Arrival Number Acknowledge Network Indication Clear Indication Recall Rejection Withhold Service Request Send Service Request User Data Control Initial Service Request (Complete) Initial Service Request (Incomplete) Subsequent Service Request (Incomplete) Subsequent Service Request (Complete) 8-20 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering Softkey Meaning CAM CRM CCF RMc RMi SRW CCM SM UUDc UUDi MIMc MCMc MREJM MIDMc MRMc MRMi MACKM MEOTM . Call Accepted Clear Request Clear Confirmation Recall (Complete) Recall (Incomplete) Service Request Withheld Call Connected Swap User to User Data (Complete) User to User Data (Incomplete) Maintenance Information (Complete) Maintenance Command (Complete) Maintenance Reject Maintenance Ind. (Complete) Maintenance Result (Complete) Maintenance Result (Incomplete) Maintenance Acknowledge Maintenance End of Task F3SupServ If you press F3 SupServ, you are prompted to select a DASS 2 Supplementary Service type by pressing the appropriate softkey. There are eight services to choose from, as listed below. Softkey Meaning Us~ to User Signalling Closed User Group Calling or Called Une Identification Call Charge Indication Network Address Extension Information for Display Maintenance Status Test Request Mainentance Status Test Response Usr>Usr CUG CCLld CCI NAE I Disp MSTRqst MSTResp Teke/ec 8-21 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide 55#7 Triggering There are several protocol specific functions keys dedicated to SS#7 Triggering: • F6 #7 L2 displays SS#7 Level 2 triggering options • F7 #7 L3L4 displays Level 3 and 4 triggering options • F8 CT TUPprovides direct access to simpler 55#7 Telephone User Part (TUP) triggering • F9 CT ISUP provides direct access to simpler S5#7 ISDN User Part (ISUP) triggering S5#7 triggering options are specific to the S5#7 standard selected when the Chameleon was configured (NCC, CCITT, ANSI, NTT, etc.). This includes standard heading codes, CIC, and OPC (Originating Point Code) and DPC (Destination Point Code) formats. Heading Codes oPC, DPC and CIC Format . Heading codes are handled by way of heading code tables which are specific to the SS#7 standard in use. These standard tables can be modified as needed to suit your application. When triggering on OPC, OPC, and CIC the SS#7 standard in use determines how the field should be entered. The functions keys indicate the options for the selected standard: FIELDS This option is displayed for all SS#7 standards. It prompts you to enter the field in decimal in the format shown at the bottom of the screen. For example, for NTT OPC, the following prompts appears: Enter decimal numbers in the format: ddd ddd ddd HEX This option is displayed for the CCITT 1984, CCITT 1988, 1TR7, NCC and NTT standards. It prompts you for the field in hex in the format shown at the bottom of the screen. For example, for NTT OPC, the following prompts appears: Maximum hex value is: ffff DEC This option is displayed for the 1TR7, NCC and NTT standards. It prompts you for the field in decimal, with the maximum value displayed at the bottom of the screen. For example, for NTT OPC, the following prompts appears: Maximum decimal value is: 65535 Taka/ee 8-22 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering Protocol: #7 L2 F6 #7 L2 displays SS#7 Level 2 triggering options as shown in Figure 8.7. I 510 1,--1_S_'N--II, I...._5_1E---..JII 5105 II SIPO II SIB ,Figure 8.7: 55#7 Level 2 Triggering Options You can trigger on the following SS#7 Level 2 elements: FSN BSN FIB BIB Forward Sequence Number Backward Sequence Number Forward Indicator Bit Backward Indicator Bit When you, select one of the above options, you are prompted for a 1 - 3 digit decimal number. When you enter a number and press Return, the Conditions column displays one of the following: FSN == nnn BSN == nnn FIB = nnn BIB == nnn nnn is the decimal number you entered. Tekelec FISU (Fill In Signal Unit). When you select FISU, the message Any FISU appears in the Conditi,ons column, and the Chameleon will trigger on any FISU encountered. LSSU (Link Status Signal Unit). When you select LSSU, the message Any LSSU appears in the Conditions column, 8-23 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide and the Chameleon will trigger on any LSSU encountered. To trigger on the status indicator of an LSSU (SIO, SIE, SIOS, etc), use the LSSU_SF option described below. MSU (Message Signal Unit). When you select MSU, the message Any MSU appears in the Conditions column, and the Chameleon will trigger on any MSU encountered. LSSU_SF [Link Status Signal Unit (Status Field)]. This option enables you to trigger on the status field of an LSSU. When you select LSSU_SF, one of the following can be selected using the function keys: SIO SIN SIE SIOS SIPO SIB Link Out of Alignment Normal Alignment Emergency Alignment Link out of Service Processor Outage Busy When you select one of these LSSU status field types, the message LSSU_SF on nnn appears in the Conditions column, where nnn is one of the status types listed above. Teke/ee 8-24 09/27/91 • Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Protocol: #7 L3L4 F7 #7 L3L4 displays the menu of SS#7 Level 3 and Level 4 triggering options, as shown in Figure 8.8. This option enables you to trigger on spedfic Signalling Indicators, their components, and the following Level 3 and Level 4 elements: SI (Signalling Indicator). This option enables you to trigger on a specific component of a Signalling Indicator. When you select SI, the function key strip displays the message types that can be triggered on: MGT TMR TUP Signalling network management messages Signalling network testing and maintenance messages Signalling network testing and maintenance messages (spare) -Data User Part (call and circuit related messages) Data User Part (facility registration and cancellation messages Signalling Connection and Control Part Telephone User Part (see also page 8-33) ISUP ISDN User Part (see also page 8-35) TMS Dupe DUPF seep When you select a specific Signalling Indicator type, the function key strip displays the elements on which you can trigger. Depending on the Signalling Indicator selected, and the SS#7 specification in use (CCITT, ANSI, or NTT) the available elements will be among the following options: Any This option is available for all Signalling Indicator types. When selected, it causes the Chameleon to trigger on the selected Signalling Indicator type. It displays the message Any nnn in the Conditions column, where nnn is the SI type . . Teke/ec 8-25 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide = 5571 Protocol I I I I I II MGT I TMA I I , ANY SI DPC I I II I HOH1 I I DUPC " DUPF I I I I I I I JI I SLC I I I SCCP ANY I II HOH1 French I SLS ANY I English - Russian - Gennan Spanist I-OCS I-CSwP I-- I I I I HOH1 CIC I lAM IL I I I I Addlnd - SubNum - Spare - Nationl - InterN ,I I I Cirlnd I - NoStlt 1 Stlt - NtReqd r-- Rquired Spare 2 - Prtmd Spare 3 - Spare Inc Int I I Aedir C r-- Not Int r-- Not Rdrc Inclded '-- InterNt '-- Rdrc:ted DataC I-TestC I-- Figure 8.8: 55#7 Level 3 and Level 4 Triggering Options. - I I Other I I I CIC I Ogt Pth - oPC J I I I 1TR7 CCITI NumSig I"- Not Inc i.- HOH1 Msg Ind I I Con Chk I EchoSu I I I J I ISUP II ANY I - -, I I I I Value I *TUP I I I Clg Cat ·,SUP I I TMS I *TUP * The actual F-key labels shown depends upon the protocol you selected in the Setup Menu. See pages 8-31 and 8-32 for details I I I I I #7 L3L4 I I #7L2 1 I I I I I AddSig I I Sig Pth Spare OrdCIi I-- Any Pth Ogtl CI "- SS7 Pth I ~EB ~I 1 I Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering SL(C/S) (Signalling Link Code). This option is displayed for all Signalling Indicator types except TUP and ISUP. When selected, you are prompted for a hex value. The Conditions column displays the message SLC==nnn, where nnn is the hex value of the desired SLC. (Signalling Link Selection). This option available for the SCCP 51 only - allows you to trigger on the signalling link selection field. When selected, you are prompted for a hex .value. The Conditions column displays the message SLS==nnn, where nnn is the hex value for the desired SLS. Tekelec CIC (Circuit Identification Code.) This option is displayed when triggering on ISUP, TUP, or 1TR7 messages. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more information. HOH1 (Heading Code). This option is available for all Siqnalling Indicator types. The heading code IS a 4-bit field (HO H1) which identifies the message group. When you select HO H1, it displays a mnemonic table for the selected message type. For example, if you selectTUP HO H1, the table shown in Figure 8.9 is displayed. lAM (Initial Address MessageJ. This option, available only when the TUP 51 is selected, allows you to trigger on lAM elements. See page 8-29 for further details. Figure 8.8 lists the elements available for triggering. 8-27 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering Mnemonic Table for TUP H1 o • 2 345 IAI SAM SAO COT CCF 678 9 abc d e HO 0--.00 1~ 6 7 8 9 lAM GSM GRQ ACM SEC ANU ANC RlG MGB CFM CHG CGC ANN 810 MBA CPM NNC C8K 8LA MGU CPA ADI ClF UBl MUA CVS CFL RAN U8A HGB CVM SSB UNN lOS SST ACB DPN EUM FOT CCl EAM RSC HBA HGU HUA GRS GRA SGB SBA SGU SUA CRM CLI a b c d e f Use arrow keys ( i J, ~ -+ ) to select a choice Press GO to accept selection or Cancel to abort entry· Figure 8.9: Heading Code Mnemonic Selection for Telephone User Part (TUP) To select a heading code by standard mnemonic: 1. Move the arrow cursor to the mnemonic 2. Press Go. This returns you to the Triggering editor and displays the message TUP Heading Code is nnn, where nnn is the selected mnemonic. In the table, the selectee mnemonic or value is displayed in green. To exit the heading code table without making a selection: Press Cancel. To trigger ona heading code value other than the standard mnemonics displayed in the table: 1. Move the arrow to the appropriate position in the table. . . 2. Press Go. For example, to trigger on heading code HO value 0 and H1 value 4, move the cursor to the fifth column of the first row, and press Go. Teke/ec &-28 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide In addition, when you trigger on Telephone User Part (TUP), you have the option of triggering on specific elements of Initial Address Messages (lAM). This feature is provided because of the relative importance of lAMs. Figure 8.10 illustrates the format of an lAM so that you can relate the SS#7 triggering options to the lAM components. Spare 2 FEDCBA 0001 0001 CALLING PARTY CATEGORY HEADING CODE H1 HEADING CODE HO LABEL 4 4 40 -6 First bit transmitted. r LKJIHGFEDCBA Address Signais Number of Address Signals MESSAGE INDICATORS nx8 4 12 Figure 8.10: TUP Initial Address Message (lAM) Format When you select TUP lAM, the function key strip displays the following triggering options: , Num Sig (Number of address signals). This option enables you to trigger on the number of address signals contained in the initial address message. Enter one hex digit or X to specify 'don't care.' This displays the message Num of add sigs == x in the Conditions column; where x is the hex value that you entered. Add Sig (Address Signal). This option enables you to trigger on a specific telephone number, or specific elements of a telephone number. When you select this option, you are prompted for the telephone digits (in decimal) that you. - want to trigger on. To ignore a digit, enter the letter x in that poSition. For example, to trigger on area code 818, enter the following: 818xxxxxxx The Conditions column then displays the message lAM digits = 818xxxxxxx. . The Chameleon will tri~Qer only on phone numbers with the same number of dIgIts shown in the condition. For example, if you enter the condition Tekelec· 8-29 09127191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide lAM digits == 123xx the Chameleon will trigger only on phone numbers beginning with 123 with a length of 5 digits. If the phone number has more or less than 5 digits, the trigger will not fire. Ifthe number of 'don't care' digits will vary, for example, in a country code, you can express a logical OR condition by writing two triggers. For example, the first trigger could specify two initial 'don't care' digits and the second trigger could specify three initial' don't care' digits. Clg Cat (Calling Party Category). This option triggers on a specific Calling Party Category, with the following options:. French English German Russian Spanish OCS CSwP DataC Teste Value Operator, language French Operator, language English Operator, language German Operator, language Russian Operator, language Spanish Ordinary Calling Subscriber Calling Subscriber with Priority Data Call Test Call Enter a decimal value which represents one of the categories not defined above. An appropriate message will be displayed in the Conditions column, as described below. If a value is entered that corresponds to one of the above values, the appropriate message will appear. Admin. Language (Available to Administrations for selecting a particular language provided by mutual agreement) This appears when value 6, 7. or 8 is entered. Reserved This appears when value 9 is entered. Spare This appears when values 14-127 are entered. Msg Ind Tekelec (Message Indicator). This option enables you to trigger on message-indicator bit settings A - L (refer to Figure 8.10). The following options are available: 8-30 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering Add Ind Nature of address indicator (Bits B A): Sub Num Spare use) Nationl InterN Cir Ind Subscriber Number Spare (reserved for national National (significant) number International number Nature of circuit indicator (Bits 0 C): No Stlt connection 1 Stlt connection Spare 2 Spare 3 No satellite circuit in the One satellite circuit in the Spare (binary 1 0) Spare (binary 1 1 ) Con Chk Continuity check Indicator (Bits FE): Nt Reqd Continuity check not required Rquired Continuity check required on this circuit Prfmd Continuity check performed on a previous circuit Spare Spare Echo Su Echo suppressor indicator (Bit G): Not Inc Outgoing suppressor not included Inclded Outgoing suppressor included Inc Inti Call other than international Incoming international call Not a redirected call Redirected call Ordinary call Digital path required Signalling path indicator(Bit K): Any Pth SS7 Pth path Teke/ec echo All digital path required indicator (Bit J): Ord CII Dgtl CI Sig Pth half Redirected call indicator (Bit I): Not Rdrc Rdrcted Dig Pth echo Incoming International Call indicator (Bit H): Not Int inco.ming InterNt Redir C half 8-31 Any path All signalling system No.7' 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Spare Spare (Bit L): o 1 Tekelec Spare bit not set Spare bit set OPC Origination Point Code. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more information. OPC Destination Point Code. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used~ Refer to page 8-22 for more information. 8-32 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Protocol: CT TUP . . FB CT TUP displays function key options for CCITT SS#7 Telephone User Part (TUP) triggering, as shown in Figure 8.11. This option provides direct access for writing simpler TUP triggers. Refer to F7 #7 L3L4 for more complex Level 3 and Level 4 TUP triggering and for triggering on Signalling Indicators other than TUP. See page 8-52 for an example of an SS#7 TUP trigger. Protocol CTTUP CIC Figure 8.11: 55#7 CCITT TUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options With the FB CT TUPoption, you can trigger on the following TUP components: Teke/ec ope Origination Point Code. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more information. DPe Destination Point Code. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. . Refer to page 8-22 for more information. ele (Circuit Identification Code.) This option is displayed when triggering on ISUP, TUP, or 1TR7 messages. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more information. HOH1 (Heading Code) The.heading code is a 4-bit field (HO H1) which identifies the message group. When you select HO H1, it displays the mnemonic table for TUP. The format and use of the TUP mnemonic table is described on page 8-28. 09/27191 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering Add Sig. (Address Signal.) This option enables you to trigger on a specific telephone number, or specific elements of a telephone number. When you select this option, you are prompted for the telephone digits (in decimal) that you want to trigger on. To ignore a digit, enter the letter x in that position. For example, to trigger on area code 818, enter the following: 818xxxxxxx The Conditions column then displays the message lAM digits == 818xxxxxxx Teke/ec 8-34 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Protocol: CT ISUP F9 CT ISUP displays function key options for CCITT SS#7·ISDN User Part (ISUP) triggering, as shown in Figure 8.12. This option provides direct access for writing ISUP triggers. Refer to F7 #7 L3L4 (page 8-25) for triggering on Signalling Indicators other than ISUP. Protocol CTTUP Called # Figure 8.12: SS#7 CCITT ISUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options With the F9 CT ISUPoption, you can trigger on the following TUP components: Tekelec oPC Origination Point Code. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more information. OPC Destination Point Code. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more information. CIC (Circuit Identification Code.) This option is displayed when triggering on ISl!P, TUP, or 1TR7 messages. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more information. HOH1 (Heading Cod'e) The heading code is a 4-bit field (HOH1) which identifies the message group. When you select HO H1, it displays the mnemonic table for ISUP (see Figure 8.13 be/ow). The. use of an HO/H1 mnemonic table is described on page 8-28. 8-35 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide MnemoniC Table for ISUP H1 o HO 0 I~ 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f 00 lAM SAM INR INF COT ACM FOT ANM UBM REl PAU RES RlS .. 1 RlC CCR RSC BlO UBl BLA UBA GRS CGB CPU CGB CGU CMR CMC RCM FAR 2 3 FAA FRJ FAD FAI 4 5 678 9 a b c d e CSV CSV DRS PAM GRA UAU Use arrow keys ( i J. f- ~ ) to select a choice Press GO to accept selection or Cancel to abort entry Figure 8.13: The ISUP Mnemonic Table. Add Sig (Address Signal). This option triggers on a specific address signal (telephone number) in a Cal/ed Party Number information element of an lAM. ~ When you select this option, you are prompted for the telephone digits (in decimal) that you want to trigger on. To ignore a digit, enter the letter x in that position. For example, to trigger on area code 818, enter the following: 818xxxxxxx The Conditions column then displays the message: lAM digits 818xxxxxxx == Tekelec 8-36 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering The following option is available only if your Chameleon is configured to monitor SS#7 standard 1TR7. Tel. Num This option triggers on the called or calling Telephone Number. Selecting this option calls up two other options: F1 Calling # Prompts you for the telephone number of the calling party. The Chameleon triggers on the lAM frame containing the complete Calling Number, and on all messages related to the call. F2 Called # Prompts you for the telephone number of the called party. The Chameleon triggers on the lAM frame containing the complete or partial called number, the SAM containing the address signal which completed the called number, and on all the messages related to the call. The following factors determine if a message is related to the call when triggering on Called #: For ISUP messages, for those messages with a CIC value which matches the CIC in the lAM For secp messages sent from the same direction as the lAM, related messages are those in which the Source Local Reference matches the lAM LocaJ Reference of Connection Request IE. For other SCCP messages, related messages are those in which the Destination Local Reference matches the lAM Local Reference of Connection Request IE. Note: TekelecO When the Called Address in an lAM frame matches a trigger condition, but the SAM fails to complete the number, only the lAM frame will be triggered. 8-31 09/21/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide The telephone number you enter must· conform to the following rules: . • Enter a maximum of 20 digits. • Do not include spaces and hyphens (-) when you enter the number. • You can use the following wildcards within ·the telephone number: • Taka/ec ? Wildcard substitution for a single telephone number digit. for example: 41486??98 * Wildcard substitution for the remaining digits of the telephone number. For example, the following triggers on any telephone number with the first three digits 414: 414* A maximum of 16 telephone numbers can be entered in a triggering file. 8-38 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Protocol: TR71SUP F9 TR71SUP displays function key options for 1TR7 #SS7 ISDN User Part (ISUP) triggering, as shown in Figure 8.14. This option provides direct access for writing 1TR7 SS7 ISUP triggers. Protocol = SS7 TR7TUP Called # Figure 8.14: SS#7 1TR7 ISUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options With the F9 TR71SUP option, you can trigger on the following components: Tekelec OPC Origination Point Code. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7standard being used.· Refer to page 8-22 for more information. OPC Destination Point Code. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more information. CIC (Circuit Identification Code.) This option is displayed when triggering on ISUP, TUP, or 1TR7 messages. The way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more information. HOH1 (Heading Code) The heading code is a 4-bit field (HOH1) which identifies the message group. When you select HO H1, it displays the mnemonic table for ISUP (see Figure 8.15 below). The use of an HO/H1 mnemonic table is described on page 8-28. 8-39 09/,27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Mnemonic Table for 1TR7ISUP ~ H1 HO 0 1~ 6 7 8 9 a b o 1 2 00 RlC CCA RSC BlO UBl BLA UBA GAS CGB CPU CGB CGU CMR CMC RCM FAA FAA lAM SAM INA INF COT ACM FOT ANM UBM REl c d e f PAU RES RlS 3 4 5 678 9 a b c d e FRJ FAD FAt CSV CSV DRS PAM GRA UAU Use arrow keys ( i J, +- ~ ) to select a choice Press GO to accept selection or Cancel to abort entry Flgure 8.15: The 1TR71SUP Mnemonic Table. Add Sig (Address Signal). This option triggers on a specific address signal (telephone number) in a Called Party Number information element of an lAM. When you select this option, you are prompted for the telephone digits (in decimal) that you want to trigger on. To ignore a digit, enter the letter x in that position. For example, to trigger on area code 818, enter the following: 818xxxxxxx The Conditions column then displays the message: lAM digits 818xxxxxxx == The following option is available only if your Chameleon is configured to monitor SS#7 standard 1TR7. Tel. Num This option triggers on the called or calling Telephone Number. Selecting this option ·calls up two other options: . F1 Calling # Tekelec Prompts you for the telephone number of the calling party. 8-40 09/27/91 ~ Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide The Chameleon triggers on the lAM frame containing the ·complete Calling Number, and on all messages related to the call. F2 Called # Prompts you for the telephone numberofthe called party. The Chameleon triggers on the lAM frame containing the complete or partial called number, the SAM containing the address signal which completed the called number, and on all the messages related to the call. The following factors determine if a message is related to the call when triggering on Called #: For ·ISUP messages, for those messages with a CIC value which matches the CIC in the lAM For SCCP messages sent from the same direction as the lAM, related messages are those in which the Source Local Reference matches the lAM Local Reference of Connection Request IE. For other SCCP messages, related messages are those in which the Destination Local Reference matches the lAM Local Reference of Connection Request IE. Note: When the Called Address in an lAM frame matches a trigger condition, but the SAM fails to complete the number, only. the lAM frame will be triggered. The telephone number you enter must conform to the following four rules: • Enter a maximum of 20 digits. • Do not include spaces and hyphens (-) when you enter the number. • . You can use the following wildcards within the telephone number: ? Wildcard substitution for a single telephone number digit, for example: 41486??98 Teke/ec 8-41 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide .* Wildcard substitution for the remaining digits of the telephone number. For example, the following triggers on any telephone number with the first three digits 414: 414* • OPT A maximum of 16 telephone numbers can be entered in a triggering file. . This option allows you to trigger on 1TR7 SS#7 ISUP optional message parameters. Selecting this option elicits a prompt for hex strings representing the optional parameters to trigger on. This string of hex digits should contain: 1. The name of the optional part (1 octet): 2 hex digits 2. The length of the optional part (1 octet): 2 hex digits 3. The contents of the optional part ( up to 9 octets): up to 18 hex digits. . For example: OPT =080121 :; 1111 Contents . Note: OPT TRIGGER cannot be executed unless the following file is in the Chameleon directory: A:\Tekelec\setup\trigger\O PT. DEF. This file contains the values of all message-types of frames having an optional part. It also contains the corresponding offsets of the pointer to the first optional part. If you try to execute OPT TRIGGER without first having loaded the OPT.DEF file, the following error message is given: Can't open OPT.DEF Variable Take/ec This option allows you to compare an integer variable with another integer variable or a constant. If you press this softkey, you will be asked to select an integer variable ($7, $8, $9). You will then be prompted for a logical operator (> -, < =, ==, >, <). You should then select either another integer variable or a constant for comparison with the first integer variable previously chosen. 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Leads This option allows you to trigger on the state or change of a specific interface lead. When you press Leads, you are prompted for DCE or DTE lead mnemonics shown in Figures 8.16 and 8.17 below. Mnemonic Name CCITT EIA Ref. RS232 Pin CTS Clear to Send CS/CS DSR Data Set Ready DCD Data Carrier Detect RI Ring Indicator 106 107 109 125 CElIC 5 6 .8 22 CC/DM CF/RR Figure 8.16: DeE Interface Leads Mnemonic RTS DTR Name CCITT EIA Ref. RS232 Pin Request to Send Data Terminal Ready 105 108.2 CAIRS CD/FR 4 20 Figure 8.17: DTE Interface Leads After selecting a lead, you are prompted for the condition: High Low ToHigh To Low Port Tekelec Triggers whenever the lead is high. High =Space (driven). Low =Mark Triggers whenever the lead is low. (undriven). Triggers if the lead changes from low to high. Triggers if the lead changes from high to low. On a Dual Port machine, you can trigger on frames from either Port A or Port S. If you do not indicate a preference, the Chameleon will trigger from both ports. On a Single Port machine, the Port option does not appear. 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide ACTIONS Any combination of up to four trigger ACTIONS can be set to take effect when all CONDITIONS selected for a trigger are true. More than one trigger can access the same ACTION(s). Note: Triggers are checked in the order they were entered, and operate on every event. For a trigger ACTION to take effect, all CONDITIONS selected for that trigger must be true. The ACTIONS will be displayed in the field that follows the word do on the Trigger page. The Cancel key will remove previously specified ACTIONS when the trigger editor cursor is on the ACTIONS field. Canee/erases one condition at a time, starting with the bottom condition. All triggers are first evaluated to see if their CONDITIONS are true. If all the conditions of a trigger are true, the trigger ACTIONS take effect in order. The Triggering language allows you to specify up to four ACTIONS for each trigger: The softkey options are: Arm Alters the status of a trigger during run-time. Enter the four-character trigger name (for example, trigger ABCD), 'and press . (Trigger ABeD is displayed in the ACTION field). Then, select how it should be ARMed (1stTime, Disable, or Whenever). For example, if you select Whenever, Whenever ABCD will replace Trigger ABCD in the ACTION field. Stats (Statistics) You are given a choice between Process, Print, and Reset. The Process option marks frames that satisfy the trigger CONDITIONS. The Statistics application will only keep track of the frames which cause the trigger to fire. The Print option forces the Statistics program to print the Statistics screen, and the Reset option resets the Statistics page to zero. Stat Process, Stat Print, OR Stat Reset will be displayed in the ACTION field for these options. Display When this Action is selected, Display will appear in the ACTION field. This Action determines which data is displayed in the Real Time and History pages. In the Real Time page, only data meeting the triggering conditions will be displayed. Teke/ee 8-44 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's' Guide In the History page, there are two DISPLAY options: • In normal mode, data which meets the triggering conditions is shown in low intensity color. All other data is shown in high intensity color. • In trigger mode, only data which meets the triggering conditions is displayed in the History page. All other data is suppressed from the display. The triggering DISPLAY mode is controlled from the History page using two comman~s: • :normal Selects normal display mode. This is the default mode. • :trigger Selects trigger display mode. When using these commands, you must include the colon (:) as part of the command to invoke the command line. See Chapter 4 for more information about the History page. =>Disk Marks frames that satisfy the trigger CONDITIONS so that they will be recorded to the Direct-To-Disk area of the hard disk. "Direct=>Disk" will be displayed in the ACTION field. Note: When' analyzing data from disk, this key is 'Not Active' (N/A). ,Pressing it elicits the error message: "->DISK option is not valid when data source is DISK." Mesg Displays the message "Trigger Fired" and beeps, indicating that· the trigger CONDITIONS have been met. This message ~i11 be displayed on the Run time page. The words "Display Message" will be displayed in the ACTION field. . StopAcq (Stop Acquisition) Stops the acquisition of traffic from the line. A variable number of frames may be captured after the trigger frame by specifying, in decimal, the number to be captured (up to five . digits). Incent (Increment Counter) Increments the specified counter by one. For example, if you specify Counter1 Inc, "Inc (Counter1)" will be displayed in the ACTION field. Tekelec 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide '?'" Triggering ResCnt Resets specified counter. For example, if you specify Counter2 Res, "Reset (Counter2)" will be displayed in th~ ACTION field. Timer Starts, Stops, or resumes a specified timer. For example, if you specify that Timer3 should stop, "Stop (Timer3)" will be displayed in the ACTION field. Start resets itto 0, and resume continues from where it was stopped. SetVars When you select SetVars option, there are three different kinds of actions which can be performed. Triggering variables are used to store sections of incoming frames for comparison with later frames. There are nine variables in all, divided into three distinct types: byte, bit, and int. Depending on which type you choose, you can store a string of complete bytes, store a string of bits, or convert a number of bits in to an integer. Keys F1-F3 store a string of entire bytes. After pressing one of these keys, you are asked at which byte of the frame you would like to begin storage. Select a number and press return. Then enter a number 1-32 to designate how many bytes should be stored. . Keys F4-F6 store a string of bits. After pressing one of these keys you are asked at which byte of the frame you would like to begin storage. After entering a number and pressing return, you are asked at which bit within the designated byte you would like to begin storag~. Enter a number between 1 and 8 and then press return again. Finally, enter a number between 1 and 256 to deSignate how many bits should be stored. You are allowed to store up to 256 bits. Keys F7-F9 are used when you would like to convert a certain number of bits (1-9) into an integer for use as an index. After pressing one of these softkeys you are asked at which byte of the frame to begin storage, then at which bit within the byte to begin storage, and, finally, for how -many bits (1-9) ·storage should be continued. Once you enter the final number, the bits are converted to an integer for use as an index. . V Arith This option allows you to change the value of one of the integer variables ($7-$9). To do this, select one of the variables and then select a variable or a constant to use to modify the first variable. You have the option of adding, multiplying, subtracting, or dividing (+, x, -, DIV, MOD) another variable or constant. Select the option 'Done' if you do not wish to use any operation. TrigOut This option, when chosen, sets the Chameleon to trigger to trigger an external device upon detecting an event. The external device can be an oscilloscope, logic analyzer, or other Chameleon.- For further details, see Example 4: Triggering an External Device. Tekelec 09127191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Run Time Triggering Page When you have completed building or modifying your trigger. press Go to run it. You can press Go to start a trigger whenever the Press Go to Run message is displayed in the upper right corner of the Triggering Editor screen. This starts the trigger and displays the Run Time Triggering page shown below. Acquisition is stopped while you are in the Triggering Editor. This allows you to, go back and forth from the Triggering Editor to 'Triggering Run Time. You can use Run/Stop to continue acquisition. The Run Time Triggering page (see Figure 8.18) displays the status of a maximum of 20 triggers. Note: -Q-------------------ffi:::Tttggedn9;:,··1 RUN TIME TRIGGERING Real Time Clock: 00:00:00 Counterl. Prey: Curr: 0 Counter3 Counter4 o o o o o 0 "TImer1 Prey: Curr: Counier2 o "TImer2 00000:000:000 ooOOO:QOO:OOO "TImer4 "TImer3 00000:000:000 00000:000:000 00000:000:000 00000:000:000 000000:000:000 000000:000 :000 TRIGGERS STATUS: t Exit Figure 8.18: Run-TIme Triggering Page. The fields of the Run Time Triggering page are: Teke/.ec Real Time Clock: Displays the time of day. Prey: and Curr: Curr keeps track of the current counter and timer. When either are reset, Prev displays the old value of the counter or timer for later review.. 8-47 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Timer • Timer keeps track of time in the following format: sssss:mmm:uuu, where s=seconds. m=milliseconds, and u=microseconds. This field is based on the time stamps from the events. TRIGGERS STATUS Displays the status of the trigger it is currently checking. The display will be blue if the conditions are being checked ~nd green if it is disabled. The fields are: • • • Trigger status: + = Enabled (first time) - = Disabled • =- Whenever Trigger name Number of times the trigger conditions have been met. Messages The following messages can be displayed during Run Time: Note: Teke/ec • No more active triggers In Run Time, all the triggers were disabled. • Waiting on acquisition The Chameleon is waiting for new frames to arrive. • Data overwritten The data currently displayed has been overwritten by new data in the data buffer. To avouid this message, do one of three things: run at a lower speed, run off-line, or reduce the number of triggers in your triggering program. • Trigger fired The trigger conditions have been met. A message is displayed until it is no longer valid. 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide Programming Examples The following examples show how to program a trigger for a specific application. Remember, because the Chameleon looks at trigger CONDITIONS as constraints, and checks them in the order you specified them, the first CONDITION you specify within each trigger should be the CONDITION you think is the least likely to be satisfied. This will minimize the time the Chameleon spends checking subsequent CONDITIONS. Example 1: Displaying Frames with same Call Reference. Assuming that you are monitoring an ISDN line, you want to tell the Chameleon to capture the Call Reference value when the first SETUP message type is seen and to display all subsequent frames with that Call Reference value (see Figure 8.19). r-of-------------------fB·)Irigg~rtr1g~ 1\ TRIGGERING EDITOR NAME SET STATUS ACTIONS CONDITIONS 1st Tame 0.931: SETUP do $7=Frm{6,5,4] $4=Frm{7,2,7] Whenever LEN2 Whenever DABL ~-----------------------------------------------------------LEN2 Disabled. $7 == 2 do $4=Frm{7,2,l5] DABL Disabled do Disable LEN2 ~-----------------------------------------------------------DSPL Whenever CI-Af Val: $4 ~----------------.---.------------- Enter String do Display .. --.--- .. -........ ------(cr) to terminate \ I Arm I Stats IDlspla~ =>DISkl Mes; I Stop Iincent I Ree"t I TImer I Clear I J Figure 8.19: Programming Example 1 - Display Frames with Same Call Reference. Note: Tekelec Only three triggers can actually be seen at a time on the screen. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll up or down to display additional triggers. . 8-49 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering The SET trigger will search for a frame with the message type SETUP. Once it finds this frame, the Call Reference length will be stored in the integer variable $7. (The call reference length is coded in the frame as 4 bits, starting at bit 5 in the 6th byte.) The Call Reference value is stored in the variable $4. (Assume that the Call Reference is of length 1, in which case it is 7 bits, starting at bit 2 in the 7th byte.) Triggers LEN2 and DASL are then enabled. The SET trigger will only fire once, since its status is 1st Time. Condition in the SET trigger. Protocol: 0.931: MsgType: Setup Actions used in the SET trigger: SetVars. Arm The LEN2 trigger will look at the Call Reference length stored in the integer variable $7. If the length equals 2, the Call Reference value is stored in the variable $4. (The Call Reference value is 15 bits, starting at bit 2, in the 7th byte.) Condition used in the LEN2 trigger: Action used in the LEN2 trigger: The DASL trigger disables the LEN2 trigger. Action used in the DABL trigger: Variabl: canst SetVars Arm The DSPL trigger will search for frames with a Call Reference value equal to the value stored in the variable $4. Such frames will then be displayed by Real Time. Condition used in the DSPL trigger: Protocol: 0.931: CallRef A9tion used in the DSPL trigger: Display Tekelec 8-50 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Triggering Example 2: Displaying ALERT Frames Assuming that you are monitoring an ISDN line, you want to tell the Chameleon to display 'all frames with message type ALERT, and with the first information element after the call reference not equal to hex 18 (see Figure 8.20). TRIGGERING EDITOR NAME ALRT STATUS CONDITIONS Whenever ACTIONS Q.931: ALERT do $7.Frm[6,5,4] $7-$7+8 Whenever DSPL Whenever DSBL DSPL Disabled IFrBin($7].."'OOO11 000 do Display -------------------------~---------------------------------DSBL Disabled do Disable DSPL I. __________ , _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ \r Arm I Stats·1 Displa~ =>DISkl Mesg l Stop IlncCntlRecntJ TImed ClearJ J Figure 8.20: Programming Example 2 - Alert Display The ALERT trigger will search for a frame with the message type ALERT. Once it finds this frame, the call reference length will be stored into the integer variable $7. (The call reference length is coded in the frame as 4 bits, starting at bit 5 in the 6th byte.) The number 8 will be added to the length in the integer variable $7 so that $7 will contain the offset in the frame of the first byte after the message type. The triggers DSPL and DSBL will then be enabfed. Condition used in- the ALRT trigger: Action used in the ALRT trigger: Protocol: Q.931 MsgType SetVars, V Arith, Arm The DSPl trigger will check to see if the octet at the offset of $7 equals 00011000 (hex 18). If the offset does NOT equal hex 18, the frame is displayed. . Condition used in the DSPL trigger: Action used in the DSPL trigger: Tekelec 8-51 Not Frame Display 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide The DSBl trigger disables the DSPl trigger Arm Action used in the DSBL trigger: Example 3: Storing Defined Address Messages Figure 8.21 illustrates a trigger for SS#7 CCITT TUP, which stores to disk any address message containing the called number (address signal) 818-880-5656 with the DPC (Destination Point Code) 02-012-01. Because trigger conditions are logically ANDed, the address message must have the specified DPC and address Signal in order to be stored to disk. I' r ---{J------------------tf;ntttggerfng TRIGGERING EDITOR NAME DPC STATUS CONDITIONS Whenever ,DPC - ACTIONS 2 012 1 do Direct-=>Disk Add Sig-= 8188805656 \ I Ann I stats·1 Displa~ =>olskl Mesg I Stop JInccntl ReCnt I TtmerL Clear J J Figure 8.21: CCITT TUP Sample Trigger The sequence of keystrokes necessary to build this trigger is listed below. CONDITIONS Tekelec F8 Protocol For the first condition, this displays the menu of protocol options. F8CTTUP Selects the SS#7 CCITT Telephone User Part menu. 8-52 09/27191 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide F10PC Selects the TUP OPC option. Specifies the OPC value on which to trigger. Enter: 2 012 1 Fa Protocol For the second condition, this displays the menu of protocol options. Fa CTTUP Selects the SS#7 CCITr Telephone User Part menu. F5 Add Sig Selects the TUP Address Signal option. Specifies the address signal value on which to trigger. Enter: 8188805656 ACTIONS Selects the Oirect-to-Oisk action if the specified conditions are met. F4 =>Disk Example 4: Triggering an External Device. Figure 8.22 illustrates the setup for triggering an external device. When you implement such a setup, any defined event detected by the Chameleon will be reported to an external device connected to the Chameleon at the RS232 (AUX 2) port. Figures 8.23 and 8.24 illustrate certain physical characteristics of the TrigOut action. t2ff.n~:ger.lri~~;·1 \ 1-0 TRIGGERING EDITOR NAME STATUS TRG1 CONDITIONS .. ACTIONS Whenever do Trigger out _._--------------------------------------------------------- The arrow points to the field which you are currently editing. Use the softkeys to edit this field, or move the arrow to any field by using the arrow keys on the keyboard. \ I (SetVarsf: V Arfth TrigOut I· I t. f I : t '. (." IJ Figure 8.22: A Basic TrigOut (Trigger External Device) Setup. Tekelec 8-53 \ 09/27/91 Triggering Chameleon 32 User's Guide The external device may be an oscilloscope, logic analyzer, or some other instrument for registering the occurrence of an event. When the Chameleon detects a triggering event, a pulse is transmitted to the external device over signal line 5 of the AUX 2 port, as shown in Figure 8.23. R5-232 connection from the Chameleon AUX2 Serial Port R5-232 connection to external device. Pln# Pin # f'5\- _____________________ Q External triggering signal line: \:./ Ground: \V 0----------------------0 Figure 8.23: R5-232 Pinouts for Triggering to External Device. Regardless of the nature of the event detected and being reported, the testing Chameleon generates a pulse of 6 microseconds in width. Figure 8.24 illustrates this pulse pattern and width. R5-232 High slgnal-...... R5-232 Low signal . .. 6 J1sec. pulsewidth (approximate) Figure 8.24: TrlgOut Pulse Pattern. Tekelec 09/27/91 · CHAPTER NINE: UTILITIES· Introdu eti 0 n This section describes the Chameleon 32 Utilities Menu options. The Utilities Menu options are: Tekelec F1 Remote I/O Port Setup (Page 9-3) Configures the Remote I/O port so that the Chameleon 32 can be remotely controlled from an asynchronous terminal, Chameleon 20, or other Chameleon 32. F2 Printer Setup (Page 9-9) Configures a Chameleon 32 printer port to output to a serial or parallel printer. F3 Set Date and Time (Page 9-12) Sets the Chameleon 32 system time and date. F4 Traffic Load/Save (Page 9-13) Saves Direct-To-Disk or Acquisition buffer traffic to a file. Loads a traffic file for Monitoring. F5 645/705 Analysis Conversion (Page 9-16) Converts traffic saved on-disk over a V-type interface by Hard Engineering models 645 and 705 testers to a format compatible with the Chameleon 32 and Chameleon 20. F6 Check Free Disk Space (Page 9-20) Displays the number of bytes available on the hard disk or a floppy disk. F7 Kermit'Connect Mode Setup (Page 9-21) Configures the Chameleon 32 Aux Serial Port 2 for Kerm it File Transfer. F8 Backup/Restore Menu (Page 9-26) Backs up and restore user files or Direct-to-disk data larger than 700 kbytes on .the Chameleon hard disk. F9 FMS ,File Conversion (Page 9-29) Converts files created with the Chameleon 32, Release 2.6.1 and ea.r1ier, to the Chameleon 32 MS-DOS file format used with Software Releases 3.x and 4.x. 9-1 09/27/91 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide Menu Access' The Utilities menu is available at any time during operation of the Chameleon 32. To access the Utilities Menu. do the following: 1. Press Shift Utilities. The Utilities banner appears in several seconds (in yellow) at the bottom of the Chameleon 32 screen. 2. Use the Select key to make the Utifities page active. You can then display the page (Figure 9.1 below), and use its function keys, as described on the following pages. --0 [:YtIJtilitles/ Utilities Menu F1 F2 Printer Setup F3 Set Date and lime F4 Traffic Load/Save F5 6451705 Data Conversion Check Free Disk Space Kermit/Connect Mode Setup Backup/Restore Menu FMS File Conversion F6 F7 Fa F9 '1 Ft t F2 F3 Remote I/O Port Setup F4 F5 F6 F7 I Fa F9 Exit Figure 9.1: Utilities Menu Tekelec 9-2 09/27191 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide - - o - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i [ · . U t i I i U e s.•.·1 Terminal Setup Menu Compatible Terminat Type VT100 9600 Baud Rate Number of Data Bits 8 Number of Stop Bits 1 Parity None Configuration Files None +- After making selections Press GO Exit Figure 9.2: Terminal Setup Menu Compatible Terminal Type This selects the type of device that is connected to the Remote I/O Port to control the Chameleon. The options are: F1 VT100 F2 CHAM32 (for Chameleon .32 or Chameleon 20) Baud Rate This specifies the baud rate required by the device connected to the Remote I/O Port. The options are in bits per second: . F1300 F2600 F31200 Tekelec F42400 F54800 F69600 09/27191 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide Number of Data Bits This specifies the number of data bits required by the device connected to the Remote VO Port. The options are: F15 F26 F37 F48 Number of StOD Bits This specifies the number of stop bits required by the device connected to the Remote VO Port. The options are: F11 F21.5 F32 Parity This parameter allows you to specify the parity that will be used for error checking on the Remote VO Port. The options are: F1 None F20dd F3 Even Configuration files This option allows you to load or save a setup file. The default path for terminal setup files is: A:\TEKElEC\SETUP\UTllITy\ The function key options are: F1 None This indicates that you want to use the parameters as shown, and do not want to load a setup file, or save the displayed parameters. Press Go to set up the Chameleon 32 using the displayed parameters. F2Load This loads an existing setup file. When you press F2 Load, the default file TERMINAL OF is displayed. If you want to load a file other than TERMINAL.OF, use the delete key to erase it, and enter the file name you want. When the name is correct, press Go to load the file and perform the setup. Tekelec 09/27191 Chameleon 32 User's Guide F3 Save Utilities This saves the displayed parameters to a file. When you press F3 Save, the default file name TERMINAL.OF is displayed. If you want to use a name other than TERMINAL.OF, use the delete key to erase it, and enter the file name you want. When the name is correct, press Go to save the file and perform the setup. Remote Terminal Keyboard Figure 9.3 shows the Chameleon 32 keyboard. The keys in parentheses indicate which keys you have to press on a remote terminal to emulate the Chameleon 32 keyboard. 1= (Taba] I~~[;::]~~~~~ 6]E] I=~abb] I~~)II= ~ 1=*(TabC] (Tab (Tab ~g 1=-1fabdl [;]~~ E;J [!J 1=-(TabO] : AX I Ay , ~ f) S ~ l! tW' . . , !aO~ lQOe _ . "~ _(I ~ l'IOII: OM! ..De; 'IU &0,. 11011......11 'On .U 'OOI!II 90e 9O1!' 906 IWU 'U. "!lOS 'VOt' *"'lIO&I ~oc 9(6' 1106: /fie!! 'OO1t lIOl!I Joe en IIU. "'06 != ;D6 ~ w. h) ~ ,•>~ ~ > ~ § ~ ~ ~ ,~ § I ~ ~ ~ :l ~ ~~~e ~=~ 906~ Figure 9.3: Chameleon 32 Keyboard Emulation To cause a remote terminal to perform the same functions as the Chameleon 32, you use three keys: . Teke/eo Clrl ' The caret symbol (") indicates the Control key. For example, to execute the Cancel key function, type, "X.(Ctrl+X) Tab The use of the Tab key is indicated by the word Tab. To use the Tab key, press the Tab key, release it, and then press the other key. For example, to perform the Files key function, press Tab, release it, and then press b. Shift The Shift key works the same way on a remote terminal as it does on the Chameleon 32. Pressing the Shift key with the other Tab or Ctrl key combinations, executes the upper function on the key. ForexampJe, Tab, Shift-d is the same as pressing Shift Replace on the Chameleon 32. . 9-7 09/27191 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide You can refresh the screen on a remote terminal by pressing the Tab key twice. Figure , 9.4 shows the HEX codes for a remote terminal keyboard. To emulate the Chameleon key: On the host, use: Hex Code To emulate the Chameleon key: Tab 1 Tab 2 Tab 3 Tab 4 0981 0982 0983 0984 0985 0986 0987 F8 F9 FlO Cancel Go Move" Print Page Print Scm Hide Page Show Page Tab 5 Tab 6 Tab 7 Tab 8 Tab 9 Tab Ctrt J Ctrt X Ctrt Y Tabe Tab. A Tab a TabC Tabc Shift i Tab Ctrt L F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 On the host, use: Hex Code Scroll" Move Scroll Tabg Tabf Tabh 0967 0966 0968 Left Arrow Up Arrow Right Arrow Down Arrow Ctrt H Ctrt J Ctrt L Ctrt K Tab 0 Tabd Tabb 08 Ob Oc Oa 0944 0964 0942 0963 Utilities Run/Stop Space bar ESCape Return Help Delete TabS Tab 0 Space bar ESCape Return Ctrt w Delete 0962 0980 20 lb Cd 17 7f 090C Shift .J. Tab Ctri N 090E 0988 0989 098a 18 19 0965 0941 0961 0943 . Replace Seled Files , Figure 9.4: Keyboard Hex Values Teke/ec 09/27/91 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide F2 Printer Setup To configure the Chameleon 32 for your printer, press F2 Printer Setup in the Utilities menu. This displays the Printer Setup Menu as shown ·in the figure below. You can connect a serial or parallel printer to the Chameleon 32 for printing screens, program code, program results, and statistics reports. If you are using a parallel printer, connect the print~r cable to the Chameleon 32 Parallel Printer port. The Parallel Printer port is compatible with standard IBM PC compatible printers. If you are using a serial printer, connect the printer cable to the Chameleon 32 Serial Printer port. The Serial Printer port is a standard DCE interface. Refer to Chapter 2: Hardware and Installation, for a description of the Chameleon 32 ports. Refer to Appendix C for a description of the pinouts. Printer Setup Menu Printer Type Parallel Configuration Files None After making selections Press f- GO Printer Setup Menu The Printer Setup Menu parameters are a/ways loaded from .the system default file PRtNTER.DF. The default path is -A:\TEKELEC\SETUP\UTILITY\. On power up, this file is automatically loaded, and the printer port set up according to its parameter values. . TEKELEC 9-9 7/5"89 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide You also have the ability to save additional printer setups in named files using the .Configuration Files option described below. Printer Type This parameter identifies the type of printer you are using. The options are: F1 Parallel F2 Serial If you select F2 Serial, these additional printer parameters are displayed: Baud Rate Number of Data Bits Number of Stop Bits Parity Configuration Files These parameters are identical to the options on the -Terminal Setup Menu, which are described on pages 9-5 and 9-6. Configuration Files . , , ~ This option allows you to load or save a setup file. The default path for terminal setup files is A:\TEKELEC\SETUP\UTIUTY\ . The options are: F1 None This indicates that you want to use the parameters as shown, and do not want to load a setup file, or save the displayed parameters. Press Go to set up the Chameleon 32 using the displayed parameters. F2 Load This loads an existing setup file. When you press F2 Load, the default file PRINTEROF is displayed. If you want to load a file other than PRINTEROF, use the delete key to erase it and enter the file name you want. When the name is correct, press Go to load the file and perform the setup. F3 Save This saves the displayed parameters to a file. When you press F3 Save, the default file name PRINTEROF is displayed. If you want to use a name other than PRINTEROF, use the delete key to erase it, and enter the file name you want. When the name is correct, press Go to save the file and perform the setup. TEKELEC 9·10 7'5/89 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide Figure 9.5 below lists the commands and keys available for printing with the Chameleon 32. KEY/COMMAND APPLICATION All applications RESULT Print Scrn key Prints the current screen Print Page key Prints the active page. History Ctrl P Displays print menu to print a userdefined range of events. X.25 Statistics F3 Print key Prints an X.25 statistical report SNA Statistics F3 Print key Prints an SNA statistical report BSC Statistics F2 Print key Prints a ISDN Statistics F5 Print key Prints an ISDN statistical report SS#7 Statistics F1 Print key Prints an SS#7 statistical report BASIC Simulators LFILES command Prints ·file directory LFLIST command Prints current function key assignments LLIST command Prints the program in memory LMLIST command Prints the mnemonic table in memory LPRINT command Prints text LTPRINT command Prints the contents of the trace buffer LDISPT command Prints timer values in decimal LDISPC command Prints counters in hex LDISPV command Prints variable values LDISPX command Prints numeric variables in hex LDISPM command Prints length and contents of message buffer LLiST command Prints the scenario in memory LPRINT command Prints text >.PRT Redirects output to the printer from the shell (.PRT must be in upper case letters) Aux Serial Port 2 Ubrary Redirects output to the Aux 2 serial port. (See the Chameleon 32 C Manual, Chapter 5.7 for more information. ) esc statistical report I SITREX C Development System Triggering ACTION = STATS PRINT Prints a statistics report when userdefined conditions are met. Figure 9.5,: Print Commands and Keys TEKELEC 9-11 7/5/89 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide F3 Set Date and Time The Chameleon 32 Real-time clock is backed up by battery. You should not have to reset the time after your initial setup. When you press the F3 softkey, the Set Date and Time Menu is displayed. (See Figure 9.6 below.) Set Date and Time Menu Feb 01 1989 13:30:00 Figure 9.6: Set Date and Time Menu Date To set the date, press F1 Date, enter the date in the format MM-DD-YYVY, and press Return. For example to set the date to February 1, 1989, enter: 02-01-1989 Note or 2-1-1989 The year does not automatically increment on January 1 st. You must manually update the year each January using this option. Time To set the time, press F2 Time, enter the time in the format HH:MM:SS, and press Return. Entering the seconds is optional. The time uses the 24-hour clock. For example to set the time to 1 :30 p.m., enter: 13: 30: 00 TEKELEC 9-12 or 13: 30 7/5/89 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide F4 Traffic Load/Save This option enables you to save Direct-to-Disk and acquisition buffer data to files. It also enables you to load a file which contains Direct-to-Disk or acquistion buffer data. Refer to Chapter 6: Direct-to-Disk for a complete description of the Direct-to-Disk application. When you press F4, the Traffic Operations Menu is displayed. (See Figure 9.7 below.) Traffic Operations Menu 'Save Operation +- File Name Data Source Direct-to-Disk Percentage 100 Data Size a K bytes After making selections Press GO Figure 9.7: Traffic Operations Menu Operation This parameter allows you to select the traffic operation. The options are: F1 Save This option enables you to save either Direct-to-Disk or acquisition buffer traffic. Once saved, these files can be loaded and used as the data source for Monitoring applications. You 'cannot save Direct-to-Disk data while the Directto-Disk or Direct-trom-Disk applications are running. TEKELEC 9-13 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Utilities You can save the acquisition buffer to a file while Direct-trom-Disk is running, but the applications stops temporarily, while the buffer is being saved. The applications starts again automatically when the save operation is complete. To save the acquisition buffer to a file while Directto-Disk is running, you must stop acquisition by pressing Run/Stop. When the save operation is 'complete, press Run/Stop to resume acquisition. F2 Load The F2 Load option enables you to load an existing direct-to-disk or acquisition buffer file from disk. Once loaded the traffic in the file can be used as the data source for Analysis. You must have previously used the save option to save traffic to disk before it can be loaded with this option. File Name This parameter specifies the name of the direct-to-disk or acquisition buffer file that you want to save or load. Refer to the Chapter 10: File Management for a description of valid file names. Data Source If you select Save as the Operation, this parameter specifies the type of traffic you want to save. The options are: TEKELEC F1 DrD You want to save the Direct-to-Disk data. This is traffic that is stored to the Direct-to-Disk portion of the hard disk. Refer to Chapter 6: Direct-to-Disk for more information. F2 Buffer You want to save the acquisition buffer. If not saved to a tile, this is traffic that is volatile, and will be lo.st when the Chameleon 32 is reset or applications are restarted. 9-14 7/5/89 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide Percentage If you are saving Direct-to-Disk data, this parameter enables you to specify the percentage of the Direct-to-Disk area that you want to save. The Direct-to-Oisk area of the hard disk is 10 Mbytes in size. For example, to save the most recent 50% of the Direct-to-Disk data, you would enter 50 and press Return. To save the most recently acquired traffic, you must save 100% of the Direct-to-Disk data If you are saving data to a floppy disk, the maximum you can save is 700 kbytes of data (approximately 7% of the Direct-to-Disk area). If you want to save more than this amount to floppy disks, you must use the FB Backup option in the Utility menu. Data Size If you are saving Direct-to-Disk data, this parameter displays the number of kbytes of data being saved from the Direct-to-Oisk area to the file. / Teke/ec 9-15 09/27191 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide F5 645/705 Data Conversion This utility converts data saved to disk on Hard Engineering tester models 645 and 705 to a format compatible with the Chameleon 32 and Chameleon 20 testers. The procedures given here do not deal with installation of the software, which procedure is given in the documentation accompanying your software package. The data on your 6451705 disk can be analyzed either as it is being converted, after it has been converted or, after it has been converted and saved. Limitations This conversion utility has the following limitations: • It operates only on traffic data acquired over a V-type interface. • Data conversion begins on the first complete event on the starting track and ends with the last complete event on the ending track. Therefore, if an event overlaps tracks, it could be lost in the conversion process. To prevent this from happening when converting large blocks, it is best to break such blocks down into smaller segments and start the conversion of each segment with the same track as the last one ended on. For example, if you are converting the data on tracks 3 through 48 (a total of 45 tracks), c6nvertthe block in three segments of 15 tracks each, each successive segment beginning on the last track of the preceding segment: '3 through 18; 18 through 33; 33 through 48. • To avoid overwritinQ events in cases where you are analyzing the data as it is belngc:onverted, conversion is limited to 48 tracks at a time. • If you are going to save converted data, do so before beginning any other conversion or Direct-to-Oisk operations. Converted data remains on disk until another conversion or direct-to-disk operation is performed, at which time it is overwritten. Resetting your Chameleon, or turning it off and on, will not erase or otherwise corrupt converted, on-disk data • If the file being converted is largar than the Direct-to-Disk operation can accommodate, your Chameleon will hang up. . I f the file name you enter for your converted data already exists, data conversion will proceed, but you will be given an error message when the Chameleon tries to save the data. Begin data conversion again, using a different file name. Teke/ec 9-16 09/27191 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide Data Conversion Procedure To convert the data to a Chameleon format: 1. Press F5 6451705 Data Conversion. 2. Insert the 645/705 data disk into the Chameleon floppy drive and press Return. The 6451705 Data Conversion menu appears (Figure 9.9). --Q--------------------fFlJtiUties: 64saos Data Conversion Data Type (60p/Async) :6 . :10 Starting Track Ending Track 58 MAX : 12 All data OK? y Number of events 500 I I: . ·1 Figure 9.9: 6451705 Data Conversion Menu 3. In the Data Conversion menu, enter the parameters appropriate for the data you want to convert: a. Data Type: B •. bit-<>riented protocol A =- Asynchronous c. Staljing Track: Designates the starting point of the data you are converting. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 79, but not greater than the number entered for the Ending Track. . Teke/ec 9-17 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Utilities d. Ending Track: Designates the end point of the data you are converting. Enter a number equal to or greater than that entered for the Starting Track up to the maximum number indicated to the right of ENDING TRACK. The maximum number of tracks that can be converted at anyone time is 49. All 79 tracks can be converted in two passes. e. All data OK? A No cancels the parameters entered and allows you to re-enter them correctly, or to cancel the conversion operation at this point. A Yes to this prompt confirms that all parameters entered are correct. Data conversion begins immediately upon entering this response and the number of events read and converted is displayed on the Number of Events line . . Data Anal ysis Converted data is handled as if it were received from an outside soiJrce with the Direct-to-Disk application running. As noted earlier, this provides three means of analyzing the 645/705 data: • • While conversion is in process After the data has been converted and saved to the Chameleon TekeleC/Data/02D directory • By playing the data back through analysis after saving the Direct-to-Disk captured data in a file. Each of these means is explained below. Analysis During Conversion Analysis of data during conversion is begun prior to starting the conversion operation. As this entails using the Direct-to-Disk application, it is suggested that you first read Chapter 6: Direct-to-Disk and page 9-131. Note: Tekelec Since the Data Conversion uitility is emulating Direet-to-Oisk. DO NOT select the Direct-to-Disk application for storing the converted data. 9-18 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Utilities 1. In the Traffic Operations Menu (see F4 Traffic Load/Save, page ,9-13), select Line as the Data Source. 2. Proceed with the conversion operation as explained on the preceding page. The converted data will be displayed in the analysis windows as if it were being received 'live' over an external line. Analysis After Conversion 1. In the Traffic Operations Menu (see F4 Traffic Load/Save, page 9-13), select Disk as the Data Source. 2. Proceed with the conversion operation as explained on the preceding page.· The converted data will be displayed in the analysis windows as if it had been captured by the Direct-to-Oisk function. Analysis After Saving to Direct-To-Disk 1. Do the conversion operation as explained on the preceding page. 2. Press F4 Traffic Load/Save. 3. In the Traffic Operations Menu, a. b. Tekelec For Operation, select Save. For File Name, enter the name of the file in which the data is to be saved. 4. Press GO. 5. Return to the Operation parameter and select Load. 6. At Data Source, select Disk. 7. Press GO. The saved and loaded data is now analyzed. 9-19 . 09/27191 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide F6 Check Free Disk Space This option displays the number of bytes available on the hard disk or a floppy disk. When you press F6 Check Free Disk Space, the Check Free Disk Menu is displayed as shown in Figure 9.10 below. Check Free Disk Menu Disk Drive " " " Hard-Oisk . . . . After making selections, press GO f Exit Figure 9.10: Check Free Disk Menu' Disk Drive This parameter enables you to select the disk you want to check. The options are: F1 Hard To check the free disk space on the hard disk, press F1 Hard, and then press Go. The following message is displayed: Free Disk Memory Space =xxxx K Bytes F2 FloppyTo check the free disk space on a floppy disk, press F2 Floppy, insert the floppy disk into the floppy drive, and press Go. The following message is displayed: Free Disk Memory Space =xxx K Bytes Tekelec 9-20 09/27/91 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide F7 Kerrt:1itlConnect Mode Setup Two Modes The Chameleon operates in two modes with a host computer. For both modes, Aux Serial Port 2 is used for the physical connection to the Chameleon 32. This requires the use of a special cable which can be purchased as an option from Tekelec (Part Number 932-5001-01) or can be made as shown in Appendix M. The two operating modes are: • Data Transfer Use Kermit to transmit and receive files from a host computer that is using a compatible file transfer protocol. • Connect Mode Use your Chameleon as a host terminal and employing the Connect page. Data Transfer In Data Transfer mode, Kermit automatically uses 8 data bits with no parity. Even if you use the Kermit menu to change these parameters, when Kermit is invoked, the data bits and parity setting are changed to 8 and none, respectively. The host computer Kermit program must also be configured for 8 data bits and no parity. There are additional Data Transfer parameters that you can configure using this menu. For example, you must select the type of file you are transferring. Once you have set up the Chameleon 32 using this menu, you use the File Management menu to establish a connection with the host computer and perform the file transfer. Refer to Chapter 10: File Management, for information about file transfer procedures. Connect Mode In Connect mode, the Chameleon 32 Aux Serial Port 2 is configured to the settings in the Kermit menu. The parameters must be compatible with your host for terminal emulation. Refer to Chapter 10: File Management, F9 Connect/Disconnect for information about the Connect window. Tekelec ~21 09127/91 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide Default Setup File When you access the Kermit Setup menu, it loads and displays the default setup file KERMIT.OF. The default path is: A:\TEKELEC\SETUP\UTILJTy\ You can also save and load additional Kermit setups in named files using this option. When you press F7 Kermit Connect Mode Setup, a configuration menu is displayed (Figure 9.11 below). (/ .•. tJtitities< . . --a I Kermit/Connect Mode Setup Baud Rate 9600 Number of Data Bits 8 -+- Number of Stop Bits Parity None File Type Binary Number of Retransmissions 6 Transmission Interval 3_Sec Configuration Files None After making selections Press GO 110 300 11200 I 2400 I 4800. I 9600 119200 I EXit Figure 9.11: Kermit Connect Mode Setup Menu Baud Rate This parameter allows you to specify· the baud rate (in bits per· second) that the Chameleon 32 will use to transmit or receive a file. The baud rate on the other computer must be set to the same as the Chameleon 32. The options are: F1110 F2300 F31200 F42400 Teke/ec F54800 F69600 F719200 9-22 09/27191 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide Number of Data Bits . This parameter specifies the number of data bits for each character being transmitted or received. For Connect mode, the data bits setting on the host computer must be the same as the Chameleon 32. For Data Transfer mode, the Data Bits are automatically set to 8, regardless of the value you set in this menu~ The options are: F15 F37 F26 F48 Number of Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits between characters being transmitted or received. The stop bits setting on the host computer must be the same as the Chameleon 32. The options are: F11 F21.S F32 Parity This parameter specifies the parity setting. Parity is used to detect errors during file transfer. For Connect mode, the parity setting on the host computer must be the same as the Chameleon 32. For Data Transfer mode, the Parity ·is automatically set to None, regardless of the value you set in this menu. The options are: F1 None F20dd F3 Even File Type This parameter allows you to specify the type of file being transmitted or received. For Data Transfer mode, this must be set correctly. You cannot transfer Binary and Text files together. The options are: F1 Binary F2 Text Teke/ec 9-23 09/27191 Utilities Chameleon 3.2 User's Guide Number of Retransmissions In Data Transfer mode, if an error is detected, a packet will be retransmitted. This parameter specifies the total number of times a data packet will be transmitted. If the packet has not been received correctly following the number of configured retransmissions, the file transfer is aborted. The options are: F1 F2 1 2 F3 3 F4 4 F5 5 F6 6 F7 Fa 7 a More F9 F1 F2 9 10 Transmission Interval This parameter specifies the time interval between each retransmission of a data packet. The options are: F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Fa F9 1 Sec 2Sec 3Sec 4Sec 5Sec 6 Sec 7Sec aSec More F1 F2 9 Sec 10Sec The data transfer timeout is the Number of Retransmissions multiplied by the Transmission Interval. Therefore the maximum timeout is: . . 10 (retransmissions) x.10 seconds (interval) =- 100·seconqs Taka/ec 09127191 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Utilities Configuration Files This option allows you to load or save a Kermit setup file. The default path for terminal setup files is: A:\TEKELEC\SETUP\UTlLlTY\ The options are: F1 None This indicates that you want to use the parameters as shown; you do not want to load a setup file, nor save the displayed parameters. Press Go to set up the Chameleon using the displayed parameters. F2 Load This loads an existing setup file. When you press F2 Load, the default file name KERMIT. OF is displayed. If you want to load a file other than KERMIT.OF, use the delete key to erase it and enter the file name you want. When the name is correct, press Go to load the file and perform the setup. F3 Save Teke/ee This saves the displayed parameters to a file. When you press F3 Save, the default file name KERMIT.OF is displayed. If you want to use a name other than KERMIT.OF, use the delete key to erase it and enter the file name you want. When the name is correct, press Go to save the file and perform the setup. 9-25 09/27/91 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide F8 Backup/Restore Menu This utility allows you to back up the hard disk to floppy disks and restore the hard disk from floppy disks. You can do the following: Notes • Back up/restore the entire hard disk to/from floppy disks (excluding the Direct-to-Disk and bootable system areas) • Backup/restore the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk. • Back up/restore a large file to/from a floppy disk. If the file fits on a single floppy disk (700 kbytes or less), use the Copy File option in the File Management menu. If the file is larger than 700 kbytes, you must use this Backup option to make a floppy backup copy. While a backup or restore operation is in progress, do not change the current directory using the File Management menu. When the Backup option is used, the files on the backup floppy cannot be accessed unless they are first restored to the hard disk. When you press F8 Backup/Restore Menu, the Backup Menu is displayed (Figure 9.12). -o-----------------f(;:u• ·.Ufilitles.:.ir! Backup Menu Operation Backup Source Hard_Disk After making selections Press GO I I I Exit Figure 9.12: Backup Menu Tekelec 9-26 09/27/91 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide Operation This parameter enables you to select . a~: th~ operation. The options F1 Backup This option makes a backup copy of the item selected in the Source parameter. The backup procedure formats the floppy as it copies; therefore, any data that is on the floppy disk will be erased during the backup. F2 Restore This option restores files to the hard disk that have been backed up to a floppy disk. Refer to the additional notes below about restoring Direct-to-Disk data. Source This parameter specifies what portion of the hard disk you want to back up or restore. The options are: F1 Harddsk Backs up/restores the entire hard disk, except the Direct-to-Disk and bootable system areas. When you restore the hard disk, all files on the hard disk are erased (excluding the Direct-to-Disk and bootable system areas). F2DTD Backs up/restores the Direct-To-Disk area of the hard disk. When you restore the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk, the current data in the Direct-to-Disk area is erased. See the additional notes provided below. F3 File Backs up/restores a single file. When you select this option, you are prompted for a file name. If you are backing up a file, enter the path and name of the file you want to copy from the hard disk. If you are restoring a file, enter the path and name of the file you are restoring. If you do not enter the destination path when restoring a file, the file is restored to the root directory of the hard disk. When the path and file name are entered, press Go to begin the procedure. You are then prompted for the first disk to back up or restore. Insert the disk and press Return to continue the selected procedure. Tekelec 9-27 . 09/27/91 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide Restoring Directta-Disk Data Beginning with System Software Release 4.10, the Chameleon 32 may have the standard 2Q-.Mbyte hard disk drive or an optional 4O-Mbyte hard disk drive. The 2O-Mbyte hard disk stores up to 10 Mbytes of Direct-ta-Disk data, while the 4O-Mbyte option stores up to 3O-Mbytes of Direct-ta-Disk data. The following guidelines apply to backing up and restoring files between 4O-Mbyte and 2Q-Mbyte hard disk drives. If data was backed up from a 2O-Mbyte hard disk drive, it can be restored to either a 2O-Mbyte or 4O-Mbyte hard disk drive. If data was backed up from a 4O-Mbyte hard disk, it can be restored to either a 2O-Mbyte or 4O-Mbyte hard disk drive on a Chameleon with System Software Release 4. 10 or later. It cannot be restored to a Chameleon with System Software prior to Release 4.10. A Direct-to-Disk file larger than 10 Mbytes cannot be fully restored to a 2Q-Mbyte hard disk having only 10 Mbytes available for direct-to-disk storage. When restoring a file larger than 10 Mbytes to a 2O-Mbyte drive, use the following procedure: 1. Start the Restore procedure, inserting each backup disk in sequence as prompted on the screen. 2~· When the Direct-to-Oisk area of the hard disk is full, the restore procedure pauses and a message is displayed which provides you with several options. 3. Once the Restore procedure pauses, you can press one of keys described below, or you can replay and analyze the data that has been restored up to that point, and then press one of the keys. C If you press C, the restore procedure will continue and the data that has just been restored to disk will be overwritten as additional data is restored. T If you press T, you will temporarily exit the Restore menu and return to the Utilities menu. When you select FB Backup/Restore, you are returned to the Restore menu to continue the back up that you temporarily interrupted. F10 If you press F10, you will exit the Restore menu and return to the Utilities menu. If you select FB Backup/Restore, you start a new restore; you cannot continue the previous restore . • Note Teke/eo . The direct-from-disk data from two or more 1O-megabyte restores is not treated contiguously. This means, for example, that you cannot run Statistics and accumulate statistical data for more than 1O-megabytes of direct-irom-disk dcda at a time. 9-28 09/27191 Utilities Chameleon 32 User's Guide F9 FMS File Conversion FMS File Conversion converts Chameleon 32 files from Release 2.6.1 and earlier software (FMS operating system) to a format compatible with Release 3.0 and later. This enables you to convert your old user files to the new format, so that you can use them with the new Chameleon 32 operating system. FMS File conversion copies files from a floppy in the old format to the appropriate directory of the hard disk of a Chameleon 32 running the new operating system. After converting your files, you can copy them to an Ms-DOS formatted diskette using the File Management menu. Note You cannot convert files while Monitoring applications are running on the Chameleon 32. To convert files to the new format: 1. Insert the diskette containing the files you want to convert (Release 2.6.1 or earlier) into the floppy drive. 2. Access the Utilities page and press F9 FMS File Conversion. This displays a file directory of the floppy disk and displays the following softkeyoptions: F1 Dlr This option lists the files on the floppy disk. It enables you to select the files you want to convert. F2 Convert This option converts selected files to the new format. F3 Full Cv 3. Note Teke/ec This option automatically converts all files on the floppy disk (up to 80 files maximum) to the new format. If you want to convert all files to the new format, press F3 Full Cv. As each file is converted, the file name and file type are displayed at the top of the screen. Once F3 Full Cv process is started, you cannot abort the operation unless you reset the Chameleon 32. . This operation converts a maximum of 80 files from the floppy disk. If you attempt to convert more than 80 files, you will get the error message Too Many.Files. . 9-29 09/27191 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Utilities 4. To convert selected files, use the List Selector to select one or more files. (To use the List Selector, use the arrow keys to move the red arrow cursor to the desired file and press the space barto highlight the name in red. Select as many files as desired. If a file is selected in error, press the space bar again to remove the red highlight.) Once all desired files are selected, press F2 Convert. As each file is converted, the file name and file type are displayed at the top of the screen. 5. Teke/ec If you want to copy files from another diskette, insert the diskette in the floppy drive and press F1 Dirto display the file directory of the floppy. Then use F2 Convertor F3 Full Cvas described above. 9-30 09/27/91 CHAPTER TEN: FILE MANAG.EMENT Introduction This section describes the features and usage of the Chameleon File Management menu. The File Management menu options are: F1 Chdir (Page 10-8) Changes the current disk directory. F2 Copy (Page 10-10) Copies selected files to the hard disk or a floppy disk. F3 Delete (Page 10-12) Deletes files from the the hard dIsk or a floppy disk. F4 Rename (Page 10-13) Renames the selected files. F5 Format (Page 10-14) Formats floppy diskette. F6 Disk Copy (Page 10-15) Copies the entire contents of a floppy disk to another floppy disk. F7 Transmit File (Page 10-16) Transmits files to a host computer. Fa Receive File (Page 10-19) Receives files from a host computer. F9 Connect (Page 10-21) Establish a communications connection between the Chameleon and a host computer for file transfer or host terminal emulation. TEKELEC 7'5/89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide . File Management File and Directory Structure Files Chameleon files are compatible with MS-DOS 2.x and 3.x format. File names must adhere to these conventions: • • • • • File names are 1 - 8 characters in length Optional 1 - 3 character file extension Optional drive specification of A: (hard disk drive) or 8: (floppy disk drive) File name and file extension separated by a period (.) Acceptable file name and path characters are: A-Z a-z 0-9 \ Hard Disk Directories The Chameleon hard disk has a number of directories that contain the system files it needs for each application. When you create user files (programs, history files, traffic files, etc.) these are also stored in specific directories so that they can be located as needed by an application. Chameleon file extensions are listed in Figure 10.2 on page 10-4 and 10-5. The Chameleon hard' disk has the directory structure shown in F!gure 10.1. The root directory can contain a maximum of 140 files. The other directories can contain a maximum of 600 files. These are the only directories necessary for operating the Chameleon in Monitoring and Simulation mode; therefore, you do not have the ability to create or delete directories from the . hard disk. If the optional C Development System package is installed on your Chameleon 32, you will also have these directories: \BIN, \INCLUDE, \UB, and \USA. You also have the ability to create Refer to the additional directories using the C shell. Chameleon 32 C Manual, for a description of these directories. Floppv Disk Directories If you save traffic or copy files to a floppy disk, the file is always copied into the root directory of the floppy disk (unless When you copy an entire directory to a floppy disk). accessing a floppy disk for an application, the Chameleon searches only the root directory. Therefore all user files should be in the root directory of a floppy disk. A maximum of 112 files are permitted in the root directory of a floppy disk. TEKELEC 10-2 T5/89 File Management Chameleorr32 User's Guide I ROOT DIRECTORY (\) J I TEKELEC I I I ANALYSIS I SIMUL I (Simulation System Files) DATA I I I MAN SYSTEM UTIL I (User Program S~stem iles System Files I Direct-to-Disk Files I HIST History Files Files) I MENU UTILITY TRIGGER Menu Config Files Utilit Config ~iles Tri~Rering les BISYNC - ASYNC I-- BISYNC H APPL (Non protocol-specific Analysis Flies) I-- ISDN r-- ASYNC I-- DMI f-- BISYNC I-- SNA r-- SS7 '-- X25 - t-- '-- SHDLC SNA - Protocol-specific Analysis Flies (Files used based on the protocol selection in the main configuration menu.) SLAPD - t-- - I-- V120 '-- DDCMP SSDLC SIMplL SDLC Files I-- SIMP/L V120 Files X75 SITREX SIT REX Files I-- X25 FLAPD FRAMEM LAPO Files SIMP/L LAPD Files S57 FBOP FRAMEM HOLC'SOLC Files SIMP/L HDLC Files ISDN QllC r-- ASYNC Async Files FRAMEM DMI Files DPNSS PSH - SSC Files FDMI t-- .DPNSS I SIMULATE Help Flies D2D I I SETUP FKEY Function Key Files Figure 10.1: Chameleon 32 Hard Disk Directory Structure TEKELEC 10-3 7/5 /89 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide File Extensions Figure 10.2 (below and continued on page 10-5) lists the file name extensions used by the Chameleon. These file extensions are automatically assigned to files and should not be changed. These files must reside in the directories shown in order for the application to be able to locate the file. Some files are not assigned extensions automatically. In these cases, you can specify an extension when you enter the file name, if desired. These files include History print files, traffic files, and C files. If you specify a file name extension for these files, you must include the extension as part of the file name when you access the file. File extension Hard Disk Directory File Type C LIBRARY \LIB FRAMEM SOLC/HOLC SETUP MENU \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FBOP SYSTEM FILE \TEKELEC\ANALYSIS .BA SITREX PROGRAM \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SITREX .CB FRAMEM SOLC/HOLC PROGRAM \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FBOP .CF FRAMEM SOLC/HOLC DATA \TEKELEC\SIMULAT8FBOP. .CG FRAMEM SOLC/HOLC MNEMONIC TABLE \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FBOP .CO SYSTEM FILE \TEKELEC\SYSTEM .OB SIMP/L SOLC PROGRAM \TEKELEC\sIMULA TE\SSOLC .OE SIMP/L SOLC SETUP MENU \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SSOLC .OF SIMP/L SOLC DATA \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SSOLC .OG SIMP/L SOLC MNEMONIC TABLE \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\SSOLC .EB SIMP/L HOLC PROGRAM \TEKELEC\SIMULA TEISHOLC .EE SIMP/L HOLC SETUP MENU \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SHDLC .EF SIMP/L HOLC DATA \T6KELEC\SIMULA TE\SHDLC .EG SIMP/L HOLC MNEMONIC TABLE \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\SHOLC .FE SITREX SETUP MENU \TEKELEC\sIMULATE\SITREX .GB SIMP/L V.120 PROGRAM \TEKELEC\SIMULATEW120 .A .AE .AOU· Figure 10.2: Chameleon File Name Extensions TEKELEC 10-4 7/5'89 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide File Extension Hard Disk Directory File Type C HEADER FILE \INCLUDE .HB BISYNC SIMULATION PROGRAM BSC EXERCISER FILE \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\BISYNC .HF BISYNC BASIC OATA FILE \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\BISYNC .HE BISYNC BASIC SETUP MENU \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\BISYNC .HG BISYNC BASIC MNEMONIC TABLE \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\BISYNC .IB ASYNC BASIC PROGRAM \TEKELECISIMULA TE\ASYNC .IE ASYNC BASIC SETUP MENU \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\ASYNC .IF ASYNC BASIC DATA \TEKELECISIMULA TE\ASYNC .IG ASYNC BASIC MNEMONIC TABLE \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\ASYNC .JB FRAMEM DMI PROGRAM \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FDMI .JF FRAMEM DMI DATA \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FDMI .JG FRAMEM DMI MNEMONIC TABLE \TEKELECISIMULA TE\FDMI .KE SIMULATION FUNCTION KEY FILE \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\FKEYS .LB FRAMEM LAPD PROGRAM \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FLAPD .LE FRAMEM LAPD SETUP MENU \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FLAPD .LF FRAMEM LAPD DATA \TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FLAPD .LG FRAMEM LAPD MNEMONIC TABLE \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\FLAPD ON-LINE HELP \TEKELEC\MAN .MB SIMP/L LAPD PROGRAM SIMP/L MULTi-LINK LAPD PROGRAM \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE ,SLAPD .ME SIMP/L LAPD SETUP MENU ITEKELECISIMULATE\sLAPD .MF SIMP/L LAPD DATA \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SLAPD .MG SIMP/L LAPD MNEMONIC TABLE \TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SLAPD .SU SYSTEM FILES \TEKELEC\sETUP\MENU .SYS SYSTEM FILES \TEKELEC\UTIL .TR TRIGGER FILE \TEKELEC\sETUP\TRIGGER .H .MAN Figure 10.2 (continued): Chameleon File Name Extensions TEKELEC 10-5 75;89 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide C Applications C application programs compiled on the Chameleon 32 can be started from the Applications Selection menu, if the executable C file conforms to the following: • • The file has the extension .exe. The file is copied to one of the directories below (xxxx is one of the subdirectories shown in Figure1 0.1): a:\tekelec\analysis\xxxx a:tekelec\simul The directory determines when the application will be displayed in the Applications Selection menu. For example, if the application resides in a:\tekelec\analysis\appl, the application is displayed in the Monitoring window for a/l protocols. If the application resides in a:\tekelec\analysis\X2S, the application is displayed in the Monitoring window only when X.2S is the selected protocol. If the application resides in a:tekelec\simul, the application appears in the Simulation window for all protocols. Menu Access File Management is available at any time during operation of the Chameleon by pressing the Files key, which is located on the left side of the keyboard. This causes the File Management banner to appear at the bottom of the screen. You can then select the page (Figure 10.3) and use its function keys, as described on the following pages. Current Directory: A:\ ... BIN INCLUDE LIB LOGIN TUELEC USR (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) Figure 10.3: File Management Menu (with optional C package installed) TEKELEC 10-6 7'5/89 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide List Selector For many of the File Man?gement options, you can select several files or sub-directories for a single operation. (However, for F1Chdir, Dir., and F4Rename you can select only one directory or file at a time.) For example, you can select three files, and then copy all three by pressing F2 Copy one time. This feature is referred to as the List Selector. - The List Selector is available for the following operations: • • • • • Chdir Copy Delete Rename TX File To use the List Selector: NOTE: 1. Use the arrow keys to move the red arrow cursor to the first file or directory you want to select. 2. Press the space bar to highlight your selection. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select other directories/files. To de-select a directory or file, move the red arrow cursor to the file or directory you want to de-select. Press the space bar. The red highlight disappears. 4. Press the F-key corresponding to the operation you wish to execute. For example, press F2 Copy to copy the selected file(s). This feature can also be used to change directories. NOTE: 1. Select the desired directory and press the space bar to highlight it. You can only select one directory at a time. (Directories are identified by a following the directory label.) 2. Press F1 Chdir. If you highlight .. and press F1 Chdir, it changes to the parent of the current directory. View File(s) Once you have opened a directory via F1 Chdi', you can view any ASCII file using CTRL V. This applies to ASCII files only, not to directories or binary files. For details, see page 10-9. Teke/ec 10-7 09/27/91 Fite Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide F1 Chdir Change Directory F1 changes the current directory listed at the top of the screen. File names and sub-directories are displayed in the current directory. A <0> following the file· name identifies a sub-directory. For example, if TEKELEC is the current directory, the screen displays: Current directory: A:\TEKELEc\ cO> cO> ANALYSIS cO> DATA SIMULATE cO> SYSTEM MAN cO> SETUP cO> TMP cO> UTIL cO> cD> Only the files and sub-directories in the current (TEKELEC) directory are listed. Before using the List Selector (copy, delete, transmit, etc.), use the i and .I. keys and the space bar to select the directory containing the files you want to work with, then press F1 Chdir to open that directory. . 11 the current directory contains more than 60 files, Page x is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. To display the next directory page, press Shift i. To display the previous directory page, press Shift .I.. . When using F1 Chdir you can specify the directory you want by entering the name manually, or by using the List Selector. To enter the name manually: 1. Press F1 Chdir. The following message is displayed: Please enter path name: 2. Enter the path to the directory that you want to open, and press Return. For example, to select the ANALYSIS sub-directory on drive A, enter: A:\TEKELEC\ANALYSIS You only have to specify the drive name (A: or B:) if you want to change disk drives. To change to the root directory, use the back slash (\). For example: Please enter path name: A:\ To change to the parent directory of the current directory, use two dots ( .•). For example, Please enter path name:.. Tekelec 10-8 09/27191 File Management Chameleon ;32 User's Guide Ctrl D Re-Display The directory listing shown on the. previous page illustrates the default display format. By pressing Ctr:1 D, you can re-display all files in alphabetical order along with the time, date, and size of each file. For example, the file display shown on the previous page would be re-displayed as follows: Current directory: A:\TEKELEc\ ANALYSIS DATA MAN SETUP SIMULATE SYSTEM TMP UTIL <0> .<0> <0> <0> <0> <0> <0> <0> <0> <0> 01-19-1989 01-19-1989 07-22-1989 07-22-1989 07-22-1989 06-15-1989 04-12-1990 08-22-1989 11-17-1988 12-12-1988 00:02:36 00:02:36 10:16:00 10:16:00 10:16:00 13:43:55 09:12:23 10:15:15 15:22:07 09:33:44 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Only 15 files are displayed at one time. The size of listed directories is always shown as 0 bytes. Use Shift i or Shift J. to move to the previous or next page, respectively. To return to the default directory format, press Clrl D again. View File(s) Once you have opened a directory via F1 Chdir, you can view one or more ASCII file (and only ASCII files) using CTRL V. To view an ASCII file: 1. .2. Open the directory containing the desired file . Select the file(s) to be viewed. (If more than one file is to be selected, see· List Selector, page 10-7.) 3. Press CTRL-V. The text of the file(s) is displayed. Keys F1 through F5 take on the following functions: F1 MORE Scrolls down 1 page of current file. F2 NEXT Returns to files list or to start of next file F3 PREV Jumps to start of previous file; or current one if only one file open .. F4 RESTART Jumps F5 QUIT Teke/eo to start of current file. Quits to directory. 10-9 09/27/91 . File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide F2 Copy Copy Files The Copy option copies one or more selected files from the current directory to a specified target location. To copy files, perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. .':. , If necessary, use F1 Chdir to change to the directory that contains the files you want to copy. Use the List Selector to select one or more files or directories to copy..(To use the List Selector, use the arrows keys to move the red arrow cursor to the desired file and then press the space barto highlight the file in red. Press the space bar again to unselect the file.) After· all files have been selected, press F2 Copy. The following message appears on the screen: .Copy to: If you are copying files, enter the directory or filename to copy the fife to. For example, to copy the selected files to the TEKELEC directory on the A: drive, enter: ': Copy to: \TEKELEC\ or Copy to: \TEKELEC To copy a selected file to the current directory using a new filename (for example, TESTS.TXT) enter: Copy to: TESTS.TXT If you copy multiple files, you can copy them to a directory in a single operation. If you do this AND specify a new filename, the following occurs: • The first file is copied using the new filename. • The Chameleon attempts to copy the second file to the same filename, recognizes that the file already exists, and displays the message: overwrite file (y\n) ? If you press y, the first copy is overwritten by the second file copy. If you press n, the copy operation for the second file is aborted. If additional files were selected to copy, the overwrite file message is displayed for each existing file. Take/ec 10-10 09/27/91 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide To copy one directory into another directory, use the following syntax for the Copy to path: Copy to: B:\dira where: dira is the name of the directory you are copying to. The directory you are copying becomes a subdirectory of the directory it is being copied to. To copy all the files from a given directory (but not the directory itself) to another directory, use the List Selector to select the files and the syntax: Copy to: B:\dira To copy a file from one floppy disk to another floppy disk, use the syntax: Copy to: z:\filename The destination z:\ copies the file to a virtual drive, which can then be copied onto a different diskette. When you enter z:\ as the destination drive, this message appears: Direct-to-disk data will be overwritten. Do you still want to continue? (yIn) The Chameleon copies the source files to the Direct-toDisk area of the hard disk before it copies them to the target disk. If you have direct-to-disk data that you need to keep, press n to abort the copy procedure, use the Utilities menu to save the direct-to-disk data to a file, and then perform the file copy operation. If you do not have direct-to-disk data, press y to continue. The message Reading floppy disk... appears. When the file has been read into the virtual drive, you are prompted to insert the target disk with the message: Please insert floppy disk, and enter RETURN key Insert the disk that you want the file to be copied on, and press Return. Note You can use ·z: (virtual drive) to copy from the B (floppy) drive only. 10. . TEKELEC When the last copy operation is completed or aborted, the current directory is displayed with the new file entries . 10-11 7'5/89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide File Management . F3 Delete Delete File The Delete option deletes one or more files from the current directory. To delete files, perform the following steps: 1. If necessary, use F1 Chdir to change to the directory that contains the files you want to delete. 2. Use the List Selector to select one or more files or subdirectories to delete. (To use the List Selector, use the arrows keys to move the red arrow cursor to the desired file and then press the space bar to highlight the file in red. Press the space bar a second time to unselect the file.) 3. After all files have been selected, press F3 Delete. 4. For each file, the following question is asked: Erase mea? (yIn) To delete the file., press y. To abort the deletion of that file, press n. 5. TEKELEC When all selected files have been deleted, the current directory is displayed. File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide F4 Rename. Rename File The Rename option renames files in the current directory. You cannot rename sub-directories (entries followed by <0». Note Do not include a path as part of the new file name. If you wish to rename a file and move it to another directory, first rename the file, and then use the F2 Copy option. To rename a file, perform the following steps: 1. If. necessary, use F1 Chdir to change to the directory that contains the file you want to rename. 2. Use the List Selector to select one file name from the current directory . (To use the List Selector, use the arrows keys to move the red arrow cursor to the desired file and then press the space bar to highlight the file in red. Press the space bar a second time to unselect the file.) 3. Press F4 Rename. The following message appears: Rename to: 4.' Enter the new filename for the selected file. For example, to rename the selected file to CODE 1.TXT, enter: Rename to: caDEt. TXT You can rename only one file at a time. If you select more than one filename and press F4 Rename, the following error message appears: Too many selections You cannot move a file from one directory to another by specifying a path as part of the new file name. TEKELEC 10-13 7/5i89 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide F5 Format Format Floppy Disk F5 Format formats the diskette in the floppy drive in MS-DOS format. It Is not possible to format the hard disk drive using this option. Warning! Formatting erases all data on the floppy diskette. 00 not format a diskette that contains files you want to keep. To format a disk, perform the following steps: 1. Insert the diskette you want to format into the Chameleon floppy disk drive. 3. Press F5 Format. the screen: The following message appears on 00 you really want to format this disk (yin)? 4. To abort the format procedure, press n. To begin the format procedure, press y. message appears: The following Formatting floppy disk to MS-DOS format ... Formatting drive light formatting directory is TEKELEC will take several minutes. The floppy disk is 'lit during the format procedure. The procedure is complete when the current displayed on the Chameleon screen. 10-14 715189 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide F6 Dsk Copy Disk Copy This option copies the entire conten~s of a floppy disk onto a second floppy disk, enabling you to make one or more backup copies of the entire floppy disk. (To copy a single file from floppy to floppy, use the z: option for F2 Copy.) F6 DskCopy does not format the diskette as it makes the copy. Therefore, you first need to format enough diskettes for the number of copies you want to make. To use the F6 DskCopy option, follow these steps: 1. Press F6 Dsk Copy. This message appears: Please insert the source disk and type < cr > 2. Insert the disk that you want to copy (source disk) into the floppy drive and press Return. 3. The following message appears: WARNING This copy will erase the direct to disk data. Continue? (yin) The Chameleon copies the source disk files to the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk before it copies it to the target disk. If you have direct-to-disk data that you need to keep, press n to abort the copy procedure, use Utilities menu F8 Backup to save the Direct-to-Disk data to a file, and then perform the F6 DskCopy procedure .. Otherwise, press y to continue with the copy operation and'the message Reading floppy disk ... appears. 4. When the floppy has been read, this message appears: Please insert the destination disk and type < cr > 5. Insert a blank formatted disk in the floppy drive and press Return. The following message appears: Writing floppy disk 6. When the copy is complete, this message appears: Do you want to copy this disk again? (yin) To make additional copies of the same diskette, press y. When you have made sufficient copies of the disk, press n and the Disk Utilities menu is displayed. TEKELEC 10-15 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide F7 TX File Transmit File The Transmit File option transmits text or binary files from the Chameleon to a host computer. The host computer must have a file transfer protocol that is compatible with the Kermit protocol. File transfer operations can be initiated by either the Chameleon or the host computer. When entering host commands, you can enter the commands on a host terminal OR you can use the Chameleon Connect wIndow to emulate a host terminal. To use the Chameleon Connect window for host terminal emulation refer to F9 Connect on page 10-21. To use the Chameleon file transfer option, follow this procedure: 1. Verify that the host has a file transfer utility that is compatible with the KERMIT protocol. 2. Connect the host to the Chameleon Aux Serial Port 2 using an RS232 cable. This capability requires the use, of a special cable which can be purchased as an option from Tekelec (Part Number 932-5001-01) or c'an be made as shown in Appendix M. The Chameleon will act as the DCE. 3. Note Use the KermiVConnect Mode Setup menu in the Utilities page to configure the Chameleon for file transfer. Make sure that you select the type of file you are going 'to transfer: Text or Binary. Kermit automatically sets the Data Bits to 8 and Parity to None regardless of how these two parameters are configured in the Kermit'Connect Mode Setup menu. 4. Call up the host Kermit program. For example, to call up KERMIT, enter: KERMIT and the host will respond: KERMIT) . This prompt indicates that the file transfer program has been loaded on the host and will execute KERMIT commands. 5. TEKELEC On the Chameleon make the File Management page active. 10-16 9:5:90 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide 6. If necessary, use F1 Chdir to select the drive and directory that contains the files you want to transmit to the host. 7. Use the List Selector to select one or more files to transmit. (To use the List Selector, use the arrows keys to move the red arrow cursor to the desired file and then press the space bar to highlight the file in red. Press the space bar a second time to unselect the file.) Note You cannot transmit binary and text files at the same time. 8. Enter the following command on the host computer: receive 9. In the Chameleon File Management menu, press F7 TX File. This begins the transmission. 10. As the file is transferred. information is displayed so that you can monitor the progress of the transmission (Figure 10.4). +------'"'!------------------4.• .••.•.• f.il •••• Me~IJt..··.· •. . Current directory : KERMIT: File transfer utility A:\tekelec Transfer operat10n File operation Sending filex Reading: filex Number of bytes: xxx xx xx xx Ina packets Open File packets End of File packets Data packets Break packets Retransmissions lOl type ESC key to abort Figure 10.4: File Transfer Utility (Transmit) Screen TEKELEC 10·17 File Management Chameleon 32 User's GUide 11. When the transfer is complete the screen displays the message Recept ion OK. To abort the operation in the middle of the transfer. press Esc. The message Send fa i 1ed is displayed. If an error was detected during the file transfer, the following message appears Se n d fa i 1e d. If the transfer fails, you can retransmit the file( s) by pressing F1 Retry. 12. TEKELEC When the file transfer has been completed successfully, . press F10 Exit to return to the File Management menu. 10-18 9/5/90 File Management Chameleon 32 Use,s Guide Fa RX File Receive File The Receive File option enables the Chameleon to receive text or binary ·files from a host computer. The host computer must have a file transfer protocol that is compatible with the Kermit protocol. File transfer operations can be initiated by either the ChameleEln or the host computer. When entering host commands, you can enter the commands on a host terminal OR you can use the Chameleon Connect window to emulate a host terminal. To use the Chameleon Connect window for host terminal emulation refer to F9 Connect on page 10-21. To use the Chameleon Receive File option, follow this procedure: 1. Verify that the host has a file transfer utility that is compatible with the KERMIT protocol. 2. Connect the host to the Chameleon Aux Serial Port 2 using an RS232 cable. This requires the use of a special cable which can be purchased as an option from T ekelec (Part' Number 932-5001-01) or can be made as shown in Appendix M. The Chameleon will act as the DCE. 3. Note Use the Kermit/Connect Mode Setup menu in the Utilities page to configure the Chameleon for file transfer. Make sure that you select the type of file you are going to transfer: Text or Binary. Kermit automatically sets the Data Bits to 8 and Parity to None regardless of how you configure these two parameters in the Kermit/Connect Mode Setup menu. 4. Call up the host Kermit program. For example, to call up KERMIT, enter: KERMIT and the host will respond: KERMIT) This prompt indicates that the file transfer program has been loaded on the host and will execute KERMIT commands. 5. Enter the host command that transmits the files. example: send filename. ext TEKELEC 10-19 For 9590 File Management Chameleon 32 User's Guide You can use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard to select more than one file to transmit. For example, to transmit all files from the host with the extension .doc, enter: send •• doc Note You cannot transmit binary and text files at the same time. 6. Make the File Management page active. 7. Press F8 RX File. 8. As the file is transferred, information is displayed so that you can monitor the transmission (Figure 10.5). -t----------------------t::::::::::f~'lit:~i.:,::,.· Current directory : KERMIT: File transfer utility A:\tekelec Transfer operation File operation Receiving filex Writing file: x Number of bytes: xxxx xx xx Init packets Open File packets End of File packets Data packets Break packets Retransmissions Xli 1I11 type ESC key to abort. Figure 10.5: File Transfer Utility (Receive) Screen 9. When the transfer is complete the screen displays the message Recept i on OK. To abort the operation in the middle of the transfer, press Esc. The message Se n d fa i 1ed is displayed. If an error was detected during the file transfer, the following message appears Send fa i 1ed. If the transfer fails, you can retransmit the file( s) by pressingF1 Retry. 10. TEKELEC When the file transfer has been completed successfully, press F10 Exit to return to the File Management menu. 10-20 95:90 Chameleon 32 User's Guide File Management F9 Connect The F9 Connect option enables you to use the Chameleon for terminal emulation. This gives you the ability to control the host from a remote location. For example, you can use the Chameleon from a remote location to transfer files between a host computer and the Chameleon 32. Using the Connect window, you can also control a Chameleon 32 using a remote Chameleon 32 or 20. Refer to Appendix M for a description of this procedure. To use the Chameleon for terminal emulation, perform these steps: 1. Connect the host to the Chameleon Aux Serial Port 2 using an RS232 cable.· This requires the use of a special cable which can be purchased as an option from Tekelec (Part Number 932-5001-01) or can be made as shown in Appendix M. The Chameleon will act as the DCE. 2. Use tlie Kermit Connect Mode Setup in the Utilities menu to configure the Chameleon to be compatible with the host. See Chapter 9: Utilities for more information. 3. On the Chameleon 32, make the File Management page active. 4. Press F9 Connect. This causes the Chameleon screen to go blank and behave as a host terminal. You can now enter host commands. To transfer files between the Chameleon and the host, refer to pages 1016 to 10-20, 5. TEKELEC To exit the Connect window, press Shift Cancel. This maintains the connection with the host, but enables you to operate the Chameleon independently of the host. 10-21 CHAPTER ELEVEN: BERT Introduction The Chameleon BERT application provides synchronous or asynchronous Bit Error-Rate Testing (BERT) for a variety of data communications systems. With the Chameleon configured as either a DTE or a DCE, the BERT application transmits a data stream consisting of a known pattern. One of two operations is then performed on this data stream: • It is looped back at the device under test and analyzed by the Chameleon; or, • It is monitored by the data tester, which then performs the same analysis. To accomplish these test scenarios, the Chameleon can: Note: Testing Configuration Note: TekeJec • Simulate synchronous data rates from 50 Hz to 64 kHz where the data is selectable from several transmission patterns with an option for error insertion • Simulate standard asynchronous data rates from 50 Hz to 19.2 kHz where the data is selectable from several transmission patterns with optional error insertion . • Perform single interval or continuous testing BERT testing is not available for a Basic Rate Interface D-Channel. This is in keeping with the protocol specification as defined in CCITr Recommendation 1.430. Figu~e 11.1 shows the location of the Chameleon within the network when the Chameleon is simulating and monitoring data. The remote device on the line must be set up to loop the incoming informati.on back to the Chameleon. This provides the known pattern required to completely analyze the incoming Signal. For a V-type interface, the BERT application presumes that the DCE provides the clock and the DTE transmits on the received clock. 11-1 09/27191 BERT. Chameleon 32 User's Guide . ',', Remote DTE Device Chameleon emulating aDCE . Remote DCE Device Chameleon emulating aDTE Agure 11.1: Hardware Configurations If the Chameleon is not simulating the data stream, but simply monitoring the output of the device,. you must transmit a known pattern from the remote device and configure the Chameleon to . receive that pattern. Two Chameleons can also be used to test a network. In this configuration (see Figure 11.2), the two Chameleons are set up with the same pattern.. The first transmits the information through the network. It can then be analyzed by the second machine positioned at the other end of the connection. . DCE 1----4 1----+ DCE Figure 11.2: Network Test Configuration The Signal used for BERT is accessed through the 1/0 modules in the rear panel of the Chameleon. If your Chameleon has more than one type of 1/0 module, the physical interface is selectable through software. Tekelec 11-2 09/27191 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide Using the BERT Application The following summary procedure assumes that your Chameleon is powered up and booted. To use the BERT application: 1. At the main configuration menu select. F2 Simu/at as the Mode of Operation for the port you want to use. 2. Press the appropriate F-key to select the Physical Interface for the port you are using. Note: If your protocol is ISDN. use F7to set the physical setup now. 3. Press F6 Setup to display the Simulation menu. 4. With the arrow cursor positioned on the Protocol parameter, press F9 More to display the additional protocol options. 5. Press F6 BERTto select the BERT option. 6. Press Go to load your selection( s) and return you to the main configuration menu. 7. Press Goto load the main configuration setup and display the Applications Selection menu. 8. Press F1 LoadA or F2 LoadBto load the BERT application on the appropriate port(s}. 9. Press Go to start the application and display the BERT page banner at the bottom of the screen. 10. Press Shift Hide Page to display the full BERT Setup menu applicable to your chosen protocol (Figures 11.3 through 11.6). 11. Complete the BERT Setup menu as required by your testing application. Description of the Setup menu begins on page 11-9. 12. After completing the Setup menu, press Go. One of the following screens is displayed: • • If you selected USER for the Pattern parameter in the Setup menu, the Pattern Editor screen will appear. The use of the Pattern Editor is described on page 11-13. If you selected something other than USER for the Pattern parameter (you will use a standard data pattern). the first of the BERT run-time displays appear. The BERT run-time displays are described beginning .. on page 11-15. (Procedure continues on next page). Tekelec 11-3 09/27191 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide 13. The BERT run-time pages display bit and block error statistics and. enable you to start and stop testing intervals. When your entire testing session is complete, press F10 Exit to stop the· BERT application and return to the Applications Selection menu. '.1 ,I, Tekelec 11-4 09127191 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide Setup Menus There are four BERT setup menus. The first - displayed by pressing F1 SYNC - is used for defining BERT parameters for synchronous transmissions. The second - displayed by pressing F2 ASYNC - is used for defining the BERT parameters for asynchronous transmissions. The third and fourth are displayed when their respective ISDN-type interface is selected for Physical Interface. These menus enable you·to: • Configure the Chameleon as a DCE or DTE device • Set the Baud rate (all except ISDN) • Specify the data pattern which will be used for the test • Define a user preamble. • Define the data block length • Select the type and duration of BERT test The setup menus for synchronous and ISDN transmission (Figures 11.3, 11.5 and 11.6) allow you to define an error insertion rate, but do not allow you to define: • Data bits • Stop bits • Parity bits The asynchronous setup menu (Figure 11.4) allows you to define data, stop and parity bits, but does not allow you to define an error insertion rede. Two ISDN setup menus (Figures 11.5 and 6) allow you to define Transmit and Receive Channels, and Transmit and Receive lime Slots, respectively. . Figure 11.7.is a summary chart of the parameters available for each of the protocol types. Each parameter is described beginning on page 11-9. To change a parameter: Teke/ec 1. Move the cursor to the desired parameter. The options are displayed in the F-key strip at the bottom of the screen. 2. Press the F-key corresponding to the desired parameter. In the ASYNC mode, the Data, StQP and Parity bit settings for the Chameleon must be the same as those for the device-under-test. 3. Press Go to display the first BERT run-time page. For a description of the three available pages, see page 11-15. 11-5 09/27191 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide BERT Setup Press GO to accept -+ Interface Framing SYNC DCE/DTE Baud Rate 64000 Pattern 63 Error Insertion Rate NONE User Defined Preamble User Preamble (2 Hex Bytes) Block length Mode Duration of Test YES/NO This line is displayed only 0000 .....- - - - - when YES is selected for 01024 User Defined Preamble REMOTElOOPBACK 00:00:00 .I Figure 11.3: BERT SYNC Setup Menu BERT Setup Press GO to accept ASVNC DTE/DCE "'Framing Interface Data Bits Stop' Bits Parity Baud Rate NONE Pattern 63 User Defined Preamble User Preamble (2 Hex Bytes) Block length Mode Duration of Test NONES This line is displayed only 0000 when YES is selected for 01024 User Defined Preamble REMOTE lOOPBACK 00:00:00 .4----- I I: Figure 11.4: The BERT ASYNC Setup Menu Tekelec 11-6 09/27191 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide BERT Setup Press GO to accept ISDN Interlace. Present -+ TX Channel 1-24 TX Time Slot 1-15, 17-31. RX Channel 1-24 RX TIme Slot 1-15, 17-31 01 01 01 01 Pattern 63 Error Insertion Rate NONE User Defined Preamble User Preamble (2 Hex Bytes) Block Length Mode Duration of Test YES This line is displayed only 0000 .....- - - - - when YES is selected for 01024 User Defined Preamble REMOTE LOOPBACK The two Channel lines are for ANSI only. The two Time Slot lines (in boldface type) are tor CEPT only. 00:00:00 I Figure 11.5: The BERT Setup Menu for ISDN PRI. BERT Setup Press GO to accept ISDN Interface Present -+ Pattern f 63 Error Insertion Rate NONE User Defined Preamble NO Block Length Mode . Duration of Test 01024 REMOTE LOOPBACK ·. .• f ( 00:00:00 ( l I I. I I • Figure 11.6: The BERT Setup Menu for ISDN 2B1 Q and BRI. 11_7 nq/27/q1 Chameleon 32 User's Guide BERT BERT Setup Parameters Framing Interface Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Baud Rate TXChannel TXlimeSlot RX Channel RXlimeSlot Pattern Error Insertion Rate User-Defined Preamble User Preamble Block Lenath Mode Duration of Test . Sync Async X X X X X X X ~ X ANSI PRI CEPT PRI BRI/2B1 Q X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Figure 11.7: The BERT Setup Parameters for Available Interfaces• • Teke/ec 11-8 09/27/91 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide Setup Parameter Descriptions Framing The Framing parameter selects Synchronous or Asynchronous timing. If you select asynchronous framing, you must also specify the Data Bits, Stop Bits and Parity, and Baud Rate. . Interface The Interface parameter specifies whether the Chameleon will simulate a DCE or a DTE device. However, see the second NOTE on page 11-1 regarding V-type interfaces. Data Bits In Asynchronous Framing only, the Data Bits parameter specifies the number of data bits in each byte as 8, 7, 6, or 5. The setting for this parameter must be the same as that for the remote device. Stop Bits In Asynchronous Framing only, the Stop Bits parameter specifies the number of stop bits being used in each byte of data as 1, 1.5, or 2. The setting for this parameter must be the same as that for the remote device. . Parity In Asynchronous Framing only, the Parity parameter specifies the parity setting being used as None, Odd, or Even. The setting forthis parameter must be the same as that for the remote device. Baud Rate The Baud Rate parameter specifies the speed (in bits per second) that the Chameleon will use to transmit or receive data. This parameter is displayed only when the Chameleon is configured for asynchronous framing, or as a DCE using synchronous framing. If the Chameleon is configured as a DTE using synchronous framing, the Chameleon will match the received clock. lx/RX Channels The Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) Channels parameters (Figure 11.5) allow yo.u to specify which ANSI Primary Rate Interface channel the bit stream is to be transmitted and received over. When working with two Chameleons, or with a port-to-port network in which one end transmits and the other receives the same bit stream, the Tx channel must be the same one as the Rx channel. lx/RX Time Slots The Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) Time Slots parameters (Figure 11.5) allow you to specify which CEPT Primary Rate Interface time slots the bit stream is to be transmitted and received over. When working with two Chameleons, or with a port-to-port network in which one end transmits and the other receives the same bit stream, the Tx time slot must be the same one as the Rx time slot. Pattern The Pattern parameter specifies the type of data that the Chameleon will transmi~ or expect to receive on the line. The following patterns are available: • Tekelec You can select a bit pattern of 63, 511, 2047, 4095, or 32767 bits in length. The algorithm for each pattern is shown in . Figure 11 .8. 11-9 09/27/91 Chameleon 32 User's Guide BERT • Press F6 01010101 to select the pattern 1010101. • Press F7 FOX to select the standard FOX message: THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 1234567890 c R • Press F8 USERto define your own pattern of 3 - 200 bytes in length. See page 11-13 for the procedure for specifying your own pattern. 511 I I r~ 1 12 1314151 2047 §~ 1 121314151617181~ 110Illif 617 I 8191-r 4095 Figure 11.8: BERT Data Pattern Algorithms Error Insertion Rate In Synchronous Framing only (see Figure 11.3), this parameter sets the rate at which errors are automatically inserted into the bit stream. When you set the F4 key, you activate the F8 key of the Run-Time Menu for turning error insertion on and off. See page 11-17 for details. Keys F2through F7setthe following rates: Taka/ec F1 None There will be no automatic insertion of errors. F21.04E-2 Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit stream at the rate of 1040 in every 1oo,qoo bits. 11-10 09/27/91 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide User-Defined Preamble F31.02E-3 Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit stream at the rate of 102 in every 100,000 bits. This rate is just above the threshold defining severely errored seconds from errored seconds. F41.00E-3 Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit stream at the rate of 100 in every 100,000 bits. This is the threshold rate defining errored seconds from severely errored seconds. F59.54E-4 Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit stream at the the rate of 95.4 in every 100,000 bits. This rate is just below the threshold defining errored seconds from severely errored seconds. F61.00E-4 Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit stream at the the rate of 10 in every 100,000 bits. F71.00E-5 Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit stream at the the rate of 1 in every 100,000 bits. This parameter enables you to enter a 2-byte preamble which may be required by the remote device in order to synchronize the line. When you select YES, the User Preamble parameter appears, as described below. User Preamble This parameter appears only when you select Yes for the User-Defined Preamble. Enter the required 2 hex bytes and press Return. Block Length The Block Length parameter enables you to select the block length required for your testing application. The block length varies by standard and may correspond to the pattern length or to a fixed number of bytes, such as 1000 or 10000. To specify a block length, enter the number of bits in decimal and press Return. The range is o-64k bits. . Mode The Mode parameter determines the function of the Chameleon during a test session. There are three options: F1REMOTE Teke/ec is the normal mode of operation, in which the Chameleon generates and transmits a BERT pattern and expects the remote device to either physically/logically return that pattern, or generate its own pattern. Either method of pattern loopback is acceptable and will be checked for validity. 11-11 09/27/91 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide Signal transmitted by the Chameleon to the remote device REMOTE DEVICE C -... Sbtal is looped back to the ameleon and analyzed for &\TOrs " ~ Ifml~ .J I " .. I ==all •..... ~ :~:;:-: I- ernl Figure 11.9.= Signal Path In Remote (Transmit) Mode. is a logical loopback mode in which the Chameleon waits for synchronization on an incoming BERT pattern. It then transmits that pattern back to the remote device. The Chameleon does a full validity check on the received pattern. (Figure 11.10). F2LOCAL ,-R_D~ ~_?_CTE_E- -, ~::: ~ and loops it back to the remote device I~.I=J===!I .,,781 I_ CJ wi Figure 11.10: Signal Path in Local (Transmit) Mode. F3RECEIVE is the mode in which the Chameleon waits for synchronization on an incoming BERT pattern and checks it for validity. The Chameleon does not transmit a BERT pattern in this mode. (Figure 11.11). REMOTE DEVICE ' - -_ _---' remote device to the Chameleon Signal transmitted by the '1IIImli;~; III The Chameleon analyzes the received signal for &\TOrs but does not loop signal back to the remote Clevice. Figure 11.11: Signal Path In (Local) Receive. Duration of Test Tekelec This parameter determines how long the test will run when in continuous mode (see F2 Contins on page 11-16). It does not specify the time at which to start or stop a test, but only indicates test duration. Enter the test duration in the format hh:mm:ss. A value of 00:00:00 causes the testto run until manually stopped (see F3 Stop on page 11-16). The maximum duration for a test is 97 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds (97:59:59). 11-12 09/27/91 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide BERT Pattern Editor The BERT Pattern Editor (Figure 11.12) enables you to define a data pattern for the Chameleon to transmit. To use the editor: 1. Access the BERT Pattern Editor.. a. . In the- BERT Setup menu, select USER for the Pattern parameter. b. When the BERT Setup menu is complete, press Go. This displays the Pattern Editor. If the Pattern parameter is other than USER, the BERT run-time display appears. Note: BERT Press GO To Accept Pattem Editor Current Entry Mode is: HEX Pattem Length is : 00 1 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 Change message length by moving cursor to' the last character desired (maximum message length is 2QO bytes; minimum message length IS 3 bytes). I: HEX lAsclI t SAvel lOAD. I I·.· I· . . . . .-., -, l Figure 11.12: BERT Pattern Editor. 2. Select an Entry Mode. The data pattern will be shown in hex pattern on tne left and in ASCII on the right of the editor screen. You can enter data in either hex or ASCII, by pressing either F1 HEX or F2 ASCII. The current entry mode (hex or ASCII) is displayed above the Tekelec 11-13 09/27/91 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide data and is also indicated by the blinking cursor in the data entry area. Note: In step 3, if you are using asynchronous framing with 5 or fewer data bits, see the note following step 6. 3. Enter the pattern. The pattern must be 3 - 200 bytes in length. The data is displayed in 10 lines of 20 bytes each. If you enter more than 200 bytes, the cursor will loop back to the top of the data and begin overwriting the first part of the pattern. The current pattern length is displayed above the data entry area. Patterns of 5 or Fewer Data Bits 4. When your pattern is complete, position the cursor on the last byte of the data pattern. The cursor position determines the last byte of data in the pattern, regardless of the data that is displayed in the editor screen. This gives you the option of varying the pattern length while having entered only one pattern. If you do not move the cursor back one space after completing the pattern, an extra 00 byte is added to the end of the transmitted pa~ern. 5. - If you want to save the pattern to a file for future use, press F3 Save. You will be prompted for a file name. Enter a name of up to 8 characters and press Return. (The file extension .pat will automatically be added to the file as it is saved to disk.) Files which are saved can later be retrieved from the Pattern Editor using the F4 Load key. 6. Press Go. This displays the first BERT run-time display as described on page 1.1-18. If you are using asynchronous framing with five or fewer data bits, set the-Setup menu Data Bits parameter to 5 and define the pattern using the BERT pattern Editor. Your pattern must conform to· the following binary format: Bit # 5 data bits 4 data bits 3 data bits 2 data bits 1 data bit 76543210 OOOddddd 1000dddd 11000ddd 111000dd 1111000d where d represents the data bit(s) being transmitted, followed by three Os, with the remainder of the byte filled with 1s. Tekelec 11-14 09/27191 BERT Chameleon 32 User's Guide BERT Run-time Pages There are three BERT run-time pages for displaying the results of the Chameleon's analysis of data received on the line. These pages are illustrated in Figure 11.13 through Figure 11.15. Each of these pages share certain features. Also, the function keys for the two BERT run-time pages are identical. These shared features are described below. The features peculiar to each page are described in detail following the illustration of the page. Common Displays The top three lines of all BERT run-time pages display the same kinds of non-statistical information. Elapsed Seconds Displays the number of seconds which have elapsed since the test was started. This timer is restarted when F1 1block, F2 Contins, or F6 Reset is pressed. This timer is stopped when the F3 Stop key is pressed. Time Displays the system time as derived from the Chameleon clock in the format hh:mm:ss. Mode Displays the current testing Mode as configured in the Setup menu. The field will display one of the following: Remote UB (loop back), Local UB, or Receive Only. Pattern Displays the current Pattern as configured in the Setup menu. If a user- :I Keyboard (8031 CPU) 805-0384 P5 I/O IT I ) rL, PRIOption ANSI or CEPT ~ i 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I Serial 110 2Mbyte RAM Battery Backed RTC i •.? 4 3 I I 805-0266 : }... 2 )(Z80H @8MHz or 2 )(Z80 @16MHz 128 Kbytes RAM 2 xZ80H @8MHz or 2 )(Z80 @16MHz 128 Kbytes RAM /j j Ij~11 I I :: I I I I I I 805-0268 I :: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L.J I I I I .'..... I: 1 805-0203 I CEPT 805-0267 .;:.;; 0 Option I -----C;bi;----j' Parallel iSBX Bus I : Dual Port Option ANSI 805-0204 I> I 68010@ 10 MHz 1 MRAM (144k Capture Buffer inC I.) ! Top P5 CPU #2 : ---805B~T~//6 805-0234 I; .-----.01/ .... 805-0385 P5 CPU # 1 I .. 9H r--- I I External RGB Video ......1 - - - -....1" ... High Res. Color Monitor : Piggyback Au)(SenaI2+ 80186@6MHz 512k RAM 805-0260 BRI #2 IIF L__ ., 111...----'- ------------ ----~~;-~;;~-- -'----- - SCSI AuxSenal1+ . Gl W 805-0009 V-series IIF #2 Remote ......1--_ _ _......1 : · : 1 - - - - - - - - - - 4 Control> Piggyback Parallel '.:,., Printer ......1 - - - - -...... ,"'." . o. ((PT 805·0274 .. 120 Ohm 805-0215·-75 Ohm L-----.. 805-0170 P3 805-0088 P4 ANS180S-0235 I !--------I I +-___________-1 P1 ,. All SenalliO 805-0130 Front Panel LEOs 805-0260 BRI #1 IIF SCSI Disk Control P2 ,. BasIc Language Simulator Engine 5 6 I I I I I 7 805-0117 8 Slot "Multibus I" Motherboard 80ttom Notes: Different Board Configurations for BRI, PRI, and Dual Port A-3 TEKELEC Copyr'ghtC 1988 Tekelec. All fights reserved APPENDIX 8: ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE V.24 AND V.3S INTERFACES V.24 Interface This section describes the V.24 interface Chameleon 32. for the The electrical characteristics of V.24 series plugs on the Chameleon conform to the CCITT V.28 Recommendation. The V.24 series plugs have the following specifications: electrical Line Receiver: • • • Impedance: 6 < Z < 8 (Kohms) Max. Input Voltage: ± 25 V Decision Threshold: ±3V Line Transmitter: • • Impedance: < 100 ohms Output Voltage: ± 12 V The connectors of the V.24 series· are 25 pin socket connectors of the standard ISO DB 25. TEKELEC 8·' 81789 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Appendix B: V.24 and V.35 Interfaces V.24/RS232 Specifications RS232C is a United States standard that corresponds to the CCID's V.24 International standard. RS232 specifications are applicable to asynchronous and synchronous binary data transmission using either private lines or swithched network systems at speeds up to 20K bps. The physical connection of interchange circuits within a data terminal and a data set is made by a pair of pluggable connectors (the interface point). The terminal side consists of 25 pins and the data set side consists of 25 holes arranged in two columns. Cable The data terminal equipment must be provided with an extension cable no longer than fifty feet. Longer cables are permitted only if the load capacitance at the interface point Restricting cable does not exceed 2500 picofarads. connections to fifty feet between the computer communications adaptor and the local data set and between the remote data set and the associated· terminal guards against excessive sign.al distortion. The tables on the following pages show the RS232 celD equivalent pin numbers and their functions. The pins described are only those handled by the TEKELEC RS232 interface module. Pin 12 is included in this group, although it . is not visible on the front panel LED display. TEKELEC 8/17'89 Appendix 8: V.24 and V.35 Interlaces Chameleon 32 User's Guide V.24 PIN ASSIGNMENTS Monitoring Mode 0825 Pin No. CCITT Circuit No. EIA Ground Incoming 1 101 AA X X X Frame Ground 2 103 BA X Transmitted Data ·3 104 BB 105 CA 5 106 CB 6 107 CC 7 102 AB 8 109 CF x x x x x x Received Data 4 x x x x x x x x Outgoing Processed by Chameleon RS232 Name Request to Send Clear to Send Data set Ready Signal Ground Data Carrier Detect 9 + de Test Voltage 10 -de Test Voltage 11 Unassigned x x 12 122 SCF 13 121 SCB 2nd Clear to Send 14 118 SBA 2nd Transmitted Data 15 114 DB 16 119 SBB 17 11.5 DO x x 2nd Data Carrier Detec Transmitted Clock 2nd Received Data x x 18 Receiver Clock Receiver Dibit Clock 19 120 SCA 20 108.2 CD 21 110 CG 22 125 CE 2nd Request to Send x x Signal Quality Detect x x 23 24 Ring Indicator Data Rate Select 113 DA x x 25 T£K£L£C Data Terminal Ready Ext. Transmitter Clock Busy 8·3 81789 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Appendix B: V.24 and V.35 Interfaces V.24 PIN ASSIGNMENTS Simulation Mode DB25 Pin No. CCITI Circuit No. EIA Ground 1 101 AA X 2 103 SA 3 104 SS 4 105 CA 5 106 CS 6 107 CC 7 102 ·AS 8 109 CF .-"~ To 'DCE From DCE X x x x x x x Processed by Chameleon RS232 Name X Frame Ground x Transmitted Data x x Received Data x Clear to Send x Data set Ready x Signal Ground x Data Carrier Detect Request to Send 9 + de Test Voltage 10 -de Test Voltage 11 Unassigned 12 122 SCF 13 121 SCB 14 118 SBA 15 114 DB 16 119 SSS 17 115 DO x x x 2nd Data Carrier Detect 2nd Clear to Send x 2nd Transmitted Data x x x x Transmitted Clock 2nd Received Data x 18 Receiver Clock Receiver Dibit Clock 19 120 SCA 20 108.2 CD 21 110 CG 22 125 CE x x 2nd Request to Send x x x Signal Quality Detect x 23 24 Ring Indicator Data Rate Select 113 DA x x 25 TEKELEC Data Terminal Ready Ext. Transmitter Clock Busy B-4 Appendix 8: V.24 and V.35 Interfaces Chameleon 32 User's Guide V.35 Interface This section describes the Chameleon 32. V.35 interchangeable interface module, which includes: • • One male connector (reference AMP 201 357-1) One female connector (reference AMP 200 838-2) • Standard SAE 632 mounting hardware single lead jackscrew. The male connector's male jackpost is near pin MM. The female connector's female jackscrew is near pin MM. The diameter of the pins is 0.060" for units to be used in the U.S., Japan, Australia and England. For France, Switzerland and Sweden, the diameter is 0.040". The pins can be removed or reassigned easily using an AM P tool (reference AMP 305 183). Electrical Characteristics The unbalanced signals have electrical characteristics which conform to the CCITT's V.28· EIA RS232. Driver Output voltage: Output impedance: Output slew rate: Receiver Input resistance: Input voltage max: hysteresis: +:- 10 volts 300 ohms 30 volts/microseconds approximately 5 Kohms + /- 25 volts 3 to 4 volts The balanced signals have electrical characteristics which conform to the CCITT's X.27.:EIA RS422. Driver Output resistance: Lead to ground: Output current: Output voltage: Receiver Input resistance: Lead to ground: Input sensitivity: TEKELEC 8-5 100 ohms differential 175 ohms 150 mA maximum + /- 3 volts 100 ohms differential 175 ohms + /- 200 mvolts 8:17 89 Appendix 8: V.24 and V.35 Interfaces Chameleon 32 User's Guide V.35 PIN ASSIGNMENTS Pin No. CCITT Circuit No. Ground A - X FG 8 102 X P 103 S 103 R 104 T 104 C 105 D 106 E, From DCE To DCE Bal. Unbal Frame Ground - SG Signal Ground - - x TD (A) Transmit Data x x TD (8) Transmit Data x x RD (A) Receive Data x .x RD (8) Receive Data x Name RS232 Name RTS Request to Send x x CTS Clear to Send x 107 x DSR Data Set Ready x F 109 x DCD Data Carrier Detect x H 108 DTR Data Terminal Ready x J 125 x RI Ring Indicator )( y 114 x SCT (A) Transmitter Signal Timing x AA or a 114 x SCT (8) Transmitter Signal Timing x V 115 x SCR (A) Receiver Signal Timing x X 115 x SCR (8) Receiver Signal Timing x U 113 x SCTE (A) Transmitter Signal Timing x W 113 x SCTE (8) Transmitter Signal Timing x TEKELEC x x 8-6 , 8:17 89 APPENDIX C: PINOUTS Parallel Printer· Connector Pinout The Chameleon 32 parallel printer connector is a 25 pin D-sub socket (female) connector (DB25S). The pinout is shown as viewed from the rear of the machine: All signals are standard TTL levels. Description Pin Number /STROBE (Active Low) Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 / ACK (Active Low) Busy No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground No Connection Ground 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 This connector is pinout and signal compatible with the IBM PC. It is also signal compatible with Centronics compatible parallel interface printers. TEKELEC C-1 8.'17'89 Appendix C: Pinouts Chameleon 32 User's Guide Serial Printer Connector Pinout The Chameleon 32 serial printer connector is a 25 pin 0subminature socket (female) (0825S). The pinout is shown as the connector is viewed from the rear of the machine: All signals are standard RS-232 voltage levels. The connector is physically and electrically a OCE type connector. OB25 Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 17 20 24 TEKELEC EIA Designation AA BA , BB CA CB CC AB CF DB DD CD DA CCITI Circuit Signal Name 101 103 104 105 106 107 102 109 114 115 108 Chassis Ground TXD, Transmit Data RXD, Receive Data RTS, Request to Send CTS, . Clear to Send DSR, Data Set Ready GND, Signal Ground DCD, Carrier Detect TXC, Transmit Clock RXC, Receive Clock DTR, Data Term. Rdy. CK, External Clock C-2 Source Chassis Printer Chameleon Printer Chameleon Chameleon Signal Gnd. Chameleon Chameleon Chameleon Printer Printer 8/17'89 Appendix C:. Pinouts Chameleon 32 User's Guide Remote Terminal Connector Pinout The Chameleon 32 remote terminal connector is a 25 pin 0subminature socket (female) (D825S). The pinout is shown as the connector is viewed from the rear of the machine: All signals are standard RS-232 voltage levels. The connector is physically and electrically a DCE type connector. 0825 Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 17 20 24 TEKELEC EIA Designation AA 8A BB CA CB CC AB CF DB DO CD DA CCITT Circuit Signal Name 101 103 104 105 106 107 102 109 114 115 108 Chassis Ground TXD, Transmit Data RXD, Receive Data RTS, Request to Send CTS, Clear to Send DSR, Data Set Ready GND, Signal Ground DCD, Carrier Detect TXC, Transmit Clock RXC, Receive Clock DTR, Data Term. Rdy. CK, External Clock C-3 Source Chassis Terminal Chameleon Terminal Chameleon Chameleon Signal Gnd. Chameleon Chameleon Chameleon Terminal Terminal 81789 Appendix C: Pinouts Chameleon 32 User's Guide Auxiliary 1 and Auxiliary 2 Connector Pinouts The Chameleon 32 Aux. 1 and Aux. 2 connectors are 25 pin D-subminature sockets (female) (DB25S). The pinout for both is shown as the connector is viewed from the rear of the machine: All signals are standard RS-232 voltage levels. The connector is physically and electrically a DCE type connector. DB25 Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 17 20 22 24 TEKELEC EIA Designation AA BA BB CA CB CC AB DB DO CD CE DA CCITT . Circuit Signal Name 101 .103 104 105 106 107 102 114 115 108 125 Source N/C Chassis Ground TXD, Transmit Data Terminal RXD, Aeceive Data Chameleon Request to Send . Terminal RTS. Chameleon CTS, Clear to Send Chameleon DSR, Data Set Ready GND, Signal Ground Signal Gnd. TXC, Transmit Clock Chameleon RXC, Receive Clock Chameleon DTR, Data Term. Rdy. Terminal AI, Ring Indicator Terminal Terminal CK, External Clock C·4 8/1T89 Appendix C: Pinouts Chameleon 32 User's Guide Video Connector Pinout The Chameleon 32 video connector is a 9 pin O-sub socket (female) connector (OB9S). The pinout is as shown below: All signals are standard TTL levels. Description Pin Number Ground Ground Red Green Blue Intensity Monochrome Horizontal Sync. Vertical Sync. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 This connector is pinout and signal compatible with the IBM PC. The video signal requires a monitor capable of displaying 640 pixels by 240 lines (this is higher resolution than the standard PC CGA standard). High resolution or "Multisync" type monitors are recommended for use with the Chameleon 32. T£K£L£C C-5 Si17'S9 APPENDIX D: SCSI SIGNAL INTERFACE SCSI Interface Signals The Chameleon 32 SCSI interface signals are as shown below. All signals are low true. All odd pins are ground. GND 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21· 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 . GND 41 43 45 47 49 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 DATA BIT 0 (DBO) DATA BIT 1 (DB1) DATA BIT 2 (DB2) DATA BIT 3 (OB3) DATA BIT 4 (OB4) DATA BIT 5 (DB5) DATA BIT 6 (OB6) DATA BIT 7 (OB7) DATA PARITY (DBP) OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN BUSY (BSY) ACKNOWLEDGE (ACK) RESET (RST) MESSAGE (MSG) SELECT (SEL) CONTROUOATA (C/O) REQUEST (REQ) INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) The SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) Bus was designed to tie peripherals and one or more hosts together on small computer systems. SCSI has been standardized by ANSI, with a protocol that enables a driver to be used with slight modification on a wide variety of hosts. SCSI uses a 50 pin ribbon cable, with 8 leads used for data and one for parity. TEKELEC 0-1 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Appendix 0: SCSI Interface Nine Jines are used for control signals (select, busy, request, acknowledge, control/data, inpuVoutput, message, ·reset and attention). All control and data lines are biased at a positive voltage by terminating resistors and are considered to be asserted when pulled low to ground. The sequence for the host to, for example, read a logical sector on a disk is divided into several phases. The selection phase requires the host to assert one of the data lines to identify which controller (target) is desired and then assert the select line. The target addressed then asserts the busy line to indicate it has recognized its selection. In the command phase, the target un asserts the inpuVoutput line to indicate a block of six or ten bytes of command information should be outputted by the host to the target. The target asserts the request line for the first byte until the host asserts the acknowledge line to indicate the byte is on the data lines. When the target has read the byte, the request is unasserted. The host then unasserts the acknowledge line and the handshake sequence continues until all bytes of the command. are transferred to the target. . In the data phase, once the controller has read the sector(s) on the disk into a' buffer, it will un assert the control/data line and assert the inpuVoutput line to indicate that the host can no'w input the data. Th is is don e with th e request/acknowledge handshake as before. When all data is transferred, the status phase is entered and the controller asserts the control/data line to indicate the status byte may be input by the host. The status byte will indicate if all is well. The message phase is indicated by the message line being asserted by the target. TEKELEC 0·2 8/1789 APPENDIX E: CHAMELEON 32 LED OVERLAYS Standard LED Display Overlay On the standard CCITT V-Series Interface LED Display Overlay, there are five groups of LED displays: Note • Analysis Indicates when the Chameleon 32 is in Analysis Mode. • Simulation Indicates when the Chameleon 32 is in DTE or DCE Simulation Mode. • Data Indicates transmission or reception of Data. • Clocks Indicates transmission or reception of clocks. • Controls Indicates the state of the Interface Control Signals. The first two groups indicate whether you are running Analysis or Simulation (DCE or DTE). The LED display is shown in Figure E.1 on the following page. TEKELEC E·l 8/17'89 Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays Chameleon 32 User's Guide Analysis EEJ Simulatjon DeE DTE IEiI EE3 Data M S (:::::::;;1 r::::1 3 BB/RO 104 RO M S 1::1 1=:1 2 BA/SO 103 TO Clocks M S I:::::::::::::! b::::::::::! 15 OB/ST 114 TC 1::::::::::::::1 I::~::::::::::I 17 OO/RT 115 RC M S r:::::::::;:! ,,:::::::::::1 24 OAITT 113 TC Controls M S I:}:'I 5 CBICS 106 CTS M S 1:>::::::::1 (::::1 1':::1 ii:::::! E:::::! 1'::0·1 1:':::::::1 E::::::::::::::! 1::::::::::::::\ 6 Cc/OM 107 OSR 8 CF/RR 109 OCD [:::::::::1 [:::::<1 22 CElIC 4 CAlRS 10S RTS 20 CDITR 108.2 OTR 125 RI Figure E.1: The Standard LED Display Overlay The remaining groups have two columns of LED displays, indicating Mark or Space. There are also four columns in each row. These columns are from left to right: • • • • TEKELEC DB 25 pin number EtA circuit descriptionN.35 circuit description CCID circuit number EIA signal name E·2 81T89 Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays Chameleon 32 User's Guide ANSI Primary Rate Interface LED Overlay The ANSI Primary Rate LED Overlay is shown in Figure E.2 below. (See the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume 1/, Chapter 11: ISDN Primary Rate Interface, for more information. ) YELALARM DS1 Interface E3 NOSYNCL1 NO SYNCL2 EZI IEEI eso Channel X 0 _1 mm eso Channel Y Configuration 1 0 EEl EEl Configuration MON ONLY MON EZEl SIM CEl Signaling Simulation 1 0 1::,,::·::::;·1 I:::::::.:>:! Channel Y Figure E.2: The ANSI Primary Rate Interface LED Display The Level 1 information for both signals includes: • NO SYNC L 112 No Frame Synchronization The LED for the corresponding line is lit when an out-offrame condition exists on that line.· TEKELEC E-3 8.17'89 Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays Chameleon 32 User's Guide • YEL ALARM Yellow Alarm This LED is lit when remote end problems exist, indicating one of the following conditions has been met: • ~ In ESF framing (Extended Superframe, with or without signaling), the Receiver has detected 16 Yellow Alarm patterns of 0000000011111111 or 1111111100000000 on the 4K bps Data Link . .~ In SF framing (Superframe, with or without signaling). a Yellow Alarm is detected when BIT 2 equals 0 for 255 consecutive channels. A switch on the Multibus Board allows selection of an alternate Yellow Alarm which activates when the S-bit of Frame 12 is high. DSO Channel XJY The two LEOs for Channels X and Y show what constitutes the DSO data of the corresponding channel. If the data is all ones, only the LED labeled 1 is lit. The same is true for a/l zero data. If the data is ones and zeros, then both the LED labeled 0 and 1 are flashing. ~ Configuration The MON LED, when lit, indicates that the DSO Channel Y is in Monitoring Mode. (DSO Channel X is always in Monitoring Mode.) The SIM LED indictates that the Channel Y is in Simulation Mode. • Signaling Simulation The two LEOs show the current state of the "A" signaling bit for Channel Y when the channel is in Simulation Mode. (Channel X is always in Monitor Mode.) TEKELEC E·4 8.17·89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays CEPT Primary Rate Interface LED Overlay The CEPT Primary Rate Interface LED Overlay for the Chameleon 32 Front Panel LED display is shown in Figure E.3 below. (See the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume 1/, Chapter 11: ISDN Primary Rate Interface, for more information. ) REMOTE ALARM CEPT 2048 KBPS Interface IETII] NO SYNC L1 NOSYNCL2 tZiliill ~ Time Slot Y Time Slot X 1 1 0 mEl] WillE] 0 BEIJ fIE3] Configuration Configuration MON MaN ONLY SIM fillE8l [llij£] Signalling Simulation (a bit) 1 0 1. :::<1 1:.:1 Time Slot Y Figure E.3: CEPT Primary Rate Interface LED Display Level 1 information on the LED display for both signals includes: • REMOTE ALARM This LED is lit when remote end problems exist. TEKELEC E-5 8.1T89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide • Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays' NO SYNC L 1/2 No Frame Synchronization The LED for the corresponding line is lit when an out-offrame condition exists on that line. • Time Slot XIV The two LEOs for Time Slots X and Y show what constitutes the data of the corresponding Time Slot. If the data is all ones, only the LED labeled 1 is lit. The same is true for all zero data. If the data is ones and zeros, then both the LED labeled 0 and 1 are flashing. ~ Configuration The MON LED, when lit, indicates that Time Slot Y is in Monitoring Mode. (Time Slot X is always in Monitoring Mode.) The SIM LED indictates that the Time Slot Y is in . Simulation Mode. • Signalling Simulation (a bit) .. The two LEOs show the current state of the "A" signaling bit for Time Slot Y, when the Time Slot is in Simulation Mode. (Time Slot X is always in Monitor Mode.) TEKELEC E-6 8/17:89 Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays Chameleon 32 User's Guide Basic Rate Interface LED Overlay The Basic Rate Interface LED overlay is shown in Figure E.4 below. (See the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume II, Chapter 12: ISDN Basic Rate Interface, for more information. ) ISDN BASIC RATE INTERFACE Monitor I3I] Simulate TE NT GEl o Data o 1 EEl EEl RO o 1 E3 EEJ TO External Data o o 1 k:,\,'J [:><,:,1 B t,:,:,'::::::1 c:::J 0 1 c::J c:::J c::.:J B []I] 0 TO RO Figure E.4: Basic Rate Interface LED The Level 1 information on the LED display includes: • TEKELEC Monitor and Simulate LEOs E·7 These LEOs indicate the operating state of the Chameleon 32. It can be NT Simulation, TE Simulation, or Monitor (AnalysiS). 8/17'89 Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays Chameleon 32 User's Guide • ROITD Data LEOs Note: • TEKELEC These LEOs show the state of the signals (Receive and Transmit) on the B or 0 Channel running the Chameleon 32 protocol software. If the data is all 1s, then only the LED labeled 1 is lit. (The same is true for all zero data.) If the data is 1s and Os, then both the LEOs labeled o and 1 are flashing. In the current release of the Basic Rate Interface, the RDITD Data LEOs show the data on the SIT Interface. RDITD External Data LEOs E·8 These LEOs show the state of the signals on the External Band 0 connectors on the Chameleon 32 Interface Module. 8/17/89 Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays Chameleon 32 User's Guide X.21 Interface LED Overlay The X.21 Interface LED overlay is shown in Figure E.5 below. See the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Chapter 18: X.21 Interface, for information about the operation of the X.21 Interface module. X.21 INTERFACE Analysis iZJ Simulation OTE DeE o E2] Data Transfer o S 1:::::;';:::'4 1 1:::;:;·;:;:::1 Receive OFF k::::;::;:! ON (::;::;::1 6/13 o 1;::,::·,:·:1 1 1:;:::;:;:":'1 Transmit Signal eJementtiming X.21 Lead Status 1/0FF OION R 1/0FF OION EEl E2II 4111 Receive T c::J 0 219 Transmit EEl GEl 5/12 Indicate e c:::J 0 3/10 Control 7/14 Byte Timing ON B IEEJ Figure E.5: X.21 Interfac.e LEO Overlay TEKELEC E·9 5/1,'90 Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays Chameleon 32 User's Guide The Level 1 Information displayed for the X.21 interface includes the. following: TEKELEC • Analysis/Simulation Indicates the current use of the Interface, either Analysis, DCE Simulation or DTE Simulation. • Data Transfer Displays the Data- being received or transmitted by the Chameleon. • Signal element timing Indicates the state of the Signal element timing circuit. • X.21 Lead Status Displays the status of the four leads, Receive, Indicate, Transmit and Control. • Byte Timing Indicates whether Byte timing is active. E·10 Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays Chameleon 32 User's Guide U-Interface Overlay Figure E.G illustrates the U-Interface overlay. When you' are using the U-interface software (281 Simulation and/or Monitoring), you must apply this overlay to the Chameleon LED panel. Explanations of each of the LEOs follow the figure. a ISDN BASIC RATE U-INTERFACE 2B1 Q c::J Network Monitor SIMULATE Terminal L::l IIiIJ a _ 1 (,::':::1 DATA Receive Transmit ALARMS .-, Network Terminal R1 No ActJAIP (Blink). mill . No Frame Sync Figure E.6: The Chameleon 32 281 Q U-Interface LED Overlay. • Monitor This green LED lights to indicate that you are running the 2810 Monitoring application. • Simulate These green LEOs lights to indicate that you are running the 2810 Simulation application. When Simulating an LT, the Network LEO is on; when simulating an NT, the Termina/LED is on. . Teke/ee E-11 09/27191 Appendix E: ~hame/eon 32 LED Overlays Chameleon 32 User's Guide • Data These LEOs show the bit-values of received and transmitted data. They light to signify one of the three following conditions: • Red only: The Receive and Transmit bit streams are binary Os (zeros) only. • Green only: The Receive and Transmit bit streams are binary 1s (ones) only. • Red and Green: The Receive and Transmit bit streams are binary Os and 1s. • Alarms The four red ALARMS LEOs signal three conditions on either the Network side or Terminal side of your configuration: • No Act/AlP (blink) These LEOs light to indicate two dfiferent states: • 1) That there is no activation (No Act) of the link; or, 2) That link activation is in progress (AlP) and that no other action should be taken u"ntil the link is fully up and the LED stops blinking. No Frame Sync The No Frame Synchronization LEOs light to signal that frame synchronization ·of Receive and Transmit data is not occurring between the LT and the NT. Loss of synchronization may result from clocking irregularities, or from corrupted structures of the Synchronization Word and - at the superframe level - Inverted For further details on Synchronization Word. synchronization, see ANSI Spec. T1.601-1988. Teke/ec E-12 09/27/91 APPENDIX F: DECIMAL-HEXADECIMAL CONVERSION CHART Conversion Chart Use the conversion chart below to convert from hexadecimal to decimal and vice versa. 163 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Example 160 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 HEX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Look up E in the first column (16 0) Look up 3 in the second column (16 1 ) Sum equals decimal value 14 48 62 To convert 1A72 hexadecimal to decimal: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) TEKELEC 0 256 512 768 1024 1280 1536 1792 2048 2304 2560 2816 3072 3328 3584 -3840 To convert 3E hexadecimal to decimal: 1) 2) 3) Example 161 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 162 Look up 2 in the first column (16 0) Look up 7 in the second column (16 1 ) Look up A in the third column (162 ) Look up 1 in the fourth column (163 ) Sum equals decimal value F·1 2 112 2560 4096 6770 8/17'89 Appendix F: Conversion Chart Chameleon 32 User's Guide Example To convert 6770 decimal to hexadecimal: ·6770 -4096 2674 -2560 114 - 112 --2 2 = 6770) (highest number in table > = 2674) (highest number in table> = 114) (highest number in table > = 2) (highest number in table > Hexadecimal value is equal to line numbers of each value chosen from table. value: hexadecimal: T£K£L£C 4096 1 F·2 2560 A 112 7 2 2 = 1A72 8/17,'89 APPENDIX G: ASCII-EBCDIC-HEX TABLE The following table lists ASCII characters and their octal, decimal, and hexadecimal values. TEKELEC G·1 8/17'89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide HEX 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC 00 OE OF 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 10 1E 1F 20 .21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2ft:. 28 2C 20 2E 2F TEKELEC DEC OCT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 34 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 40 41 42 Appendix G: ASCII/EBCDIC/HEX TABLE ASCII NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ NUL SOH STX ETX 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 PT BEL BS HT LF VT FF CA SO SI OLE OC1 OC2 OC3 OC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GSC AS AS ' I (space) FF OLE SBA EUA IC 43 44 NL 45 46 47 48 49 4A 48 4C 40 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 50 5E 5F EM OUP SF FM ITB ! .. 43 # 44 $ 45 46 47 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 EBCDIC HEX DEC OCT % & • ( ) ETB ESC • + ENQ · I G-2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 ASCII 0 1 2 3 4 5 EBCDIC SYN 6 7 8 9 EOT , < RA NAK = > ? SUB @ , • (space) A B C 0 E F G H I J K L M N 0 P Q A S T U ¢ , < ( + ! & V W X Y Z [ $ \ * t .), -, ! -, Appendix G: ASCIl/EBCOIC;HEX TABLE Chameleon 32 User's Guide HEX \ 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 68 6C 60 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 78 7C 70 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 88 8C 80 8E 8F TEKELEC DEC OCT 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104' 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 ASCII a EBCDIC c d e f 9 h i I m n 0 , % "> ? P q r s t u v w x Y z ~ DEL .. # ,@ -. " a b c d e f 9 h DEC OCT 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 162 A2 A3 163 A4 164 A5 165 166 A6 A7 167 A8 168 A9 169 C1 193 194 C2 195 C3 C4 196 C5, 197 C6 198 C7 199 C8 200 C9 201 01 209 02 210 211 03 04 . 212 05 213 06 214 07 215 08 216 217 09 E2 226 E3 227 E4 228 E5 229 E6 230 E7 231 232 E8 E9 233 FO 240 F1 241 F2 242 F3 243 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 / b j k HEX 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 242 243 244 245 246 247 250 251 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 310 311 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 360 361 362 363 ASCII EBCDIC j k' I m n 0 P q r s t u v w x Y z A 8 C 0 E F G H I J K L M N 0 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 ·1 2 3 8/1789 Appendix G: ASCII/EBCDIC/HEX TABLE Chameleon 32 User's Guide HEX F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 TEKELEC DEC OCT 244 245 246 247 248 249 364 365 366 367 370 371 ASCII EBCDIC 4 5 6 7 8 9 G-4 8:17'89 APPENDIX H: RS422N.11N.36 RS423N.1 ON .36 INTERFACE MODULES RS422N .11 N .36 Interface Module RS422 is an EIA standard that corresponds to the CCITT's V.11 and V.36 International standards. RS422 specifications are applicable to asynchronous and synchronous binary data transmission using either private lines or switched network systems at speeds up to 64 kbps. The RS422 Interface is inter-operable with equipment using RS423. The primary new capabilities available with RS422 as compared to RS232 are: • • • Ability to handle significantly higher maximum data rates Ability to use a longer interface cables and Additional interface functions, such as loop back testing The physical connection of interchange circuits within a data terminal and a data set is made by a pair of pluggable· connectors (the interface point.) The Chameleon 32 side is a 37 pin O-subminature socket (female) connector (0837S). The terminal side consists of the matching male connector (0837P). The pinout below is shown as the connector is viewed from the rear of the machine: Figure H.1: RS422 Connector TEKELEC H-l 8/17/89 Appendix H: V.36 Interfaces Chameleon 32 User's Guide Cable Because of the improvements in the electrical characteristics, the connections between the computer communications adaptor and the local data set and between the remote data set and" the associated terminal can be extended to 4,000 feet (1,200 meters). This is accurate for data signalling rates of up to 100 kbps. Figure H.2 shows the RS422 CCITT equivalent pin numbers and their functions. The Chameleon 32 can be configured to simulate either the DCE or DTE, therefore the circuit direction specifies the direction TO and FROM the DCE rather than TO and FROM the Chameleon 32. Electrical Characteristics RS422 is a Balanced Voltage Digital Signal with electrical characteristics which conform to the CCITT's V.111X.27. Driver Output resistance: Lead to ground: Output current: Output voltage: Receiver Input resistance: Lead to ground: Input sensitivity: TEKELEC H-2 200 ohms differential 175 ohms 150 mAmaximum +/- 3 volts " 200 ohms" differential 175 ohms + /- 200 mvolts 8117'89 Appendix H: V.36 Interfaces Chameleon 32 User's Guide D837 Pin Number ISO Circuit 19 37 20 102 102a 102b SG SC AC Signal Ground Send Common Receive Common To DCE From DCE 28 15 12/30 11 /29 .. 135 125 108 107 IS IC TR DM Terminal in Service Incoming Call Terminal Ready Data Mode To From To From 4/22 6/24 103 104 SD RD Send Data Receive Data To DCE From-DCE 17/35 5/23 8/26 113 114 115 TT ST RT Terminal Timing Send Timing Receive Timing To DCE From DCE From DCE 7/25 105 106 109 110 135 112 RS CS RR SQ NS SF SR SI Request to Send Clear to Send Receiver Ready Signal Quality New Signal Select Frequency Signaling Rate Selector Signaling Rate Indicator To From From From To To To From 10 14 18 141 140 142 LL RL TM Local Loopback Remote Loopback Test Mode To DCE To DCE From DCE 32 36 116 117 SS S8 Select Standby Standby Indicator ·To DCE From DCE 9/27 13/31 33 34 16 16 2 111/126 111/126 CCITT Circuit Mnemonic and Name Circuit Direction DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE Figure H.2: RS422 Connector Pinout T£K£L£C H·3 Implemented by Chameleon Circuit Type X X X Common X X X X Control Data Timing Control Control P R I M A R y C H A N N E L X X X X X X X X Appendix H: V.36 Interfaces Chameleon 32 User's Guide DTE TO DCE INTERCONNECTION Figure H.3 shows the connections between the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and the Data Circuit-Terminating Equfpment (DeE). SHIELD SG DIRECTION sc 0 A T A T E R M I N A L E a U I P M E N T RC IS IC 04 OM SO Ro , .I "~ ,~ , ," ," ", "'. -," x",- ~ TR ..., ","," 04 p X ... x: ~ "1( x" , , M A R C A T " " ~ t X ", " .I , ,... ) ".I " .I " ,~ 'X ", ," , X X x ", ".I .I X :, I ", o ," N ", so NS SFISR SI LL RL TM SS S8 E x " , ~ , o " ~ 'X " " X X o ," F x" ST RT RS CS RR X T X ," TT o " t N X ~ X ,~ SHIELD SG SC RC IS IC TR OM so RO IT ST RT RS CS RR sa NS SF/SR SI LL RL TM SS S8 0 A T A C I R C U I T T E R M I N A T I N G E a u I P M E N T X TWO CONNECTOR CONTACTS Figure H.3: DTE to DeE Interconnection TEKELEC H-4 8/1789 Appendix H: V.3S Interfaces Chameleon 32 User's Guide RS423 N.10N.36 INTERFACE MODULE RS423 is an EIA standard that corresponds to the ·CCID's V.10 and V.36 International standard. RS423 specifications are applicable to asynchronous and synchronous binary data transmission using either private lines or switched network systems at speeds up to 64 kbps. The RS423 interface module is inter-operable with equipment using RS422 and (with certain considerations) RS232. The requirements and suggested implementations for such inter-operation is provided . by EIA Industrial Electronics Bulletin 12. Although all of the new capabilities available when using RS422 are available with the RS423 Interface Module, the following cases should be avoided because of its unbalanced electrical characteristics: • Avoid an interconnecting cable that is too long for proper unbalanced circuit operation • Avoid extraneous noise sources which make unbalanced circuit operation impossible • A~oid unnecessary interference from other signals The physical connection of interchange circuits within a data terminal and a data set is made by a pair of pluggable connectors (the interface point.) The Chameleon 32 side is a 37 pin O-subminature socket (female) connector (OB37S). The terminal side consists of the matching male connector (OB37P). The pinout below is shown as the connector is viewed from the rear of the machine: Figure H.4: RS423 Connector TEKELEC H-S 8;11'89 Appendix H: V.36 Interfaces Chameleon 32 User's Guide Cable RS423 is an unbalanced interchange circuit which creates complications with the cable length. It is dependent on the data signalling rate and on the rise time. With a data signalling rate of 64 kbps, the extension cable to the DTE can be no longer than 10 to 20 meters in length. (With decreased data signalling rate, the length can also be increased.) These limitations are due to interference (nearend crosstalk) and the circuits susceptibility to differential noise. Figure H.5 shows the RS423 CCITT equivalent pin numbers and their functions. The Chameleon 32 can be configured to simulate either the DCE or DTE, therefore the circuit direction specifies the direction TO and FROM the DCE rather than TO and FROM the Chameleon 32. Electrical Characteristics . This is an unbalanced signal which has electrical characteristics which conform to CCITT's V.1 O/EIA RS423. Driver Output voltage: Output impedance: Output current: Receiver Input Voltage: Input impedance: Input sensitivity: T£K£L£C H-6 +/< 50 ohms -. 150 rnA maximum + /- 10 volts + /- 200 mvolts 8/17'89 APPENDIX I: DSCS INTERFACE MODULE Introduction This section describes the Digital Signal Customer Service (DSCS) Interface for the Chameleon. The interface operates at 56 Kbps. A unit which operates at 9.6 Kpbs is available on special order. The DSCS interface contains two receiver circuits and one transmitter circuit. This allows the interface to operate in either of two modes when connected to a Chameleon port: • Simulation using one transmitter and one receiver. In this mode, the interface provides the clock to the Chameleon. The Chameleon must, therefore, be configured as a DTE. • Analysis using two receivers The Interface Module Figure 1.1 shows the DSCS Interface module. (±) (±) DSCSINTERFACE BRIDGE MASTER BRIDGE 00 DO DO TERM RCV SLAVE RCV XMT TERM - - - - - SIMULATE - - - " " ' - - MONITOR - LOCK UNLOCK CAUTION (D I I DISCONNECT DEVICE FROM PRIMARY MAINS BEFORE REMOVING THIS MODULE eo Figure I.1: DSCS Interface Module Tekelec I-1 09/27/91 Appendix I: DSCS Interface Chameleon 32 User's Guide The receiver and transmitter connections to the DSCS interface (shown asA for receivers and B for transmitters) are made with industry-standard 3-conductor bantam jacks. These connections are split into two sections: SIMULATE This section includes the receiver (A) and the transmitter (B) used in simulation. A TEAM/BRIDGE switch is provided by the receiver for selection of the input impedance. • TEAM Provides a 135 ohm nominal input impedance • BRIDGE ohms Provides an input impedance greater than 3 K A second switch, located by the transmitter jack, is used to select the transmitter clock used by the DSCS Interface. Figure 1.2 illustrates the transmit clock between the DSCS Interface, the Chameleon and the Network. • • Master Transmits using the internally generated clock Slave Transmits using the recovered received clock Chameleon (DTE) 1---'" DSCS Interface 1 - - - " (DCE) i DSCS Interface always provides Transmit clock i Master/Slave Switch determines Transmit dock Figure I.2: Transmit Clock during Simulation MONITOR The Monitor section is the second receiver, also designated as A. It is used with the Simulate receiver to perform Analysis tasks. A TERM/BRIDGE switch is provided for this receiver as well. For both of the receivers, the DSCS Interface derives a clock from the received signal for use in received timing. A switch is also provided on the interface to select either TERM or BRIDGE as the terminating resistance for each receiver. Tekelec I-2 09/27/91 Appendix I: DSCS Chameleon 32 User's Guide Inter1ac~ SPECIFICATIONS Receivers operate with standard DSCS/DDS signals per: • • • Coding method: AMI with zero suppression • Distance from OCU and DSU up to 1000 feet • Input Impedance: • • Transmitter AT&T Pub 62310 Bellcore TA-TSY-000083 Terminated (TERM) Bridged (BRIDGE) 135 5 ohms, balanced > 3 K ohms, balanced provides a balanced output • Pulse amplitude and shape is in accordance with: • • • .• AT&T Pub 62310 Bellcore TA-TSY-000083 Encoding method: AMI with zero suppression Internal clock provides 56 kbps 0.01 % This clock times the transmission when the Masterl Slave switch is in the Master pOSition. • Pulse amplitude: 1.66 volts nominal The documents used as standards are: Teke/ec • AT& T Pub 62310 - Digital Data System Channel Interface Specification • Bel/core TA-TSY-000083 - Generic Requirements for the Digital Data System (DDS) Network Office Channel Unit I-3 09/27/91 APPENDIX J: G.703 CO-DIRECTIONAL INTERFACE MODULE Introduction This document describes the cCln G.703 Co-Directional Interface for the Chameleon 32. The interface operates at 64 Kbps. The Co-Directional interface contains two receiver circuits and one transmitter circuit. This allows the interface to operate in either of two modes when connected to a Chameleon port: • Simulation using one transmitter and one receiver. In this mode, the interface provides the clock to the Chameleon. The Chameleon must, therefore, be configured as a DTE. • Analysis using two receivers The Interface Module Figure J.1 shows the Co-Directional Interface module as viewed from the rear of the machine. @) <@ CO-DIRECTIONAL INTERFACE e BRIDGE ~ ,,~ MASTER BRIDGE 0 ~.. ---.1..0 0 RCV __ XMT RCV - - - - SIMULATE '§' ~ "'M MONITOR - II CAUTION!! UNLOCK <@ e DISCONNECT DEVICE ROM PRIMARY MAINS BEFORE REMOVING THIS MODULE LOCK ~ 'Ej Figure J.1: Co-Directional Interface Module TEKELEC J-1 8/03/90 App. J: G.703 Co-Directional Interface Chameleon User's Guide The receiver and transmitter connections to the Co-Directional interface are made with 2-conductor balanced BR2 connectors. These connections are split into two sections: SIMULATE In simulate mode, the Co-Directional interfaces uses both the transmitter and receiver. In this mode, the Co-Directional interface module must be configured as a DTE. The Master/Slave switch selects the transmitter clock source used by the Co-Directional interface, as follows: • When Master is selected, the transmit clock is generated by the internal clock of the Co-Directional interface. • When slave is selected, the transmit clock is derived from the recovered receive clock, and is thus synchronous to the receive clock. MONITOR In Monitor mode, the Co-Directional interfaces uses two rec.eivers: the Simulate receiver and the Monitor' receiver. Both receivers use the received clock for receive timing. Term/Bridge Each receiver is provided with a Term/Bridge switch. When Term is selected, the line is terminated with a 120 ohm nominal input impedance. When Bridge is selected, the input impedance is greater than 3k ohms. If multiple receivers are connected to one line, only one should be terminated, and the remaining receivers set for Bridge mode. If only one receiver is connected, it should be in Term mode. TEKELEC J-2 8103/90 App. J: G.703 Co-Directional Interface Chameleon User's Guide SPECIFICATIONS Receiver • Receivers operate with standard Co-Directional signals per CCITT Recommendation G.703. • Coding method: per G.703 • Input Impedance: • 120 ohms ± 5 ohms, balanced (Term mode) • > 3k ohms, balanced (Bridge mode) • Bipolar signal input range 5.0 Volts peak-to-peak to 0.3 Volts peak-to-peak • The transmitter provides a balanced output • Output impedance: • Pulse amplitude and shape is in accordance with CCITT Recommendation G.703. • Encoding method: per CCITT Rec. G.703 • Internal clock movides 64 KBPS + 100 ppm This clock times the transmission when the Master/ Slave switch is in the Master position. • Pulse amplitude: balanced • Peak voltage of no pulse: 0 Transmitter 120 ohms ± 5 ohms 1.0 volts nominal, into 120 ohm + 0.1 yolts The document used as a standard reference is: • TEKELEC CCITT. Red Book, Volume III - Fascicle 111.3, Recommendation G.703 J-3 8/03/90 APPENDIX K: 256k DATA CAPTURE OPTION Introduction On Dual Port machines, there are two monitoring modes available: • . Monitor mode enables the Chameleon to monitor up to 64k bps with dense traffic (one flag between frames). • Fast Monitor mode enables the Chameleon to monitor full duplex traffic up to 256k bps. This mode is also referred to as 256k data capture mode. The mode is selected in the main configuration menu using the Mode of Operation parameter. Fast' Monitor mode is available only on Port A. The 256k data capture option requires specific hardware and software. When available, the Port A Mode of Operation parameter includes a Fast Mo (Fast Monitoring) option as shown in the figure below. -8----------------------Tekelec CHAMELEON 32 Rel 4.xx Copyright (C) 1986-1989 I Press F6 to change the PROTOCOL setup I I Press GO to Accept Setup Mode Port A Mode of Operation Physical Interface Protocol Press F6 to change I Busy Port B Mode of Operation Monitoring IPORT AIOata Source Capture Mode TEKELEC K-1 11/15/89 Chameleon User's Guide App. K: 256K Acquisition Module A Chameleon can support only one 256k port. Therefore, - - when you select Fast Monitor mode for Port A, Port B is not available. To indicate that Port B is not available, the message Busy appears next to the Port B parameters. Once Fast Monitoring is selected, you configure and use the Chameleon in the same manner as for standard 64k bps Monitoring. Limitations When using Fast Monitoring, the following guidelines and limitations apply: c~n • A Dual Port machine is required, and only one port operate while 256k is being used • For dense traffic (less than five flags between frames at greater than 64 kbps) the Chameleon may loose frames. • Due to the large amount of data being processed on a dense line with large frames at a high baud rate, you may elect not to run several tasks simultaneously. You may experience a slight performance degradation, depending on which tasks you run. For example, if you are running Statistics, Direct-to-Disk and Analysis, you may notice the following: • The Statistics display may not be updated as frequently as usual. The Statistics display may appear to be frozen or the machine may appear to be hung up. This is not the case. The data is still being processed and the information is still being captured on disk. The updating of the screen has a lower priority. If you stop acquisition by pressing Run/Stop, the display will be updated to reflect the data acquired up to that point. To then start a new Statistics session, press the Reset function key. If you resume acquisition by pressing Run/Stop (instead of restarting statistics by pressing Reset), the maximum response time fields will include the time that acquisition was halted. • The number of triggers that can be used is dependent on the type of trigger and the nature of the traffic being monitored. ) TEKELEC K-2 11/15/89 APPENDIX L: TTL INTERFACE MODULE Introduction The TTL interface is a standard Chameleon 32 interface module. It provides access to a serial I/O port at TTL voltage levels. This module functions in the same way as the V-series modules (V.24, V.35, V.36), but signal levels conform to TTL specifications. The module will support Monitoring and Simulation in both DeE and DTE modes. The module can be used to: • interface a Chameleon 32 to a Chameleon 8{)00 (A sample application and the required cable are available as Part Number 999-2003). • interface a Chameleon 32 to any other device using TTL logic. This module is selected as the physical interface by selecting the V-Type Interface. TEKELEC L-l 4:20,90 App. L: TTL Interface Chameleon User's Guide Interface Module Figure L.1' shows the TTL Interface module as viewed from the rear· of the machine. Note that it has two connectors and a bank of DIP switches. 0 100000000\ 0 TEKELEC - CHAMELEON 20132 P1 ................. ................. NOTE: TTL LEVEL SIGNALS P2 .\ ............. ............ / . ICAUTION I Disconnecl Device trom Primary Mains before remcwi module. 0 '''is 0 Figure L 1: The TTL Interface Pl The first connector is a 34 pin flat ribbon cable connector. This connector is convenient for cabling to a PCB or breadboard. P2 The second connector is a 08-258 connector. It has the same logical pin out as a V.24 I R8-232 connector. This connector is convenient for cabling using standard DB25 hardware and cables. Switches The DIP switches are accessible from the outside of the machine. They provide programmable signal polarity and other features. The details of these will be described later in this chapter. TEKELEC L-2 4"20/90 Chameleon User's Guide Specifications App. L: TTL Interface The TTL Interface module conforms to the following specifications: • • • • Minimum output high voltage Maximum output low voltage Minimum input high voltage Maximum input low voltage 2.4V 0.6V 2.0V O.BV • • Maximum low level output current Maximum high. level output current 24mA -3.2mA • Maximum input low current ( pullup ) 2.smA • Maximum short circuit"Current (1 alP) 1SOmA • • Maximum input voltage Minimum Input voltage 6.0V -O.sV Notes: 1. 2. Exceeding the short circuit current or maximum/minimum input voltage specifications will damage the interface. All lines are pulled up to + SV internally via a 2.2 Kohm resistor. This is to prevent pickup of noise. on unconnected pins. Other termination configurations are possible (220/330 etc.). Contact Tekelec if different termination schemes are required. The interconnect cable provided with the interface kit is described later in this chapter. If you intend to construct additional cables for use with this interface, standard TTL deSign rules should be observed. • Cables should not be over 6 feet in length. they will be under 3 feet. • Shielded, twisted pairs are preferable. Note: TEKELEC Preferably, Crosstalk and other cable effects may seriously affect the operation of this interface at high clock and data rates. L-3 4/20/90 App. L: TTL Interface Chameleon User's Guide TIL Interface Connectors The pin outs for the two connectors on the module are shown in Figures L.2 and L.3. Figure L.2 shows the connections for the 34 pin ribbon cable connector (P1). This table shows the ISO CCT Number, signal description and the direction of the signal when simulating a DCE, simulating a DTE and monitoring. Any pins not shown in this table are not connected. PIN No. ISO CCT Number 2 105 3 7 114 ·104 8 DESCRIPTION (or mnemonic) SIGNAL DIRECTION DCE DTE MON In Out In Transmit clock Out In In Receive data Out In In 103 Transmit data In Out In 10 107 Data set ready Out In In 11 102 Signal ground 12 102 Signal ground RTS 13 + 5 volts (switch select) .14 + 5 volts (switch select) 17 109 Data carrier Detect Out In In 20 108 Data terminal ready In Out In 22 102 Signal ground 23 115 Receive clock Out In In 24 125 Ring indicator Out In In 27 106 Clear to send Out In In 31 -12 volts Oumper sel.) 32 -12 volts Oumper sel.) 33 + 12 volts (jumper sel.) 34 + 12 volts (jumper sel.) Figure L2: P1 Connector - 34 Pin Ribbon Cable Notes: 1. See DIP switch description for Signal polarity control and other configuration information. 2. + S Volt power is available at the interface if DIP Switch 8 is ON. This is provided for use as a reference voltage only. No more than SOmA should be drawn from this circuit. 3. + 12 Volt and ·12 Volt power is available from the interface by shorting jumper posts JP1 and JP2 on the PCB inside the module. The default condition is not to supply power to the interface. Current draw from + 12V or -12V must not exceed SOmA. TEKELEC L-4 App. L: TTL Interface Chameleon User's Guide Figure L.3 shows the connections for the 25 pin connector (P2). This table shows the ISO CCT Number, signal description and the direction of the signal when simulating a DCE, simulating a DTE and monitoring. Any pins not shown in this table are not connected. PIN No. ISO CCT Number 2 103 3 DESCRIPTION (or mnemonic) SIGNAL DIRECTION DCE DTE MON Transmit data In Out In 104 Receive data Out In In 4 105 Request to send In Out In 5 106 Clear to send Out In In 6 107 Data set ready Out In In 7 102 Signal ground 8 109 Data carrier Detect Out In In 15 114 Transmit clock Out In In 17 115 Receive clock Out In In 20 108 Data terminal ready In Out In 22 125 Ring indicator Out In In Figure L.3: P2 Connector - 25 Pin D-Sub Notes: TEKELEC 1. See the DIP switch description for signal polarity control and other configuration in.formation. L·5 4'20'90 Chameleon User's Guide App. L: TIL Interface DIP Switch C~nfiguration The bank of switches accessible through the module control the polarity of certain signals on the TTL interface. The switches can also be used to disable certain handshake signals when they are unused. The default setting of all switches as shipped is OFF. SWITCH SWITCH ON SWITCH OFF (Default) 1 Invert circuit 103 TxData Do not invert 103 TxData 2 Invert circuit 104 RxData Do not invert 104 RxData 3 Invert circuit t 14 TxClock Do not invert' 14 TxClock 4 Invert circuit 115 RxClock Do not invert 115 RxClock 5 Invert 105-109,125 Do not invert 105-109.125 S Enable 105-109,125 Disable '05-109,125 7 Reserved Reserved 8 Supply + 5V to Pl Do not supply + 5V to P 1 Figure L4: DIP Switch Configuration Notes: TEKELEC 1. Switch 6, in the OFF position, disables all non-data or clock lines. This prevents unused lines from picking up spurious noise and causing excessive interrupts to the CH32 front end acquisition hardware. It is recommenced that Switch 6 be left in the OFF position at all times unless circuits 105-109 and 125 are required. 2. The default polarity of the signals is inverted with respect to V.24/AS-232 logic levels. As V.24 drivers and receivers are usually inverting, this allows direct connection to TTL compatible devices that would normally be used with discrete V.24 drivers/receivers. In the event the circuit signals are of different polarity, switches 1-5 may be used to invert the logical levels of the data, clock and handshake signals. L-S 4'20!90 App. M: Remote Control Via Modem Chameleon 32 User's Guide APPENDIX M:· REMOTE CONTROL VIA MODEM Introduction Required Equipment This appendix describes how to interconnect .Chameleon 20/32 test systems using dial-up modems. This enables you to remotely control a Chameleon from another Chameleon. The following equipment is required to interconnect two Chameleon systems for remote control via modem: • Two Chameleon 20 or Chameleon 32 machines (any combination) • Two dial-up modems of similar types Any asynchronous serial dial-up modems can be used; however, tor maximum utility, modems with the following features are recommended: Capable of originating calls (dialing) Capable of auto-answer Highest baud rate possible (1200 baud or higher) Hayes AT or compatible • Equipment Setup TEKELEC Chameleon cable option 932-5001-01 which can be purchased from T ekelec or can be made to conform to the diagram on page M-8. The Chameleon being operated remotely is referred to as the slave Chameleon. The Chameleon operating the remote Chameleon is referred to as the master Chameleon. M-1 9/4190 App. M: Remote Control Via Modem Chameleon 32 User's Guide Slave Chameleon Setup To set up .the slave Chameleon, perform the following steps: 1. Attach the modem to the Remote I/O port (Remote Control port on the Chameleon 20) using a cable as described on page 6. This cable. configuration is wired specifically for the Chameleon. 2. Attach the. modem to the telephone line, following the modem manufacturer's instructions. 3. Configure the modem, following manufacturer's instructions, as follows: the modem • Enable automatic answer • Activate RS232 Carrier Detect (DCD) when carrier is detected. This is required by the Chameleon. • Configure all other setting.s to be suitable for the modem and the line condition. Note that these must match the modem settings that you set at the master Chameleon. 4. Power up the modem, and then the Chameleon. 5. On the Chameleon, press Shift Utilities to invoke the Utilities banner. 6. Press Shift Hide Page to display the Utilities menu, as shown in the following figure. . .. ". ..... . .....-------------------fjII:iI:il::::~l:~~iii"::,it':::r':'::'• Utilities Menu Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 TEKELEC Remote I/O Port Setup Printer Setup Set Date and Time Traffic Load/Save Chameleon II File Conversion Check Free Disk Space Kermit/Connect Mode Setup BacKup/Restore Menu FMS File Conversion M-2 9/4190 Chameleon 32 User's Guide App. M: Remote Control Via Modem 7. Press F1 Remote I/O Port Setup to display the menu for the Remote I/O port, as shown below. setup Term; nal Setup Menu Compatible Termi nal Type Baud Rate CHAM32 +- Number of Data Bits Number of Stop Bits Parity Configuration Files After making selections Press 8. 9600 8 2 None None GO Select the following configuration parameter values: Terminal Type CHAM32 Baud Rate (Select according requirement) Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 2 Parity None to modem 9. Save this configuration with the file name TERMINAL.OF, which is the default setup file. This will allow the slave Chameleon to be automatically configured for remote control when it boots up unattended. 10. Press Go to initialize the Remote I/O port using the displayed parameters. 11 . Press F10 Exit to exit the setup menu. 12. Press F10 Exit to exit the Utilities menu. The slave Chameleon is now ready to be remotely controlled. This machine can now be powered up and r~motely controlled without further human intervention. TEKELEC M-3 9/4190 App. M: Remote Control Via Modem Chameleon 32 User's Guide Master Chameleon Setup To set up the master Chameleon, perform the following steps: 1. Attach the modem to the Aux 2 serial port using a cable as described on page 7. 2. Attach the modem to the telephone line, following the modem manufacturer's instructions. 3. Configure the modem, following manufacturer's instructions, as follows: the modem • Originate (dial) call • Configure all other settings to be suitable for the modem and the line condition. Note that these must match the modem settings that you set at the master Chameleon 4. Power up the modem, and then the Chameleon. 5. On the Chameleon, press Shift Utilities to invoke the Utilities menu. 6. Press Shift Hide Page to display the Utilities menu, as shown in the figure below. Utilities Menu Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Fa F9 Remote I/O Port Setup Printer Setup Set Date and Time Traffic load/Save Chameleon II File Conversion ChecK Free DisK Space Kermit/Connect Mode Setup BacKup/Restore Menu FMS File Conversion Utilities TEKELEC Menu M-4 9/4190 Chameleon 32 User's Guide 7. App. M: Remote Control Via Modem Press F7 Kermit/Connect Mode Setup to access the setup menu for the Aux 2 serial port, as shown below. Kermit/Connect Mode Setup Baud Rate Number of Data Bits Number of Stop Bits Parity Fil e Type Number of Retransmissions Transmission Interval Configuration Files 9600 .... 8 1 None Binary 6 3_Sec None After making selections Press GO Kermit Connect Mode Setup Menu 8. 9. TEKELEC Select the following configuration parameter values: Baud Rate (Select according to the modem's requirements. It must be the same baud rate as configured on the slave Chameleon.) Data Bits Stop Bits Parity 8 2 None This setup must match the slave Remote JlO port setup. Save this configuration with the file name KERMIT.OF, which is the default Aux 2 serial port setup file. This will allo~ the master Chameleon to automatically use remote control when booted, without reconfiguring the Aux 2 serial port. 10. Press Go to initialize the port using the displayed parameters. 11. Press F10 Exit to exit the setup menu. 12. Press F10 Exit to exit the Utilities menu. 9/4190 Chameleon 32 User's Guide App. M: Remote Control Via Modem 13. Press Files to invoke the File Management menu. 14. Press F9 Connect. into terminal mode. This puts the master Chameleon You should now be able to communicate directly with the modem. With a Hayes-compatible modem, to connect to the modem, type the attention string: +++ Establishing the Connection Once the Chameleons and modems are correctly configured and the master Chameleon is in terminal mode, you can dial the telephone number of the slave Chameleon from the keyboard of the master Chameleon. For Hayes Compatible modems, dial: atdtphonenumber < Return > phonenumber is the. telephone number of the line connected to the slave modem. The modem of the slave Chameleon will then answer and a connection will be established. At this point. the master Chameleon screen will be blank. To refresh (update) the screen, on the master Chameleon, press: You should then see the screen of the slave machine.on the master machine. Please note the following: TEKELEC • The screen update will be at modem speeds. This is substantially slower than the internal update rate of a Chameleon. In addition, the Chameleon uses an algorithm to attempt to update the screen over slow lines in the minimum time. If you are scrolling the display, the remote display may be unintelligible until scrolling stops. • On the master Chameleon, the slave screen will a/ways have a black background color. This is to help you distinguish between master and slave screens on the master Chameleon. • If the master screen becomes corrupted, refresh the screen by pressing Tab twice. • On the slave Chameleon, the screen will display normally, as if it were being controlled by the local keyboard. The slave keyboard will remain active during remote control. M-6 9/4190 App. M: Remote Control Via Modem Chameleon 32 User's Guide • If you wish to exit terminal mode so that you can perform an action on the master while on-line to the slave, do the following: 1. Press Shift Cancel. This exits terminal mode and returns the master machine to normal control. Note that this does not terminate the connection between the two machines. 2. Perform the operation on the master. 3. To return to terminal mode, on the master Chameleon, do the following: a. b. c. Terminating the Connection Press Files to invoke File Management. Press F9 Connect. Press Tab twice to refresh the master screen. To terminate the remote control session, you must hang up the line from the Chameleon master. With Hayes-compatible m9dems, this requires the following sequence: a. Type: + + +. The screen will attempt to update. b. Type: ath. The modem will hang up. c. Press Shift Cancel. The master Chameleon exits terminal mode and returns to normal mode. The slave will be usable locally immediately; however, the modem may not hang up after loss of carrier for some time (depending on the modem type). You cannot re-establish a connection between the master and slave until the slave modem has hung up. TEKELEC M-7 9/4190 App. M: Remote Control Via Modem Chameleon 32 User's Guide Cable Requirements A special cable is required for this application. Chameleon Cable 932-5001-01 is available as an option from Tekelec or you can construct a cable following the diagram below. Connector B Male DB25P Chameleon Remote I/O Port Connector A Male D825P Modem Pin Pin 2 ---------------------------------- 3 3 ---------------------------------- 2 6 ---------------------------------- 20 7 ---------------------------------- 7 20 ----------------------------?----. i 8 I i .. ----- 4 TEKELEC M-8 9/4/90 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY ADCCP Advance Data Communications Control Procedure. A bitoriented protocol developed by ANSI. ADCCP defines three LAP link level access procedures: SNRM (Set Normal Response Mode), SARM (Set Asynchronous Response Mode), and SABM (Set Asynchronous Balance Mode). Address 1) A location that can be specifically referred to in a software program. 2) The identification of a physically and/or logically distinct entity in a network. Alphanumeric Characters Upper and lower case alphabet letters from A to Z and the numerals 0 to 9. AMI Coding Alternate Mark Inversion Coding. A technique for encoding data using a three state signal to convey binary digits in which successive digits are of alternating positive and negative polarity, but equal in amplitude (and in which zeros are of zero amplitude ). Analysis The process of passively monitoring a data communications link to display the traffic in a format designed to permit meaningful evaluation. ANSI American National Standards Institute. A group affiliated with ISO that establishes standards for transmission codes, protocols, high level languages, and so forth . . Application Layer The seventh layer defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model. This layer provides users with access to the OSI environment and distributed information services. ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. A coded character set of 7-bit coded characters, and a parity bit used for data communications, which defines 128 characters. Async Tekelec's Asynchronous Simulation software. Asynchronous Refers to events that occur without regular timed relationships to other events or clocks. . TEKELEC Gloss-1 8/17/89 GLOSSARY Chameleon 32 User's Guide Asynchronous Communication A method of data communications characterized by the use of local rather than system clocks. Synchronization is maintained via a leading (start) bit and at least one trailing (stop) bit per character. AT&T American Telephone and Telegraph Company. B Channels Channels that are provided for data transmission in ISDN at 64 Kbps; with PRI, 23 channels are provided for this purpose. (In BRI,2 channels are provided.) B8ZS Coding Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution Coding. Consists of an AMI encoded signal using a technique for meeting ones density requirements on 1.544 Mbps facilities by using a special pattern of coding violations as a substitute for an all zero byte. BCC Block Check Character. BCD Binary Coded Decimal. A notation in which each decimal digit is represented by four binary digits. BOP Protocols that rely on positional Bit Oriented Protocol. significance and coded control fields, such as HOLC, LAPB, and SOLC. BOS Bit Oriented Signaling. One at two signaling techniques used with OMI. The separate channel provides a multiplex of the per channel signaling bits which are used in T carrier signaling. BPS Bits Per Second. BSC Binary Synchronous Communication. A character-oriented protocol in half-duplex designed by IBM in 1964. Baud A measure of data rate equal to the number of bits per second. Binary Code A numbering code that is based on only two characters or states, usually zero and one. Bisync Tekelec's BSC Simulation software package. Bisynchronous A method of transmission, based on synchronous system clocks, and a defined SYNC character used to synchronize the transmitter and receiver. The SYNC characters (tor example, 32. 16, or 96 in HEX) are transmitted prior to data and usually in pairs. . TEKELEC Gloss-2 8117/89 GLOSSARY Chameleon 32 User's Guide Bit Bit-oriented Protocols Boolean Operators Break Sequence Broadband Channel The smallest information unit, named as a contraction of Binary digiT. A protocol in which each bit may have independent significance and without octet alignment. An operator such as AND, OR and NOT used in Boolean algebra applied tb logical units. The result of any operation is restricted to either zero or one (true or false). Interruption in a transmission, often permits ", controlled terminal to interrupt its controller. Transmission channel with a bandwidth wider than that required for transmitting voice signals. Bug A hardware or software problem causing malfunctions. Buffer A storage medium that holds blocks of data being transferred between devices. CCIS Common-Channel Inter-office Signaling. A signaling system developed for use between central office switching stations (with stored program control). ccrrr International Telegraph and Telephone Consultive Committee. An international standards organization. Chameleon 1) A small animal characterized by its ability to change its skin color to match its environment. 2) Tekelec's Simulator/Analyzer which adapts to the needs of a data communications environment. Chameleon BASIC A generic programming language based on BASIC developed by Tekelec. The commands and functions are used in Tekelec's FRAMEM, SIMP/L, Bisync, and Async Simulators. Character Term often used to refer to an eight bit pattern in a code. Clock Equipment used in a transmission system that provides a time base to control certain functions, such as the the duration of signal element, and the sampling. Command, Direct TEKELEC A command in Chameleon BASIC which is executed immediately, and is unnumbered (no line number). Gloss-3 8/17/89 GLOSSARY Chameleon 32 User's Guide Command, Statement Communications Processor A type of computer used for processing the overhead of data communication (allowing the CPU to concentrate on the applications). " Control Field Eight or sixteen bits of information following the address in a BOP frame, consisting of the number of transmissions received count, a poll/final bit, the number of transmissions sent count, and a concluding bit. CPU Central Processing Unit. CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check. A check word generated by a polynomial sequence that allows errors to be detected. It is sent with the transmission and checked after being recalculated by the receiver. D-Channel The 24th channel used with DMI for common channel call setup and tear-down signaling. ·04 Framing . A command in Chameleon BASIC which is preceded by a line number. It is stored in memory, and executed according to line number sequence when the entire program is run. Framing format used on most existing 1.544 Mbps facilities; Data bits The number of data" bits specifies the number of significant bits in an asynchronous transmission . Data Endpoint The point at which the DMI channel protocol is terminated. Data Endpoints may be at the Host or at the PBX, at terminal equipments, or terminal adapters behind the PBX. Data Mode 0 The data channel protocol mode which supports clear 64 Kbps data transmission. Data Mode 1 The data channel protocol mode which supports 56 Kbps data transmission. Data Mode 2 The data channel protocol mode which supports standard synchronous or asynchronous data transmission up to 19.2 Kbps using HOLC-type framing to perform rate adaptation. Data Mode 3 The data channel protocol that supports virtual circuit service for statistical multiplexing of data streams. Datapac The Canadian X.25 Packet Switching Network. ( TEKELEC Gloss-4 8117/89 GLOSSARY Chameleon 32 User's Guide DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment. Decimal Code System in which each numeric position may be anyone of ten states. Default Condition which is set or occurs automatically when no instructions are stated to the contrary .. Dial Pulses Interruptions in loop of a calling end. The interruptions consist of the breaking and making of the dial pulse contacts when a digit is dialed. DMI Digital Multiplexed Interface. DMI refers to: 1) The requirements and specifications for multiplexed data communication over digital facilities, between a Host computer and a PBX. 2) The actual interface that allows the above communication. DSO Digital Signal level O. The term used widely in North America for the basic digital channel rate (64 Kbps). DS1 Digital Signal level 1. The term used widely in North America for the first level 1.544 Mbps PCM multiplex signal. DTE Data Terminal Equipment. EBCDIC Extended Binary-Coded Decimal Interchange Code. 8-bit coded characters, defined by IBM. Encode Conversion of a character into a specific bit pattern. FE Framing Extended Framing Format. This format is replacing the 04 format in North America on 1.544 Mbps facilities. It incorporates error measuring and a data link, in addition to providing framing. FIFO First In, First Out. Term used to describe sequential flow of data through a buffer. Flow Control In general, a method of maintaining the orderly flow of data traffic across a data link. Also, the use of buffers and controls to avoid loosing data during transmission. Fox Message A sentence reading: THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER A LAZY DOG'S BACK 1234567890, containing all the alphanumeric characters. Several variations are commonly used. TEKELEC Gloss-S A set of 8117/89 GLOSSARY Chameleon 32 User's Guide Frame Frame Alignment A logical grouping of data and control information usually used to define a bit-oriented sequence. . The state in which the frame of the receiving equipment is correctly phased with respect to that of the received signal. Frame Level The second or link level access procedure defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model. FRAMEM Tekelec's FRAMe EMulator software package. Full Duplex Communications in which transmission occurs simultaneously in two directions. Glare Occasional simultaneous seizures occurring at both ends of a two-way channel tie-trunk signaling system. Glare conditions may be minimized, but not completely eliminated. HOLe High-level Data Link Control. A bit-oriented protocol specified by ISO. Half-Duplex Describes communications in which transmission occurs in two directions, but not simultaneously. Hexadecimal A numbering code which is based on 16 characters, or states. These characters are 0 - 9 and A-F. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. I-Field The data portion of an· Information frame in bit-oriented protocols. I-Frame A bit-oriented protocol frame containing an I-Field. Inpulse Incoming dial pulse. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. ISO International Standards Organization. Input-Output (1/0) Device A system component used to transfer data between the main storage and other devices. Interface The physical connection between two devices. Interface Signal A method of physical signaling defined by various specifications such as V.24, V.35, V.36, RS232, and RS449. KBPS Kilobits Per Second. TEKELEC G/oss-6 8/17/89 GLOSSARY Chameleon 32 User's Guide Link Level The second or link level access procedure defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model. LMA Loss of Multiframe Alignment. Indicates a loss of signaling integrity. Must be declared if a Multiframe Alignment Error (MER) occurs in at. least 3 out of 5 consecutive frames. Logical Channel One of 4095 logical communications paths defined by the CCITT X.25 Recommendations. LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check. An a-bit block check character calculated by a polynomial used for error detection. Mark The signal or communications channel state corresponding to binary one. Occurs when the current flows, or when the voltage is less than -3 V. MBPS Megabits Per Second. MHz Megahertz. MER Multiframe Alignment Error. Used .to indicate an error in the signaling framing. In signaling frames 1 to 23, a MER is defined as an error in the multiframe alignment sequence. In signaling frame 24, it is defined as either an error in the multiframe alignment sequence, andlor an error in one or more multiframe alignment signal bits. Mnemonic Codes Operations translated to a symbolic notation to facilitate human recognition and memory. They must be converted back to their original binary bit patterns by a compiler (or other device) before a· computer can interpret them. The symbolic representations, for example SABM, are called mnemonics. Mnemonic Table A . table showing the names of mnemonics, their binary equivalents, and representation in other codes. Modem A communications device that modulates digital signals at the transmitting end, and demodulates them at the receiving end. The name is a contraction of modulate and demodulate. Modulo 8 A finite number system (0 - 7) used to count the number of frames sent and received on a line [N(s) and N(r)]. Modulo 128 An expanded finite number system (0 - 127) that counts the number of frames sent and received on a line [N(s) and N(r)]. Modulus In a finite number system, the modulus is the exact number of integers available. TEKELEC Gloss-7 8117/89 GLOSSARY Chameleon 32 User's Guide MOS Message Oriented Signaling. One of two signaling techniques used with OMI, and designed to eventually replace 8it Oriented Signaling (80S). Provides a high functionality control mechanism. that allows features such as endpoint parameter negotiation, improved maintenance procedures, and better call set-up .and tear-down. The data link layer protocol is LAPO. Multi-Point Refers to a line with more than two stations connected. NRZ Non-Return to Zero encoding. NRZI Non-Return to Zero Inverted enCOding. Network A system of connected devices used for communications. Network Layer The third level defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model, responsible for establishing, maintaining, and terminating connections. Off-Hook Connected state. On-Hook Disconnected state. Outpulse An outgoing dial pulse. Packet A subdivision of a message. In packet switching operations, a message that exceeds a maximum defined length is broken . into smaller units, c·alled packets. Packet Level The third level of the ISO model, also defined by' CCITT specifications. Packet Switching A method of transmitting messages through a communication network, in which messages are subdivided into short packets. Pages Chameleon 32's unique windowing system that allows the screen to be shared between several applications. Each active application program has its own page that can be overl.apped to display multiple pages simultaneously. Parity Bit A zero or one check bit added to a byte to force the total number of the binary one digits to be always odd or always even. Parity Checking An error checking method in which character bit patterns are forced into parity (odd or even) by adding a one or zero parity bit to the transmission. TEKELEC Gloss-8 8/17/89 GLOSSARY Chameleon 32 User's Guide PBX Private Branch Exchange. A private switching system, either manual or automatic, usually serving a businesss, and located on the customer's premises. PCM Pulse Code Modulation. Conversion ·of an analog signal, such as voice, to a digital format in the form of binary-coded pusles representing the quantized amplitude samples of the analog signal. Physical Link Layer The first level defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model, concerned with transmission of unstructured bit stream over the physical medium. Point-to-Point Refers to a line with exactly two stations. Poll/Final Bit The fifth bit (low to high order) used for various signaling tasks in the AOCCP subset SABM, SARM, and SNRM. PRSS Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence. Presentation Layer The sixth layer defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model, provides independence to the application processes from differences in data representation. Primary Rate The term used in ISDN documentation to describe the first level for PCM transmission systems. There are two versions of Primary Rate Access: 1.544 Mbps and 2.048 Mbps (CEPT). Primary Station The main station in a network. In an SOLC environment, the primary station is usually a front-end processor. Protocol A set of rules and procedures for establishing and controlling communication on a line. Protocol Specific Used in this manual to refer to commands that are only used with a particular software package. Pseudo-user A portion of the Chameleon's SITREX code which is a logical entity capable of supporting a logical communications channel. QRSS Quasi-:Random Bit Sequence. RAM Random Access Memory. RMA Remote Multiframe Alarm. Indicates loss of signaling integrity at the far end. Implies a terminal' equipment failure rather than a facility failure. TEKELEC Gloss-9 8/17/89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Robbed Bit Signaling GLOSSARY Signaling. in which digit time slots primarily used for the transmission of encoded speed are periodically used for signaling. RS232C Specifications publisned by the Electronic' Industries Association (EIA) for mechanical and electrical interface standards. RS449 Specifications published by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) that provides mechanical and electrical interface standards. RZ Return to Zero. A line code that returns to zero level half way through the bit interval. This provides a pulse for each "one" bit. SNA Systems Network Architecture, developed by IBM. SOLC Synchronous Data Link Control. A bit-oriented protocol used . as the link access procedure for IBM's SNA. SIMP/L Tekelec's Simulated Interactive' Multi-Protocol Language software packages used to simulate SDLC, HOLC, and LAPD protocols with the Chameleon 32. Scenario A .series of commands structured into a program used. in Tekelec's SITREX software. Secondary Station Any station controlled by a primary station. Usually a terminal controller. Session Layer The fifth level defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model, establishes, manages, and terminates sessions between applications. Signal An intentional introduction of energy onto a line to transmit information. Simulation When one device imitates the functional behavior of another. The simulator will transmit and receive the same data and produce results identically to the simulated device. SITREX The Chameleon 32's automatic X.25 Simulator that allows generation of scenarios in an X.25 environment and creation of normal or abnormal situations to troubleshoot an X.25 Subscriber or Network. TEKELEC Gloss-tO 8117/89 GLOSSARY Chameleon 32 User's Guide Space· The signal or communications channel state corresponding to binary zero. Occurs when no current flows or when the voltage is more than + 3 V. Split Screen A CRT divided into two independent sections vertically. Start Bit A signal. used to indicate the beginning of a character transmission in asynchronous protocols. Stop Bit The quiescent state usually one, one and half, or two bits long following the transmission of a character in asynchronous transmissions. .. The internal variables used to maintain the state of a specific data communications device. State Variables Station Input or output devices within a system. Subscriber A device using the services of a network, such as an X.25 network. Supervisory Frames A type of frame used to enforce flow control in bit-oriented protocols. TOM Time Division Multiplexing. A method of serving a number of simultaneous channels over a common transmission path by assigning the transmission path sequentially to the various channels, each assignment being for a discrete time interval. Terminal An input or output device used to send data to or receive data from another device in the system. Transmission Mode Control Byte An eight bit word used in Tekelec' s Bisync software to provide instructions to the hardware designating the procedure for handling frames. Trace An analysis function within Tekelec's Simulation software in which each frame transmitted or received on the line is stored. Transport Layer The fourth level defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model, provides transparent transfer of data between end points, end-to-end error recovery, and flow control. Trigger The definition of a condition or event used to initiate a specified action. TEKELEC Gloss-11 8/17/89 Chameleon 32 User's Guide Transparency Unnumbered Frame GLOSSARY A transmission mode which suspends the recognition of control characters so that any bit pattern may be transmitted as data.. A type of frame used for a variety of control functions in bitoriented protocols. U-frames do not carry sequence numbers, and do not alter the sequencing or flow of numbered I-frames. Video Attribute The way a character is displayed on a CRT screen, for example color, blinking, half intensity, reverse video, bold, or italics. Window The maximum number of frames which may be outstanding or unacknowledged during transmission at any time. Write Protected A disk or file which cannot be erased or written over. X.2S A set of packet switching standards developed by the CCITT. TEKELEC GlosS-12 8/17/89 INDEX A. AC Voltage Selection, 1-1 Acquisition, ~24 256k Data Capture, App. K Buffer, 1-8, 3-12, 4-15 Run/Stop Key. 3-30 ACTIONS, Triggering; 8-44 Add new trigger, 8-7 Analysis, Analysis Page. General Features of, 4-2 Applications, 4-1 Baud Rate, Calculation of, 4-4 Changes. 4-4 Buffer, 4-15 Colors, 4-3 Control Keys, 4-10 Ctrl B, 4-10 Ctrl C, 4-11 Ctrl E, 4-11 Ctrl N, 4-11 Ctrl P, 4-11 Ctrl Z, 4-14 Data, Saving, 4-1 DCElDTE Display, 4-2 Event, Incomplete, Display of, 4-4 Overwritten message, 4-16 Files, Function Keys, 4-9 Function Keys, Analysis: Fl,4-6, F2,4-7 F3,4-8 F4-F9,4-8 FlO, 4-8 History Page, 4-1, 4-2 Buffer, 4-15 Ctrl + P, Use of, 4-11 Features of, 4-17 Freeze, 4-18 History Lock, 4-17 History Display Commands, 4-18 Printing, Methods of, 4-:-11 Incomplete Event Display, 4-4 Interface Lead Transitions, 4-3 Overwritten Event, Mechanism, Message, 4-16 Printing, Data, 4-11 Methods of, 4-12 Real-TIme Page, 4-1, 4-2 Replay traffic. 6-4 RUN/STOP. SS7. 4-10. 4-14 Save Traffic. 4-1. 6-1 • 6-3. 6-6 Search, Protocol parameters, 4-14 Starting, 4-1 TIme Stamping. 4-4 use of, 4-3, 4-17 User Data, 4-8 Application Selections Menu. 1-9,3-17, 3-28 Function Keys. 3-20 F1 Load/Stop A, 3-20. 3-28 F2 Load B. 3-28 F3 Load AB, 3-28 F6 Reset, 3-21 F7 Menu, 3-21 F8 Save, 3-22 F9 Set T.O., 3-23 FlO Exit, 3-23 Monitoring Applications, 3-18 Simulation Applications, 3-18 Stopping Applications, 3-24 Applications Monitoring, 3-18 Simulation, 3-18 Starting, 3-20 Stopping, 3-23, 3-24 ASCII keys, 3-36 Aux Serial Port 1, 2-5 Connector Pinouts, c-4 Aux Serial Port 2, 2-5 Connector Pinouts, c-4 B. Back up files (to floppy), 9-24 Basic Rate Interface. p-4, 1-6, 3-13 Overlay, E-7 Battery, Lithium, installation of, A-2 BERT Une Synchronization, 11-17 Procedure for using, 11-2 Pattern Editor, 11-13 Run-Time Display, 11-15 Setup Menus, 11:...s ASYNC, 11-6 ISDN PRI, 11-7 ISDN 2B1Q and BRI, 11-7 SYNC, 11-6 Setup parameters, 11-8, 11-9 Testing configurations, 11-1 Bit Error Rate Testing (See BERT) Board Configurations, A-2 Index-1. 09/27/91 INDEX Booting, 1-3 Autoboot Timer, 3-16, 3-23 D~FAIJLT configuration, 3-14 Butters Acquisition, 1-8, 3-12, 4-15 Event. 5-1 c. C Development System (See Vol IV) Applications, 3-19, 10-6 Features, p-3 Ubraries, p-4 ccrrr ISUP, Triggering on, 8-35 CC!TT TUP, Triggering on, 8-33 Cancel key, 3-35 Card Cage, 2-8 Chameleon II File Conversion, 9-16 Change Directory, 1O-S Clock, Real TIme, 2-8, 3-24, 3-30 Co-Oirectional Interlace (G.703), App. J Configuration Menu, 3-3, 3-27 Capture Mode, 3-12 Description, 3-4 Function Keys, 3-13 F1 - F5, 3-13 F6 Setup, 3-13 F7 Physical. 3-13 Fa Version, 3-13 F9 Save, 3-14 FlO Set T.O, 3-15 Mode of Operation Parameter, 3-7 Monitoring Data Source, 3-11 Physical Interlace Parameter, 3-8 Protocol Parameter, 3-9 Red arrow cursor, 3-3 Setup Mode Parameter, 3-5 Connect Mode, 9-19 Control Keys (Analysis), 4-10 Ctrl S, 4-10 Ctrl C, 4-11 Ctrl E, 4-11 Ctrl N. 4-11 Ctrl p, 4-11 Ctrl S, 4-14 Ctrl U, 4-14 Ctri V, Ctrl Z, 4-14 Conversion 645fl05 Analysis files, 9-16 FMS Files, 9-27 Copy files, 10-10 CRC Error, -12 Customer Support, 2-16,A-l D. Data Capture, 256 k, App. K DASS 2 Triggering, 8-20 Delete files, 10-12 Delete trigger, 8-7 . Device(s), external, triggering to, 8-53 Diagnostic Test (Hardware), 2-10 Coupler Test, 2-11 . Error Messages, 2-12 RAM Test. 2-14 Dired-To-Disk, 6-1 ff Configuration, 3-11 General Notes, 4-1, 6-2 loading a File, 6-7 Recording Traffic, 6-3 Replaying Traffic, 6-4 Saving Data to a File, 6-6 Disk Copy, 10-15 Display (CRT). 2-7 Disk Drives, 2-8 DPC, formatting options, 8-22 DSCS Interlace Module, App. I DTElDCE,8-12 Dualline Application Introduction, 5-1 Dual Une vx. AnalYSiS, 5-1 Modes, 5-3 Run Mode, 5-3 Freeze Mode, 5-7 Dual Port p-5, 3-25 Analysis Control keys, 4-10 Applications Selection Menu, 3-28 Configuration, 3-27 lEO Display, 3-27 Run/Stop Key, 3-30 E. Erasing trigger entries. 8-8 Error, CRC.( See CRC Error) Event Overwritten Message, 4-16 External device(s), triggering to, 8-53 F. Fast Mo(nitoring), p-6, App. K File Management Menu C Applications, 10-0 . Change Diredory(Chdir-Fl}.10-8 Connect (F9), 10-21 Copy (Copy Files - F2), 10-10 Delete File ( F3), 10-12 Disk Copy (F6), 10-15 Index-2. 09/27/91 INDEX File Format. 10-2 File Name Convention. 10-2 File Name Extensions. 1Q-4 Floppy Disk Directories. 10-2 Format Floppy Disk (F5), 10-14 Hard Disk Directories, 10-2 Hard Disk Directory Structure, 10-3 Ust Selector, 10-7 Menu Access, 10-6 Receive File (F8), 10-19 Redisplay files, 10-9 Rename (Rename File - F4), 10-13 Transmit File (F7), 10-16 View files, 10-9 File Name Convention, 10-2 File Name Extensions, 1Q-4 File Transfer Connect Mode, 10-21 Kermit Setup, 9-19,10-16 to 10-21 Receive File, 10-19 Transmit File, 10-16 Files, Function key, 3-5, 4-6, 4-9 Files (keyboard) key, 10-6 Floppy Disk Drive Description, 2-8 Disk Storage, 1-3 Diskette Usage, 2-9 Protector, 1-2 FMS File Conversion , 9-29 Format floppy disk, 10-14 Formatting options, DPC/OPC, 8-22 Frame, 8-13 FramLen, 8-15 Freeze, History, 4-18 Front Panel, 2-3 Function Keys Analysis, 4-6 to 4-8 Configuration, 3-4 to 3-23 Event. 5-5 Statistics. 7-2 to 7-8 Triggering, 8-7 G. G.703 Co-Directional Interface. App. J Go key, 3-35 H. Hardware Self-Tests, 2-10 Coupler Test. 2-11 Error Messages, 2-12 RAM Test. 2-14 HDLC Triggering, 8-16 Help, 3-38 Hide Page key, 3-34, 3-37 Highlight/Search feature, 4-14 History Freeze. 4-18 History Lock. 4-17 History Page. 4-1, 4-2 History Display Commands, 4-18 I. Incomplete Event Display, 4-4 Installation Hardware, 1-1 Software. 2-15 Interface LEDs. 2-4, App. E Internal Components, 2-6 Card Cage, 2-8 Disk Drives, 2-8 Display, 2-7 Power Supply, 2-9 Interpretation, Perfonnance page, 7-9 ISUP, Triggering on. 8-34 J. (No entries.) K. Keyboard,2-4,3-33 Arrow Keys, 3-36 ASCII Keys. 3-36 Dedicated Keys, 3-33 Function Keys. 3-39 Hex values. 9-8 Left-Hand Keys, 3-34 Remote tenninal. -9-7 Right-Hand Keys, 3-35 Kennit File Transfer, 9-19. 10-16 to Index-3. 09/27/91 10-2~ INDEX L. Power Cord. 1-1 Ports Aux Serial 1, 2-6, C-4 Aux Serial 2, 2-6. C-4 Video Connector, 2-6. C-5 Parallel Printer. 2-5, C-1 Remote I/O, 2-5. C-3 SCSI. 2-6. 0-1 Serial Printer. 2-5. C-2 Parallel Printer Port. 2-5 Connector Pinout. C-1 Port, triggering; 8-35 Power Switch, 1-2 Power Supply, 2-9 Power Up. 1-1 Primary Rate Interface. p-4 (See Vol II. Chapter 11) ANSI LED Overlay, E-3 CEPT LED Overlay. E-5 Print Page key. 3-34 Print Screen key, 3-34 Print (AnalySiS). 4-10 Printer Setup. 9-9 Printer Ports Serial Printer. 2-5, C-2 Paranel Printer, 2-5, 0-1 Programming examples. triggering. 8-44 Protocol Selection, 3-9, 3-13 LED Displays, App. E Leads, 4-3,8-43 Ust Selector, 10:-7 Uthium battery, A-2 Loading trigger files, 8-8 M. Menus BERT, 11-5 Main Configuration Menu, 3-3 Applications Selection Menu, 3-17 File Management Menu, 10:-1. 1Q-6 Utilities Menu. 9-1. 9-2 Triggering Menus, 8-1 Mode of Operation. 1-6,3-7 Modem.App.M Monitor Display Port, 2-6 Connector Pinout, c-s Monitoring AppliCations, p-1. 1-12 at external device, 8Features. p-1 Une (from the). 3-11 Disk (from). 3-11 Protocols. p-2 Move keys, 3-35. H7 < ... < < Q. N. 0.921 Triggering. 8-17 0.931 Triggering, 8-19 New name. trigger, 8-7 R. o. On-Line Help, 3-38 OPC formatting options, 8-22 . Overlay, U-Imerface. E-l1 P. Page, Performance (See Performance Page) Pages, 3-31 ' Active Page, 3-32; i Multiple Pages, 3-31 Page Manipulation Keys, 1-11. 3-31 Performance Page. 7-91. . Physical Interface, 3-8 Picture Control. 1-3 Port Configuration. 1-4 Real-Time Clock. 2-8, 3-24. 3-30 Rear Panel, 2-5 R&-Oisplay files, 10:-9 Remote Control. App. M Remote I/O Port. 2-5 Connector Pinout, C-3 Serialized Remote Mode. 9-3 Setup, 9-3 Remote keyboard, 9-7 Rename file, 10:-13 Replace key, 3-34. 3-37 Reset Button, 1-3 Restore files (from floppy). 9-24 Run/Stop Key. 3-30. 4-3. 4-17. 7-2 RunTime Message (see Messages. RunTime Triggering) RunTime Triggering Page. 8-42 Index-4. 09/27/91 INDEX s .. SCSI, 2-B, 0-1 Saving Data, 4-1, 6-1 Trigger entries, 8-8 Scroll keys, 3-35 Search Protocol--based, 8-15 Frame, 8-13 Select key, 3-34, 3-37 Serial Number, 2-1 Serial Printer, 2-5 Connector Pinout, G-2 Serial Ports. 2-5, c-4 Setting Up, 2-1 Show Page key, 3-34, 3-37Simulation (See Volume III) Features, p-2 BASIClanguages,p-3 Software Installation, 2-15 System Disks, 2-2 SS#7 Analysis (Vol II, Chapter 13) Statistics (Vol II, Chapter 13) Triggering, 8-22 to 8-46 ISUP, 8-35 LeveI2,8-23 Level 3, 8-25 Level 4, 8-25 TR7ISUP, 8-39 TUP, 8-33 Statistics Address Key, 7-4 Byte key, 7-8 Display, 7-2 Example page, 7-3 Function Keys. 7-2 Performance Page, 7-9f. Protocol Layer key, 7-B Protocols, 7-1 Print key, 7-7 Report, 7-7 Reset key, 7-8 Time/Date key, 7-8 Status field, trigger, 8-9 Storage Compartment, 1-1,2-3 Support, customer, A-1 T. Temperature Requirements, 2-9 Tekelec Customer Support, 2-16 Timer, Triggering, 8-12 lime, System, 9-12 lime Stamping, 2-8, 3-24, 3-30, 4-4, Dual Port. 3-30 Triggering Actions Parameter, 8-44 =>Disk, 8-45 Arm, 8-44 Display, 8-44 IncCnt,8-45 Mesg,8-45 ResCnt, 8-46 SetVars, 8-46 Stats, 8-44 StopAcq, 8-45 .. Timer, 8-46 V Arith, 8-46 TrigOut, 8-46 Add trigger, 8-7 Conditions Parameter, 8-10 Counter, 8-12 DASS 2, 8-20 DTElDCE, 8-12 Error, 8-12 Frame, 8-13 FramLen, 8-15 ISUP, 8-35 Leads, 8-43 Menu Structure, 8-11 Negative (Logical NOT), 8-1-0 Protocol,8-15 0.921,8-17 0.931. 8-19 RLlime, 8-13 SS#7, 8-22 SS#7 Level 2, 8-23 SS#7 Level 3 and 4, 8-25 Timer, 8-13 TR7ISUP, 8-39 TUP, 8-33 Variable, 8-42 X.25,8-18 DASS 2, 8-20 Default Names, 8:-7 Delete Trigger, 8-7 Editor,8-B Examples, 8-49 External device(s), triggering to,8-53 Name Parameter, 8-7 F1 Addtrig, 8-7 F2 NewName, 8-7 F3 Deltrig, 8-7 Fa Restart, 8-8 F9 Load, 8-8 FlO Save, 8-8 Index-5. 09/27/91 INDEX Page, 8-5 F1 Start New Session, 8-5 F2 Load Triggering Disk, 8-5 Run-time, 8-47 0.921,8-17 0.931,8-19 Rename Trigger, 8-7 Run Time Triggering Page, 8-47 Messages, 8-48 Starting, 8-4 Status Parameter, 8-9 F1 1stTime, 8-9 F2 Disable, 8-9 F3 Whenever, 8-9 F8 Restart, 8-8 F9 Load, 8-8 F10Save, 8-8 Triggering Page, 8-5 Run-Time, 8-47 X.25,8-18 u. u-tntenace Overlay, E-11 Utilities 645n05 Analysis Conversio~ (F5), 9-16 Backup/Restore Menu (F8). 9-26 Operation, 9-27 Source, 9-25 Check Free Disk Space (F6), 9-20 Disk Drive, 9-20 Configuration Files, 9-6, 9-10, 9-25 • Connect Mode (F7), 9-21 FMS File Conversion (F9), 9-29 Dir;9-29 Convert, 9-29 Full Cv, 9-29 Kermit Setup (F7), 9-21 Configuration files (saving), 9-25 Modes, 9-21 Data Transfer, 9-21 Connect Mode, 9-21 Default Setup File, 9-22 Baud Rate, 9-22 Number of Data BitS, 9-23 Number of Stop Bits, 9-23 Parity, 9-23 File Type, 9-23 Number of Retransmissions, 9-24 Transmission Intervai, 9-24 Menu Access, 9-2 Printer Setup (F2), 9-9 Printer Type, 9-10 Print Commands and Keys, 9-11 Remote i/o Port Setup (F1). 9-3 Serialized Remote Mode, 9-3 Compatible Terminal Type, 9-5 Baud Rate. 9-5 . Number of Data Bits, 9-5 . Number of Stop Bits, 9--5 Parity,9-6 Remote Terminal Keyboard. 9-7 Keyboard Hex Values, 9-8 Set Date and Time (F3). 9-12 Traffic; load/Save (F4). 9-13 Operation, 9-13 File Name, 9-14 Data Source. 9-14 Percentage. 9-15 Data Size, 9-15 Unfreeze (History). 4-19 v. Variable, comparison of, 8-35 Variable $7, $8, $9; 8-14 View files, 1Q-9 Volume Control, 1-3 V.24 Intenace, App. B V.35 Interlace, App. B V.36 Intenace, App. H Voltage Selection, 1-1 w. (No entries.) x. X.21 LED Overlay, E-9 x'25 Triggering, 8-18 Index-S. 09127191
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2016:12:19 08:06:33-08:00 Modify Date : 2016:12:19 08:24:01-08:00 Metadata Date : 2016:12:19 08:24:01-08:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:fb8e0b07-eb12-6248-9e50-ef64cd0f63fe Instance ID : uuid:88f6f4c3-1eb6-d141-92d4-c4fd16d61cf0 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 358EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools